The Second Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the Church in Corinth

The Second Epistle of the Apostle Paulto the Church in Corinth

Ancient Road Publicationstrade

S T U D Y G U I D ES T U D Y G U I D ES T U D Y G U I D ES T U D Y G U I D ES T U D Y G U I D E

with Comparative Greek Interlinear Text

By Kyle Pope

The Second Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the Church in Corinth - Study Guidewith Comparative Greek Interlinear Text

By Kyle Pope

First Edition copy 1995 Kyle PopeSecond Edition copy 2001 Kyle PopeAncient Road PublicationstradePO Box 20399Amarillo TX 79114httpwwwancientroadpublicationscom

Preface i

Chapter One 1

Chapter Two 13

Chapter Three 23

Chapter Four 35

Chapter Five 47

Chapter Six 63

Chapter Seven 73

Chapter Eight 87

Chapter Nine 97

Chapter Ten 107

Chapter Eleven 117

Chapter Twelve 131

Chapter Thirteen 141

T A B L E O F T A B L E O F T A B L E O F T A B L E O F T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S C O N T E N T S C O N T E N T S C O N T E N T S C O N T E N T S

P R E F A C EP R E F A C EP R E F A C EP R E F A C EP R E F A C E

Bible study is more than simply ldquosoaking uprdquo information It is themeans by which we come to know the will of the Almighty God and thetool which He uses to reshape our character after the Divine nature

All Bible study should have two goals1 To increase a studentrsquos knowledge of Bible truths

2 To teach the student how to apply these truths to their life

This guide is designed to be an aid to Bible study It may be used inconnection with Bible classes to supplement information provided by theteacher to aid in discussion or it may be used in private study

Format

The study is built upon the chapter divisions that have been put into theepistle Each chapter will have an outline at the beginning that willsubdivide the chapter into smaller sections These

sections will have a brief study on some of the verses withinthat subdivision The studies will vary in nature from analy-sis application word study etc The study approach willbe identified by a circle and title bar at the beginning ofeach section as shown to the right At the end of eachchapter there will be a review section testing what the stu-dent has retained from the study of the chapter

The Greek Interlinear Text

Included within the study is an interlinear text of the epistle containing aGreek text and an English interlinear translation Those unfamiliar withhow to use an interlinear should not be intimidated by this addition An

interlinear version allows a student with little or no knowledge of New Testa-ment Greek to get a feel for the language in which the New Testament waswritten The top line contains the Greek text of the Epistle Below each Greek

i

Greek word is an English word (or words) which closely approximates theliteral meaning of the word In some instances a word for word translation iseasily made In other cases however this is not so readily done given thedifferent ways that languages communicate ideas In the end it becomes amatter of the best judgment of a translator as to what English words bestcommunicate the meaning of the Greek In determining the wording for thisinterlinear translation the following tools were consulted to prevent my per-sonal bias from dominating the outcome

The Interlinear Greek-English New Testamentby Alfred Marshall Samuel Bagster amp Sons Ltd

The Pocket Interlinear New Testamentby Jay P Green Sr Baker Book House

Grand Rapids Michigan 1979

The Analytical Greek Lexicon (Revised)By Harold K Moulton Zondervan Corp

The Greek Text

The Greek text which is used is a completely new format than is used inother versions It is a comparative text Most texts are forced to acceptone of three traditions

1 The Received Text Tradition (Textus Receptus) mdash This is the tradi-tional text that has been used since the Reformation It was compiled by thescholar Erasmus and used in the translation of the King James Version

2 The Critical Text Tradition mdash This refers to the texts which havebeen complied in the 19th and 20th centuries relying heavily on textual dis-coveries made in recent times These editions of the Greek New Testamentreject some readings of the Received Text and the bulk of later manuscripts infavor of the readings supported by the earliest manuscripts which have beenpreserved This tradition is represented in the Westcott amp Hort Nestle andUnited Bible Society texts

3 The Majority Text Tradition mdash This is a relatively new approach totextual study which relies somewhat more heavily on the bulk of textual evi-dence rather than the age Thomas Nelson Publishers has produced a textfollowing this approach

Second Corinthians

ii

Rather than accepting or rejecting either of the three textual traditionsused in most editions the aim of this text is to provide a workable way for aperson with limited knowledge of Greek to identify the content of all three Inaddition to this notation is made of variations that exist among the four old-est manuscripts (the Sinai text the Alexandrian text the Vatican text and theChester Beatty papyri) As a result this is truly a comparative text designed toreveal the evidence without leaning towards any particular tradition

Using The Text

The following will prove helpful in utilizing both the English and Greekportions of the interlinear

English mdash The grammar of Ancient Greek naturally differs a great dealfrom modern twentieth century English This is most keenly seen in the useof the definite article (ldquotheldquo) and in word order For example there will betimes that Greek will use a definite article when English would not (as in 11ldquothe Achaiardquo) and times when it is implied though absent in the text Thefollowing symbols will be used in the English

( ) Indicates that the inclosed words are not in the Greektext itself but implied

123etc Indicates a suggested order in which words should beread to be more understandable in English

[ ] Indicates a variation between some manuscripts or edi-tions

Indicates where one alternate reading stops and anotherstarts

Greek mdash The following symbols are used in the Greek Text

p46 The symbol for the papyrus owned by ChesterBeatty and located in Dublin and Ann ArborMichigan which contains the epistles of Paul Itdates to about the year 200

alefsym The symbol for the Sinai manuscript Discoveredin the last century and located in London Itdates to the 4th century

A The symbol for the Alexandrian manuscript It islocated in London and dates to the 5th century

Preface

iii

B The symbol for the Vatican manuscript It is lo-cated in the Vatican and dates to the 4th century

t The symbol for the ldquoTextus Receptusrdquo (ReceivedText) as represented by the Trinitarian BibleSociety Text

c The symbol for the ldquoCritical Textrdquo as representedby the United Bible Society Text (Third Edition)

m The symbol for the ldquoMajority Textrdquo as representedby the Hodges amp Farstad text published by ThomasNelson

symbol Indicates a manuscript as changed by a contemporaryeditor

symbol1 Indicates the original reading of a manuscript prior toeditorial changes

symbol2 Indicates a manuscript as changed by a later editor[ ] Indicates a reading which varies among manuscripts Indicates an occasion in which one alternate reading

inclosed in bracets [ ] varies from others slightly Indicates where one alternate reading ends and

another begins Indicates an alternate reading leading back to this

marksymbolvid Indicates an instance in which a manuscript appears

to read a certain way but absolute verification isimpossible

My prayer is that this material may prove helpful in the study of Godrsquosword I am not an expert in ancient Greek nor in the sci-ence of Textual criticism My contribution is more scribal than au-

thoritative However given that no work of this nature (to my knowledge) isavailable my hope is that it will aid the sincere student in their attempt todiscern truth To God be the glory in all things

Kyle Pope Evangelist

Second Corinthians

iv

ΠαEumlλος ἀπOgraveστολος [Atm - ᾿ΙησοEuml

ΧπιστοEuml p 46alefsymBc- ΧπιστοEuml ᾿ΙησοEuml] διὰ

θελAEligmicroατος ΘεοEuml καlsaquo Τ[B adds -ε]ιmicroOgraveθεος ı

ἀδελφOgraveς τordf sectκκλησᾳ τοEuml ΘεοEuml τordf οIcircσ˙ sectν

Κορνθƒ σAacuteν τοrsaquoς ἁγοις πᾶσιν [Btm omit]

τοrsaquoς οOcircσιν [B1 omits] sectν ˜λ˙ τordf ᾿Αχα˝ᾳampampampampampamp amp 2

χάρις Iacutemicrorsaquoν καlsaquo ε(ρAEligνη ἀπUacute ΘεοEuml ΠατρUacuteς

lemicrolaquoν καlsaquo Κυρου ᾿ΙησοEuml ΧριστοEuml

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R O N E O N E O N E O N E O N E

Introduction

Paul identifies himself in the first verses of the epistle with Timothy Inthe first epistle to the Corinthians Paul spoke of Timothyrsquos coming tothem (I Corinthians 1610) It is clear that this second epistle was writ-

ten after Timothyrsquos return Thereis some question as to how muchtime elapsed between the first andsecond epistles Some suggest thatthere was actually a letter writtenbetween them that is now lost Oth-ers view the second letter to havebeen sent after hearing the reportfrom Timothy For our study we willaccept the latter view

Date Summer or fall of 57 AD (ICorinthians 1668)

Location Macedonia (Acts2012 I Corinthians 165 IICorinthians 116) [Note Ascribal note on the Vaticanmanuscript (4th century) claimsit was written in Philippi]

Carrier Probably Titus (II Corinthians 823) [Note Some late manuscriptsadd a subscription that claims that Luke and Titus carried the epistle]

Outline

I Greeting and blessing to the Corinthians (vss 1-2)II Godrsquos Comfort in Affliction (vss 3-7)III Paulrsquos affliction in Asia (vss 8-11)IV The Nature of Gospel Preaching (vss 12-14)V The Explanation for his delay in coming to them

(vss 15-24)

II Corinthians 112

Paul (an)apostle [of-Jesus

Christ of-Christ Jesus] through

(the) will of-God and 3Timothy 1the

2brother to-the congre- of-the God thebeing ingation (one)

Corinth with 2the 3saints 1all

thebeing in all the Achaia(ones)

Grace to-you and peace from God (the) Father

of-us and Lord Jesus Christ

1

Blessed (be) the God and Father of-the

Lord of-us Jesus Christ the Father of-the

compassions and God of-all

consolation the- consoling us over(one)

all the oppress- of-us unto the enabling usion

to-console the- in all oppress- through the(ones) ion

consolation by-which we-are- ourselves bybeing-consoled

the God Because just-as 5abounds 1the

2sufferings 3of-the 4Christ unto us thus

through the Christ 5abounds

1even2the 3consolation 4of-us

II Corinthians 13-5

Godrsquos Consolation in Affliction 13-7

Paul begins this epistle with a discourse on consola-tion God is identified as the ldquoFather of merciesrdquoand ldquoGod of all comfortrdquo (13) Notice some signifi-

cant words used in this passage and their meanings

ldquoMerciesrdquo (vs 3) mdash Oiktirmos (ο(κτιρmicroOgraveς) - ldquoCompas-sion pity mercy emotions longings manifestations of

pityrdquo (Thayer p 442) mdashldquoOiktirmos is used for the emotionof sympathy itselfrdquo (Kittel Vol V p159) mdash ldquoLet God have universaland eternal praiseBecause he isthe Father of merciesthe sourcewhence all mercy flows whether itrespect the body or the soul timeor eternity the source of tendermercy for so the word impliesrdquo(Clarke Vol VI p 314)

ldquoComfortrdquo - ldquoConsolationrdquo(vss 3-7) mdash Paraklesis (παράκλησις) -ldquo1 Properly a calling near sum-mons 2 imploration supplicationentreaty 3 exhortation admoni-tion encouragement 4 consola-tion comfort solaceby metonymythat which affords comfort or refresh-mentrdquo (Thayer p 483)

ldquoTribulationrdquo - ldquoTroublerdquo (vs4) mdash Thlepsis (θλrsaquoψις) - ldquoProperlypressure compression by me-tonymy affliction distress of minddistressing circumstances trial af-

flictionrdquo (Moulton p 195) mdash ldquoProperly a pressing pressing together pres-sure in biblical and ecclesiastical Greek metaphorically oppression afflic-tion tribulation distress straitsrdquo (Thayer p 291) mdash ldquoTribulationto the earlyChristians meant not so much ill health poverty or loss of friends but thesacrifices they had to make and the perils they had to meet from their procla-mation or profession of Christrdquo (Zodiates p 737)

3 ΕEgraveλογητUacuteς ı ΘεUacuteς καlsaquo ΠατOslashρ τοEuml

Κυρου lemicrolaquoν ᾿ΙησοEuml ΧριστοEuml ı ΠατOslashρ τlaquoν

ο(κτ[AB adds -ε]ιρmicrolaquoν καlsaquo ΘεUacuteς πάσης

παρακλAEligσεως 4 ı παρακαλlaquoν lemicroᾶς sectπlsaquo

πάσ˙ τordf θλψει lemicrolaquoν ε(ς τUacute δEcircνασθαι lemicroᾶς

παρακαλεrsaquoν τοAacuteς sectν πάσ˙ θλψει διὰ τinfinς

παρακλAEligσεως prodς παρακαλοEcircmicroεθα αEgraveτοlsaquo IacuteπUacute

τοEuml ΘεοEuml 5 ˜τι καθ7ς περισσεEcircει τὰ

παθAEligmicroατα τοEuml ΧριστοEuml ε(ς lemicroᾶς οIumlτω[alefsymABc

adds -ς] διὰ τοEuml [t omits] ΧριστοEuml περισσεEcircει

καlsaquo le παράκλησ[A adds -ε]ις lemicrolaquoν 6 εDaggerτε

Second Corinthians

2

Chapter One

δcent θλ[B adds -ε]ιβOgravemicroεθα Iacuteπcentρ τinfinς Iacutemicrolaquoν

παρακλAEligσεως καlsaquo σωτηρας [B omits] [tm

- τinfinς sectνεργουmicrodegνης sectν Iacuteποmicroονordf τlaquoν αEgraveτlaquoν

παθηmicroάτων œν καlsaquo lemicroεrsaquoς πάσχοmicroεν εDaggerτε

παρακαλοEcircmicroεθα Iacuteπcentρ τinfinς Iacutemicrolaquoν

παρακλAEligσεως καlsaquo σωτηρας m omits

alefsymABc - εDaggerτε παρακαλοEcircmicroεθα Iacuteπcentρ τinfinς Iacutemicrolaquoν

παρακλAEligσεως τinfinς sectνεργουmicrodegνης sectν Iacuteποmicroονordf

τlaquoν αEgraveτlaquoν παθηmicroάτων œν καlsaquo

lemicroεalefsymomitsrsaquoς πάσχοmicroεν p46 omits - œν καlsaquo

lemicroεrsaquoς πάσχοmicroεν] 7 καlsaquo le sectλπlsaquoς le[B has -

Iacute]microlaquoν βεβαα Iacuteπcentρ Iacutemicrolaquoν [B adds -

παρακλAEligσεως καlsaquo σωτηρας m adds - εDaggerτε

παρακλAEligσεως καlsaquo σωτηρας ] ε(δOgraveτες τι [tm

- Agraveσπερ alefsymABc- hellipς] κοινωνο sectστε τlaquoν

παθηmicroάτων [p 46 omi t s -καlsaquo le sectλπlsaquoς

παθηmicroάτων] [tm - οIumlτω alefsymABc - οIumlτως]

καlsaquo τinfinς παρακλAEligσεως

I Corinthians 167

1even2the 3consolation 4of-us If

then we-are-being-oppressed over the 4of-you-all

1consolation 2and 3salvation

[of-the working in endurance of-the same

sufferings which 2even 1we suffer if

we-are-being-consoled over the 4of-you-all

if we-are- over the 6of-being-consoled you-all

1consolation 2of-the 3working 4in 5endurance

of-the same sufferings which 2even

1we suffer which even

we suffer] And the hope of-us

[of- (is) firm over you-allyou-all]

[consolation and salvation if

we-are-being over the 4of-consoled you-all

1consolation 2and 3salvation] we-know that

just-as as partners we-are of-the

sufferings [and the hope

sufferings thus

also of- consolationthe

Paul tellsthe Corin-t h i a n s

that Godrsquos con-solation enablesChristians tocomfort those

who face affliction If we are to ap-ply this principle to our own liveswe must understand two questions

+ ldquoHow does God offer us

consolation in afflictionrdquomdash Through the promises offered inHis word (II Peter 12-4)mdash Through the encouragement ofbrethren (Galatians 62 I Thessa-lonians 514)mdash Through time spent in prayer(Philippians 467)mdash Through His providential care inour lives (Hebrews 135 Matthew63334 2820)

+ ldquoHow may we offer con-

solation to those in afflic-

tionrdquo mdash When someone faces ahardship which you yourself havegone through take the time to sharewith them how you felt and how youendured itmdash When you learn that someone isfacing a hardship do a little some-thing nice for them without beingaskedmdash Take a little time to call or dropa note to someone who is sick dis-couraged or facing hardshipmdash When you hear that someone haslost their job or experienced a lossof property offer help without be-ing asked

3

Second Corinthians

Paulrsquos Affliction in Asia 18-11

Reference is made in verse eight to the trouble whichcame to Paul and his companions in Asia Versenine claims he had the ldquosentence of deathrdquo in him-

self If our dating is correct the events described seem atleast in part to refer to the riot in Ephesus recorded inActs 1923-41 Apparently the first epistle to the Corin-thians was written before this riot When the first epistle

was written Paul was still inEphesus (I Corinthians 168)though he was aware of the adver-saries that were set against him (ICorinthians 169) Immediately af-ter the riot Paul left Ephesus (Acts201)

Chronology of the

Events in Acts 19

I Upon coming to Ephesus Paulsucceeds in the conversion of twelvemen who had before received thebaptism of John (Acts 191-7)

II For three months Paultaught in the synagogue (Acts 198)

III When opposed by the JewsPaul and the disciples withdrawfrom the synagogue and begin tomeet in the school of Tyrannus (Acts199)

IV While in Ephesus for twoyears the gospel is taken through-out all Asia (Acts 1910)V Jewish exorcists are overcome

by an evil spirit when they try to imitate Paulrsquos miracles The event becomesknown throughout all Ephesus (Acts 1911-17)

VI Many believe in the gospel including those who had practiced sor-cery They burn their books of magic in the sight of all (Acts 1918-20)

VII A silversmith named Demetrius (who made images of Diana) stirs upother craftsmen against the disciples because of the financial losses they hadexperienced due to the conversions in Ephesus (Acts 1923-28)

8 οEgrave γὰρ θdegλοmicroεν Iacutemicroᾶς ἀγνοεrsaquoν

ἀδελφο [Btcm - Iacuteπcentρ alefsymA- περlsaquo] τinfinς

θλψεως lemicrolaquoν τinfinς γενοmicrodegνης [alefsym2tm - lemicrorsaquoν

p46ABalefsym1c omit] sectν τordf Ασᾳ τι καθ᾿ IacuteπερβολOslashν

[tm - sectβαρAEligθηmicroεν Iacuteπcentρ δEcircναmicroιν p46alefsymABc

- Iacuteπcentρ δEcircναmicroιν sectβαρAEligθηmicroεν] Agraveστε

sectξαπορηθinfinναι lemicroᾶς καlsaquo τοEuml ζordfν 9 ἀλλὰ[alefsymA

omit] αEgraveτοlsaquo sectν bullαυτοrsaquoς τUacute ἀπOgraveκριmicroα τοEuml

θανάτου sectσχAEligκαmicroεν να microOslash πεποιθOgraveτες Œmicroεν

sectφ᾿ bullαυτοrsaquoς ἀλλ᾿ sectπlsaquo τldquo Θεldquo τldquo sectγε[alefsym

omits]ρο[p46- α]ντι τοAacuteς νεκροEcircς [A omits] 10

3not 1For 2we-wish you-all to-be-unknowing

brothers [over about] the

oppression of-us mdash having-been on-us

in mdash Asia that mdasha-throw-beyond=exceedingly

[we-have-been- above ability weighed-down

above ability we-have-been- so-asweighed-down]

to-despair we even mdash to-live But

ourselves 6in 7our- 2the 3sentence 4of-theselves

5death 1we-have in- 2no 3assurance 1we-order-that should-have

upon our- but upon the God the- (who)selves (one)

raises [has raised] the dead

II Corinthians 18-9

4

Chapter One

VIII The city rushes into the theater dragging with them Paulrsquos compan-ions Gaius and Aristarchus chanting for two full hours ldquoGreat is Diana of theEphesiansrdquo (Acts 1929-34)

IX For fear of his life Paul is prevented by the disciples from going intothe theater (Acts 193031)

X The city clerk succeeds in calming the crowd and urging them to makea formal complaint against the disciples (Acts 1935-41)

Working Together in Prayer

In verse ele-ven Paulclaims that

the Corinthianswere of help tohim in that they

had been ldquohelping together inprayerrdquo on his behalf Thoughclearly they had also been of somematerial assistance to him it is sig-nificant that he first mentions theirprayers on his behalf

+ ldquoHow may we work with

others in prayerrdquo mdash Make anote of gospel preachers working inhard areas Then in your personalprayers specifically talk to Godabout their situation and pray fortheir success and encouragementmdash When you learn of those facingsome type of trial tell them that youare praying for their triumph over it Then spend time in prayer talking to Godabout the trial and appeal to Him for help for them that they might havevictory over the hardshipmdash As you struggle with hardship or temptation confess your struggles to oth-ers and ask them to pray for youmdash When someone confesses a struggle with temptation or hardship devotetime to praying for them that they might win over their battle Then let themknow that you are praying for them regularlymdash Pray regularly and specifically for the congregation you are identified withand the specific members Mention members specifically whom you may havehad struggles with or who have weaknesses

˜ς sectκ τηλικοEcircτου[p46- ων] θανάτου[p46- ων]

sectρρ[B1 omits]Ecircσατο lemicroᾶς καlsaquo [tm-ῥEcircεται

p46alefsymBc- ῥEcircσεται A omits] ε(ς ˜ν leλπκαmicroεν

˜τι [p 46B omi t] καlsaquo paraτι ῥEcircσεται 11

συνυπουργοEcircντων καlsaquo Iacute[A has -le]microlaquoν Iacuteπcentρ

[alefsym had] le[A -Iacute]microlaquoν τordf δεAEligσει να sectκ πολλlaquoν

προσasympπων τUacute ε(ς lemicroᾶς χάρισmicroα διὰ πολλlaquoν

εEgraveχαριστηθordf Iacuteπcentρ [alefsymAtc- lemicrolaquoν p46Bm-

Iacutemicrolaquoν]

who out- so-great (a) death [deaths]of

has-delivered us and [delivers

will-deliver] in whom we-hope

that even yet He-will-deliver-(us)

3(are) serving- 2also 1you [we] overtogether

us [you] mdash in-prayer in- by manyorder-that

faces the 2un- 3us 1favors by many=people to (given)

thanks-may over [us be-given

you-all]

II Corinthians 11011

5

12 ῾Η γὰρ καEcircχησ[A adds -ε]ις lemicrolaquoν

αIumlτη sectστ τUacute microαρτEcircριον τinfinς συνειδAEligσεως

le[alefsym had -Iacute]microlaquoν ˜τι sectν [alefsym2tcm- ἁπλOgraveτητι

p 46alefsym 1AB-ἁγιOgraveτητι] καlsaquo [A adds -sectν]

ε(λικρινε[alefsymA omit]ᾳ [alefsymABc add - τοEuml] ΘεοEuml

[p46Bc adds -καlsaquo] οEgraveκ sectν σοφᾳ σαρκικordf ἀλλ᾿

sectν χάριτι ΘεοEuml ἀνεστράφηmicroεν sectν τldquo κOgraveσmicroƒ

περισσοτdegρως δcent πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς 13 οEgrave γὰρ

ἄλλα γράφοmicroεν Iacutemicrorsaquoν ἀλλ᾿ ŭ ἃ [A omits]

ἀναγ[alefsymB add - ε]ινasympσκετε [alefsym has -αι] ge καlsaquo

sectπιγινasympσκετε [B omi t s A has - ge καlsaquo

sectπιγινasympσκεται] sectλπζω δcent τι καlsaquo szligως τdegλους

sectπιγνasympσεσθε 14 καθ7ς καlsaquo sectπdegγνωτε lemicroᾶς

ἀπUacute microdegρους ˜τι καEcircχηmicroα Iacutemicrolaquoν sectσmicrodegν

καθάπερ καlsaquo Iacute[A has -le]microε[alefsym omits]rsaquoς le[A has

-Iacute]microlaquoν sectν τordf lemicrodegρᾳ τοEuml Κυρου [alefsymBc add -

lemicrolaquoν p46 vidAtm omit] ᾿ΙησοEuml

Second Corinthians

The Nature of Gospel Preaching 112-14

II Corinthians 112-14

According to verse twelve the nature of Paulrsquos con-duct as a preacher of the gospel was that ofldquosimplicityrdquo (some manuscripts have ldquoholinessrdquo)

and ldquogodly sincerityrdquo not ldquofleshly wisdomrdquo This indicatesnot only his personal conduct but the attitude whichshould characterize true gospel preaching

ldquoSimplicityrdquo mdash Haplotes(ἁπλOgraveτης) - ldquoSingleness simplicitysincerity mental honesty the virtueof one who is free from pretense anddissimulationopenness of heartmanifesting itself by benefactionsliberalityrdquo (Thayer p 57) mdash ldquoSim-plicity sincerity purity or probity ofmind liberality as arising from sim-plicity and frankness of characterrdquo(Moulton p 40) mdash ldquoIn the NT usedonly in a moral sense as the oppo-site of duplicity meaning sincerityfaithfulness toward others manifestin helpfulness and giving assistanceto othersrdquo (Zodiates p 214)ldquoHolinessrdquo mdash Hagiotes (ἁγιOgraveτης)- ldquoHagiotes as moral holiness is tobe distinguished from hosiotessanctity that conforms to religioustraditionsrdquo (Zodiates p 71) mdashldquoHoliness is a broad term whichcovers the whole relation to God andthe devotion to himrdquo (Lenski II Corp 837)ldquoSincerityrdquo mdash Eilikrines (ε(λι-κρrsaquoνAEligς) - ldquoProperly that which beingviewed in the sunshine is found clearand purerdquo (Moulton p 118)mdashldquoSincerity signifies honesty and up-rightness without duplicity andrefers to the relation toward menrdquo(Lenski II Cor p 837)

6

2the 1For boast [boasts] of-us

2this 1is the testimony of-the conscience

of-us [of-you] that in [singularity =simplicity

holiness] and [in]

clarity [of-the] God

[and] not in 2wisdom 1fleshly but

in (the)- of-God we-conducted- in the worldfavor=grace ouselves

more-earnestly yet to- you- 4noth- 1Forwards all ing

2in- 3we-write to- but ei- whatdeed you ther

you-all-are-discerning [is-being- or even=reading discerned=read]

you-all- [or evenunderstand

is-being- 2I-hope 1and that even until (the)-understood] end

you-all-will- just-as even you-all- usunderstand-for-youselves have-understood

by portion be- 2(the)- 3of-you- 1we-cause boast all are

just-as even you- [we] of-usall

[of-you- in the day of- Lordall] the

[of-us] Jesus

ldquoCan Scripture Be Understoodrdquo

In verse thirteen Paul claims that what he is writingto them is nothing other than what they could ldquoreadrdquoor ldquounderstandrdquo He concludes the verse with an ex-

pression of confidence that indeed they will understandldquoeven to the endrdquo

Throughout the ages there have been many who havefelt that scripture could not be understood by the com-

mon man Thus only if it was interpreted to a person by a priest or religiousorganization could it be properly understood Others have held that the Spiritmust act upon a person in order for them to be able to understand

This passage directly contradicts either view Note Paul says he writesto them what they can+ ldquoReadrdquo mdash Anaginosko (ἀναγινasympσκω) - ldquoTo gather exact knowledge of rec-ognize discern especially to readrdquo (Moulton p 21)+ Or ldquoUnderstandrdquo mdash Epiginosko (sectπιγινasympσκω) - ldquoProperly to make a thinga subject of observation hence to arrive at knowledge from preliminaries toattain to a knowledge of to ascertain to perceive to discern detectrdquo (Moultonp 155)However Paul claims in the next verse that they had only understood ldquoinpartrdquo Yet he had claimed of them in I Corinthians 15 that they had been -ldquoenriched in everything by Him in all utterance and all knowledgerdquo (NKJV)

Here is what is clear about this issue1 The Corinthians had spiritual gifts thus the Holy Spirit had worked withinthem (I Corinthians 12-14)2 They did not yet fully understand all aspects of the truth (II Corinthians114)3 What was written to them could be understood if they would apply them-selves to it (II Corinthians 113)

If Scripture can only be understood if interpreted by the proper reli-gious authority why would Paul claim they could come to understand it IfScripture could only be understood when the Holy Spirit granted the ability tounderstand why didnrsquot the Corinthians understand (the Spirit had done Hispart - I Corinthians 15)

God has given the Scriptures to man in a form that can be accepted orrejected and fully understood if ldquorightly dividedrdquo (II Timothy 215) When mendo not understand (or accept) the truth it is not because they dont have theability to do so but rather because something about the condition of theirheart is not right (Matthew 131-9 amp 18-23) All who sincerely wish to under-stand Scripture can (John 717)

Chapter One

7

Explanation For His Delay 115-24

Apparently Paul had planned to visit the Corinth-ians before he went to Macedonia In I Corinth-ians 165 he told them that he would come to see

them when he passed through Macedonia yet II Corinth-ians 116 claims that he intended to pass by way of Corinthto Macedonia then return from Macedonia back to Corinthbefore going to Judea This seems to indicate that heplanned to sail across the Aegean Sea and visit Corinth

first Paulrsquos sudden departure from Ephesus after the riot there may be whatchanged this plan Rather than having time to arrange passage on a ship Paulmay have had to simply travel on land up through Asia Mysia Thrace andinto Macedonia having only to cross the Hellespont (See the map on page 9)

The book of Acts indicates that even after Paul made it to Corinth hisplans to go directly to Judea were altered again Acts 203 tells us that after

Paul stayed three months in Greece(where Corinth and Achaia were lo-cated) he planned to sail to Syriabut opposition from the Jews forcedhim to go back through Macedonia

Second Corinthians

15 Καlsaquo ταEcircτ˙ τordf πεποιθAEligσει sectβουλOgravemicroην

[t - πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς sectλθεrsaquoν πρOgraveτερον alefsymABc -

πρOgraveτερον alefsym1 omits πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς sectλθεrsaquoν m-

sectλθεrsaquoν πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς τUacute πρOgraveτερον] να

δευτdegραν [alefsym1Atcm -χάριν alefsym2B - χαράν]

[Atm - paraχητε alefsymBc - σχinfinτε ] 16 κ α lsaquo

δι᾿ Iacutemicrolaquoν δι[A has -ἀπ]ελθε[alefsym omits]rsaquoν ες

Μακε[alefsymA have -αι]δοναν καlsaquo πάλιν ἀπUacute

Μα[B1 omits]κε[alefsym has -αι]δονας sectλθεrsaquoν πρUacuteς

Iacutemicroᾶς καlsaquo Iacuteφ᾿ Iacutemicrolaquoν προπεmicroφθinfinναι ες τOslashν

᾿Ιουδααν

And in-this mdash assurance I-was-wanting

[to you to-come formerly

formerly to you to-come

to-come to you mdash formerly] in-order-that

(a) second [favour joy]=grace

[you-all you-all andmight-have might-have-had]

by you- to-have- [to-have- intoall come-through come-from]

Macedonia and again from

Macedonia to-come to

you and by you- to-have-been into mdashall sent

Judea

Making Plans

Paul refersin verseseventeen

to making planseither ldquolightlyrdquo orldquoaccording to thefleshrdquo He seemsto fear that the

Corinthians might have felt that hisdecision not to come to them firstwas made thoughtlessly

Jesus taught that in makingplans about what we will do for an-other person we should not makevows but rather let our ldquoyesldquo be ldquoyesrdquoand our ldquonordquo be ldquonordquo (Matthew 533-37) The Holy Spirit teaches us inthe book of James that any plans

8

HELLESPONT

ASIA MINOR

M e d i t e r r a n e a n

S e a

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIA

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

PAULS PLANS TO VISIT CORINTH

Planned Route Actual Route

᾿Ιουδααν 17 τοEumlτο οOcircν [A has -δcent]

βουλευOgravemicroενος microAElig τι ἄρα τordf sectλαφρᾳ

sectχρησάmicroην ŭ ἃ βουλεEcircοmicroαι κατὰ σάρκα

βουλεEcircοmicroαι να not παρ᾿ sectmicroοlsaquo τUacute ναlsaquo ναlsaquo καlsaquo

τUacute οIgrave οIcirc [p46 has - ναlsaquo καlsaquo τUacute οIgrave] 18 πιστUacuteς

II Corinthians 117we make regarding the future mustbe made with the consideration thatonly ldquoIf the Lord willsrdquo may we dowhat is planned (James 413-15)

+ ldquoHow can we be certain

that our plans are not made

lightly yet with the consid-

eration of Godrsquos ultimate

control over our livesrdquo

mdash Go to God in prayer any time youare faced with a decision praying for both the wisdom to choose rightly alongwith the strength and faith to accept whatever may comemdash Recognize your limits when telling someone else what you will do for themand make certain your claims are totally honest

Judea This then [but]

determining- 3indeed 1there- mdash 4lightnessfor-myself fore =levity

2we-have- or what I-wish 2accord- 3fleshused ing-to

1(do) I-wish that (it)- with me mdash yes yes andmay-be

mdash no no [yes and mdash no]

Chapter One

9

Second Corinthians

δcent ı ΘεOgraveς ˜τι ı λOgraveγος lemicrolaquoν ı πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς

οEgraveκ [alefsym2tm- sectγdegνετο alefsym1ABc - paraστιν] ναlsaquo

καlsaquo οIcirc 19 ı [p46tm- γὰρ τοEuml ΘεοEuml alefsymABc -

τοEuml θεοEuml γὰρ] υ0Uacuteς [p 46alefsym2Btmc -᾿ΙησοEumlς

ΧριστUacuteς alefsym1A - ΧριστUacuteς ᾿ΙησοEumlς] ı sectν Iacutemicrorsaquoν

δι᾿ lemicrolaquoν κηρυχθες δι᾿ sectmicroοEuml καlsaquo ΣιλουανοEuml

καlsaquo Τ[B adds -ε]ιmicroοθdegου οEgraveκ sectγdegνετο ναlsaquo καlsaquo

οIcirc ἀλλὰ ναlsaquo sectν αEgraveτldquo γdegγονεν 20 σαι γὰρ

sectπαγγελ[A adds - ε]αι [A adds - τοEuml] ΘεοEuml sectν

αEgraveτldquo τUacute να [tm- καlsaquo sectν αEgraveτldquo p46alefsymABc-

διUacute p46 omits καlsaquo δι᾿ αEgraveτοEuml] τUacute [alefsym1 omits]

ἀmicroAEligν τldquo Θεldquo πρUacuteς δOgraveξαν δι᾿ lemicrolaquoν 21 ı

mdash no no [yes and mdash no] 3faithful

1But 2God that the word of-us the- to you(is) (one)

not [has-become is] yes

and no 2the [1For 4of- 5God the

of-the God For] 3Son [Jesus

Christ Christ Jesus the- in you(one)

by us has-been by me and Silvanusproclaimed

and Timothy not has- yes andbecome

no but yes in Him has-been 2as- 1Formany-as

(the) [of-the] God inpromises

Him mdash (are) [and in Him yes

wherefore even through Him] (is) the

amen to- God to glory through us The-the (one)

The Promises of God

As Paul discusses his change of plans with the breth-ren he claims in verse 20 that in Christ all the prom-ises of God are ldquoyesrdquo In the context Paul seems to

suggest that although his original plans of coming to thembefore he went to Corinth did not work out God had in asense said ldquoyesrdquo to their need for his coming in that hewould soon be free to come to them In a broader context

when Paul states that all Godrsquospromises in Christ are ldquoyesrdquo he af-firms the certainty of Godrsquos prom-ises

ldquoWhat promises are given

to the Christianrdquo

mdash The promise of Godrsquos constantconcern for the affairs of our lives(Hebrews 135)mdash The promise of forgiveness of sinsupon the confession of our sins (IJohn 19)mdash The promise of the salvation ofthe soul for those who commit theirfaith and obedience unto Christ (IITimothy 112)mdash The promise that all will work outfor the best for those who are faith-ful to the Lord (Romans 828)mdash The promise of the resurrectionof our mortal bodies unto immor-tality (I Thessalonians 413-18)mdash The promise of eternal life withGod free from pain and sorrow (Rev-elation 214 )

However the certainty of Godrsquospromises do not take away our own

responsibilities We mustmdash Be faithful unto death to hope for a crown of life (Revelation 210)mdash Continue in Godrsquos word if we claim to be Christrsquos disciples (John 831)mdash Expect things which are in accordance with Godrsquos will (I John 514)

10

δcent βεβαιlaquoν le[B has - Iacute]microᾶς σAacuteν Iacutemicrorsaquoν ες

ΧριστOgraveν καlsaquo χρ[alefsymB add - ε]σας le[B1 has - Iacute]microᾶς

ΘεOgraveς 22 ı [alefsym1A omit] καlsaquo σφραγισάmicroενος

lemicroᾶς καlsaquo δοAacuteς τUacuteν ἀρρ[alefsymA omit]αβlaquoνα τοEuml

ΠνεEcircmicroατος sectν ταrsaquoς καρδαι[alefsym1 has - ε]ς lemicrolaquoν

23 ᾿ΕγC δcent microάρτυρα τUacuteν ΘεUacuteν

sectπικαλοEumlmicroαι sectπlsaquo τOslashν sectmicroOslashν ψυχAEligν ˜τι

φειδOgravemicroενος Iacutemicrolaquoν οEgraveκdegτι Eλθον ες ΚOgraveρινθον

24 οEgraveχ ˜τι κυριεEcircοmicroεν Iacutemicrolaquoν τinfinς πστεως

ἀλλὰ συνεργο sectσmicroεν τinfinς χαρᾶς Iacutemicrolaquoν τordf

γὰρ πστε[alefsym omits]ι bullστAEligκατε

The Sealing amp Deposit of the Spirit

In discussing the certainty of Godrsquos promises Paul re-minds them that one evidence of this fact is thepresence of the Holy Spirit within them which God

had given to the Corinthians While the personal and mi-raculous implications of this ldquosealingrdquo involved somethingdifferent for the

Corinthians than it does for Chris-tians today (given that the Lordpromised a time when spiritual giftswould cease - I Corinthians 138-10) there are nevertheless somepowerful teachings about this ldquode-positrdquo (or pledge) of the Spirit withinthe hearts of the believer

1 The presence of Godrsquos Spiritwithin a believer will allow for theirresurrection with the faithful (Ro-mans 811)2 The believer has Godrsquos Spiritwithin them when they set theirminds on spiritual things (Roman85)3 Being filled with Godrsquos Spirit is achoice that believers must con-stantly make (Ephesians 518)4 Christ dwells in believers heartsthrough faith (Ephesians 317)5 Believers can grieve the HolySpirit by sinful conduct (Ephesians430)6 Rejection of Godrsquos word is rejec-tion of the Holy Spirit (Acts 751)

yet establishing us [you] with you into

Christ and 2having-anointed 3us [you]

1God the-(one) even having-sealed-for-Himself

us and has- the pledge of-thegiven

Spirit in the hearts of-us

2I 1Yet 4(as) witness 5the 6God

3call-on-myself over mdash my soul that

sparing you- no- I-came into Corinthall more

Not that we-lord- 3of-you- 1the 2faithover all

but 2 fellow- 1we-are of- joy of- 2in-theworkers the you-all

1for 3faith you-allstand

Chapter One

11

Second Corinthians

Chapter One Review

1 Who does Paul introduce himself with at thebeginning of the epistle

2 Who may have carried this epistle to the Corinth-ians

3 Where was Paul when he wrote this epistle4 What word used in verse four properly means

ldquopressurerdquo5 What does Paul claim would also abound in the Corinthians if they

shared in Christrsquos sufferings6 What does Paul claim that the comfort given to us by God allows us

to do to others7 What event may Paul be referring to in verse eight when he speaks

of having the ldquosentence of deathrdquo upon himself8 Where is the event referred to above described9 In what does Paul claim the Corinthians had worked together with

him10 What is the first definition of the word translated ldquosimplicityrdquo in

verse 1211 What word do some manuscripts use instead of the word ldquosimplic-

ityrdquo12 What does verse fourteen claim the Corinthians had done in part

up to the time he wrote them13 What route had Paul apparently planned to take on his way to

Corinth14 How did he end up coming to them15 What passage in the New Testament teaches that Christians should

approach all plans understanding that life continues only byGodrsquos will

16 If Godrsquos promises are all ldquoyesrdquo in Christ Jesus does that mean thatthe Christian will always get what they desire Why or why not

17 With what does Paul claim the Corinthians had been sealed asevidence of the certainty of Godrsquos promises

18 Does this sealing of the Holy Spirit carry all of the same implica-tions it did for the Corinthians Why or why not

12

1 paraκρινα [alefsymAtm-δcent p46Bc-γὰρ] sectmicroαυτldquo

τοEumlτο τUacute microOslash πάλιν [t- sectλθεrsaquoν sectν λEcircπ˙ πρUacuteς

Iacutemicroᾶς alefsymABm- sectν λEcircπ˙ πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς sectλθεrsaquoν

p46vid has - sectλθεrsaquoν πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς] 2 ε[alefsym1 omits by

alefsym] γὰρ sectγ [alefsym adds - ı omitted by alefsym1] λυπlaquo

Iacutemicroᾶς καlsaquo τς [alefsym2tm-sectστιν alefsym1ABc omit] ı εEgrave[A

omits]φρανων microε ε microOslash ı λυποEcircmicroενος sectξ sectmicroοEuml

3 καlsaquo paraγραψα [alefsym2tm-Iacutemicrorsaquoν alefsym1ABc

2I-judged [1but for] in-myself

this - not 2again [1to-come 5in 6sorrow 3to

4you 5in 6sorrow 3to 4you 1to-come

to-come to you] 2if

1For I [the] grieve

you 2even 1who [is] the-(one)

making-glad me if not thebeing- by me(one) grieved

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R T W O T W O T W O T W O T W O

Outline

I Paulrsquos Sorrow Over the Corinthians (vss 1-5)II Forgiveness Consolation and Reaffirmation of

Love (vss 6-11)III Paulrsquos Distress Upon Coming to Troas (vss

1213)IV The Fragrance of Christ (vss 14-17)

Paulrsquos Sorrow Over

the Corinthians 21-5

Paul states in verse one thathe had determined withinhimself not to come to the

Corinthians again ldquoin sorrowrdquo Thisappears to refer to Paulrsquos grief overthe many problems he was forcedto address in his first letter to theCorinthian brethren

Problems Addressed in

Paulrsquos First Epistle

The primary problems ad-dressed in Paulrsquos first epistlewere

I Divisions and contentions (I Corinthians 110-13)II Sexual immorality tolerated by the church (I Corinthians 51-8)III Lawsuits among brethren (I Corinthians 61-11)IV Failure to respect the conscience of the weak (I Cor 81-13 amp 1023-33)

II Corinthians 212

13

sectξ sectmicroοEuml 3 καlsaquo paraγραψα [alefsym2tm-Iacutemicrorsaquoν alefsym1ABc

omit ] τοEumlτο αEgraveτOgrave [A omits] να microOslash sectλθν λEcircπην

[alefsym2tm- paraχω alefsym1ABc- σχlaquo] ἀφ᾿ œν paraδει microε

χαρειν πεποιθς sectπlsaquo πάντας Iacutemicroᾶς ˜τι le

sectmicroOslash χαρὰ πάντων Iacutemicrolaquoν bullστν 4 sectκ γὰρ

πολλinfinς θλψεως καlsaquo συνοχinfinς καρδας

paraγραψα Iacutemicrorsaquoν διὰ πολλlaquoν δακρEcircων οEgraveχ να

λυπηθinfinτε ἀλλὰ τOslashν ἀγάπην να γνlaquoτε partν

paraχω περισσοτdegρως ες Iacutemicroᾶς

by me And I-wrote to-you

this same- in- not coming griefthing order-that

[I-should- I-should- from whom it- mehave have-had] binds

to- having- over all of- that mdashrejoice confidence you

my joy 2of-all 3of- 1is 2out- 1Foryou of

much oppression and constraint of-heart

I-have- to- through many tears not thatwritten you

you-all but 3the 4love1in-order- 2you-all- whichshould-be-grieved that should-know

I-have more- unto youabundantly

V Women failing to demonstrate submission (I Corinthians 112-16)VI Abuse of the Lordrsquos Supper (I Corinthians 1117-34)VII Abuse of spiritual gifts (I Corinthians 12-14)VIII False teaching concerning the resurrection (I Corinthians 1512-58)

The Purpose of Paulrsquos Writing to Corinth

The one problem that Paul appears to have expectedtheir immediate response to was the matter ad-dressed in First Corinthians 51-8 There we learn

that a member of the church in Corinth was sexually in-volved with his fatherrsquos wife (51) Paul commands thebrethren to ldquodeliver such a one to Satan for the destruc-tion of the flesh that his spirit may be saved in the day ofthe Lord Jesusrdquo (55) Paul warns them ndash ldquoWhat do youwant Shall I come to you with a rod or in love and a

spirit of gentlenessrdquo (I Corinthians 421)

If when the brethren in Corinthreceived the first epistle they hadchosen not to heed Paulrsquos instruc-tions he would have been forced tocome again to them in sorrow (IICorinthians 21) and with ldquoa rodrdquo (ICorinthians 421) He wrote withthree sentiments in mind1 Confidence that they would re-spond faithfully leading him to re-joice (II Corinthians 23)2 ldquoAnguish of heartrdquo at having tocause them grief (II Corinthians 24)3 A Desire to test their true obedi-ence (II Corinthians 29)

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 234

14

2if 1But any- is-grieved not 2meone

1he-has- but from part in-grieved order-that

not I-should- all of-you 4(is)enough mdashover-burden

5 Ε δdeg τις λελEcircπηκεν οEgraveκ sectmicrocent

λελEcircπηκεν ἀλλὰ [t omits] ἀπUacute microdegρους να

microOslash sectπιβαρlaquo πάντας Iacutemicroᾶς 6 )κανUacuteν τldquo

Chapter Two

In verses three and four Paul claims that he had writ-ten to the brethren out of much ldquoafflictionrdquo ldquoanguishof heartrdquo and ldquomany tearsrdquo The word translated ldquoaf-

flictionrdquo is the same word found in chapter one translatedldquotribulationrdquo and ldquotroublerdquo We remember from our studythat the primary meaning of this word is ldquopressurerdquo No-tice the word translated ldquoanguishrdquo

ldquoAnguishrdquo (vs 4) mdash Sunoches (συνοχinfinς) - ldquoProperly a being held togethercompression in New Testament (by) metonomy distress of mind anxietyrdquo(Moulton p 389) ldquoA holding together narrowing narrows the contractingpart of a wayMetaphorically straits distress anguishrdquo (Thayer p 606)

When Doing The Right Thing Hurts

Often doing what is best for another person causesus a great deal of discomfort Never-the-less it is amark of love Paul claims that he had written that

they might know ldquothe love which I have so abundantly foryourdquo (24) not that he should cause them grief

+ ldquoWhat are some situations that would call

upon a Christian to experience pain in order to

display their love for another personrdquomdash Rebuking someone for a sin theyare involved in (Luke 173)mdash Pointing out to someone whenthey are in doctrinal error (Acts1824-28)mdash Being forced to bring a matter tothe attention of the church when abrother or sister is unwilling to re-pent (Matthew 1817)mdash Differing with a close friend orfamily member on a Scriptural matter (Matthew 1037)mdash Talking to someone about something they are doing wrong when it is likelythey will become angry (Galatians 416)

II Corinthians 25

15

5for-such- 1the 3penalty 2samemdash by thea-one

majority

τοιοEcircτƒ le sectπιτ[B adds - ε]ιmicroα αIumlτη le IacuteπUacute τlaquoν

πλειOgraveνων

Second Corinthians

Forgiveness Consolation and

Reaffirmation of Love 26-11

Congregational Discipline

Paul speaks in verse six of the ldquopunishment whichwas inflicted by the majorityrdquo This clearly refers tothe practice commanded in Scripture of congrega-

tions withdrawing themselves from the unrepentant

+ ldquoExactly what is the church authorized to

do as lsquopunishmentrsquo of the unrepentantrdquomdash ldquoWithdrawrdquo from brethren who walk contrary to the teachings of the gospel(II Thessalonians 36 I Timothy 63-5)mdash Do not ldquokeep company withrdquo those brethren who live contrary to the gospel(II Thessalonians 314)mdash ldquoNoterdquo those who cause offenses and divisions contrary to the gospel andldquoavoid themrdquo (Romans 1617)mdash Do not even eat with one ldquonamed a brotherrdquo who is in unrepentant sin (ICorinthians 511)mdash ldquoWarnrdquo those who are ldquounrulyrdquo (I Thessalonians 514)mdash ldquoRebuke in the presence of allrdquo those who are sinning (I Timothy 520)mdash ldquoRejectrdquo a divisive man after the second admonition (Titus 31011)

mdash Treat as a tax collector or a hea-then those who will not hear thechurch (Matthew 1815-17)

+ ldquoDoes a congregation

withdrawing from a person

mean that God has broken

fellowship with that per-

sonrdquomdash Diotrophes put out of the church those whom John sent (III John 910)mdash Paul commanded withdrawal in order to bring the brother to repentancethus effecting the salvation of his soul (I Corinthians 55)mdash Withdrawal is intended to produce ldquoshamerdquo leading to repentance untosalvation (II Thessalonians 31415)mdash God is the one who determines who is and is not in fellowship with Him(Acts 247 I John 13)

II Corinthians 26

16

majority so-that on-the-contrary

[rather] you to-forgive and

to-console (so-that)- in- mdash by-more- griefnot any-way abundant

2may-be- mdash 1such-a- Therefore I-swallowed-up one encourage

you to-confirm unto him love 3unto

4this 1For2even I-have- that I- the proofwritten might-know

of-you- [if to-which] unto all-all things

obedient you- 2to- 1Yet any- you-allall-are whom thing forgive

πλειOgraveνων 7 Agraveστε τοEgraveναντον [p46alefsymtmc-

microᾶλλον AB omit] Iacutemicroᾶς χαρσασθαι καlsaquo

παρακαλdegσαι microAElig πως τordf περισσοτdegρᾳ λEcircπ˙

καταποθordf ı τοιοEumlτος 8 διUacute παρακαλlaquo

Iacutemicroᾶς κυρlaquoσαι ες αEgraveτUacuteν ἀγάπην 9 ες

τοEumlτο γὰρ καlsaquo paraγραψα να γνlaquo τOslashν δοκιmicroOslashν

Iacutemicrolaquoν [alefsymtmc- ε AB- radic p46 omits] ες πάντα

IacuteπAEligκοο sectστε 10 - δdeg τι χαρζεσθε [alefsym2tm-

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 27-9

Paul commands the brethren to do three things tothe one who has been disciplined lest he ldquobe swal-lowed up with too much sorrowrdquo (II Corinthians 27)

1 ldquoForgiverdquo (II Corinthians 27)2 ldquoComfortrdquo (II Corinthians 27)3 ldquoReaffirm your love to himrdquo (II Corinthians 28)Notice the definitions of some of these words

ldquoForgiverdquo (vs 7) mdash Charisasthai(χαρσασθαι) - ldquoCharidzesthai is gen-erally found in the New Testamentin the sense of lsquoto bestow a favorrsquobut it conveys the special meaninglsquoto forgiversquo in the passage referredto above [II Corinthians 27]rdquo (NicollVol III p48) mdash ldquoTo gratify to be-stow in kindness grant as a freefavour to grant the deliverance of aperson in favour to the desire of oth-ers to sacrifice a person to the de-mands of enemies to remit forgiverdquo(Moulton p434)ldquoReaffirmrdquo (vs 8) mdash Kurosai(κυρlaquoσαι) - ldquo1 Confirm ratify vali-date 2 conclude decide in favorof love for someonemake valid af-firm in the 2 Corinthians passagereaffirm is also very goodrdquo (BAG p460) mdash Henry Alford claims that the word does not communicate ndash ldquo(asusually understood) to ratify by a public decree of the churchthe ratifyingtheir love to him would consist in the majority making it evident to him that hewas again recognized as a brotherrdquo (Vol II p 638)

ldquoDoes the Church Have Power to Forgive Sinsrdquo

In verse ten Paul speaks of forgiving the guilty party forthe sake of the brethren ldquoin the presence of ChristrdquoThroughout religious history there have been those

who have taught that God has granted to religious au-thorities the actual right of forgiving or retaining sinsTexts sometimes appealed to in support of this notion are

17

IacuteπAEligκοο sectστε 10 δdeg τι χαρζεσθε [alefsym2tm-

καlsaquo sectγasymp alefsym1ABc- κἀγasymp] καlsaquo γὰρ sectγ [A

omits] [tm - εDagger τι alefsymABc -˘] [alefsymB tmc -

κεχάρισmicroαι A- καlsaquo χάρισmicroαι] [tm-

alefsymABc - εDagger τι] κεχάρισmicroαι δι᾿ Iacutemicroᾶς sectν

προσasympπƒ ΧριστοEuml 11 να microOslash

πλεονεκτηθlaquomicroεν IacuteπUacute τοEuml Σατανᾶ οEgrave γὰρ

αEgraveτοEuml τὰ νοAEligmicroατα ἀγνοοEumlmicroεν

[even I] and mdash 2I

[1if anything what]

[have- even forgive] [to- forgiven whom

if any- I-have- through you inthing] forgiven

(the)-face of-Christ in-order- notthat

2should-be-(given)- 3over- mdash 1Satan 2not 1Foradvantage (us)

6of- 4the 5purposes 3we-are-him ignorant-(of)

Second Corinthians

- Matthew 1619 amp 1818-20

+ ldquoDoes the Bible give re-

ligious authorities the right

to forgive or retain sinsrdquomdash There is one mediator betweenGod and man (I Timothy 25)mdash Christ ever lives to make inter-cession for the saints (Hebrews725)mdash Christians are to pray for oneanother and confess to one another(James 514-16)mdash When Christians confess theirsins to God He forgives them ( IJohn 19)mdash Simon was told to pray to Godfor forgiveness (Acts 822)mdash The Bible promises that religiousauthorities would rise up teaching falsehood (Acts 2028-30)

The Devices of Satan

Paul warns that the brethren should be careful howthey deal with the sinful brother from whomthey had withdrawn from ldquolest Satan should take

advantage of us for we are not ignorant of his devicesrdquo (IICorinthians 211) This is much like the warning foundin Galatians 61 where Paul admonishes those who seekto restore the brother overtaken in any trespass to con-sider themselves ldquolest you also be temptedrdquo

+ ldquoWhat are some of Satanrsquos lsquoDevicesrsquordquomdash Assault (Ephesians 61113-16)mdash Manipulation (Matthew 1621-23)mdash Deception (II Corinthians 1113-15)mdash Hindrance (I Thessalonians 218)mdash Adoption (John 837-44)

18

Chapter Two

Paulrsquos Distress Upon Coming to Troas 21213

I n versestwelve andt h i r t e e n

Paul claimsthat when hecame to Troashe had noldquorestrdquo in his

spirit when he did not find TitusPaul apparently expected Titus tomeet him in Troas Titus had goneto Corinth and then returned toPaul with the good news of Corinthrsquosobedience (II Corinthians 7613 amp1218)

ASIA MINOR

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIATROAS

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

CORINTH

PAULS ROUTETO MACEDONIA

HELLESPONT

2coming 1Yet unto mdash Troas be- thecause-of

good-news of- Christ and (a)door 2to-the me

1being- in (the)- 2no 1I-had unbindingopened Lord =peace

in- spirit of- in-the [of-the] not findingthe me

me Titus the brother of- butme

departing from- I-came into Macedoniathem

mdash But 2to- favor to-theGod =thanks (one)

12 ᾿Ελθν δcent ες τOslashν Τρωάδα ες τUacute

εEgraveαγγdegλιον τοEuml ΧριστοEuml καlsaquo θEcircρας microοι

ἀνεƒγmicrodegνης sectν Κυρƒ 13 οEgraveκ paraσχηκα ἄνεσιν

τldquo πνεEcircmicroατ microου τldquo[alefsym1has οEuml] microOslash εIacuteρε[alefsym

omits]rsaquoν microε Ττον τUacuteν ἀδελφOgraveν microου ἀλλὰ

ἀποταξάmicroενος αEgraveτοrsaquoς sectξinfinλθον ες Μακε[alefsymA

has - αι]δοναν 14 τldquo δcent Θεldquo χάρις τldquo

19

PHILIPPI

Second Corinthians

The City of Troas

The city of Troas was officially called Alexandria Troas It was foundedby one of the successors of Alexander the great and finished by one ofhis generals It was a seaside city only

six miles south of the entrance to theHellespont In ancient times it became a keyport for traffic between Europe and Asia Thismay be why Paul arranged to meet Titus thereas well as the reason that a ldquodoorrdquo for thegospel may have been opened there JuliusCaesar planned to make Troas a capital Cae-sar Augustus granted the city the same sta-tus afforded to Italian property ndash immunityfrom taxation (Vincent Vol III p 297)

The Fragrance of Christ 214-17

ldquoLeading In

Triumphrdquo

Referenceis madein verse

fourteen to the Lord leading believ-ers in ldquotriumph in Christrdquo In an-cient times is was customary for atriumphant general to return to hiscity with a procession going beforehim Often the captives and spoilswould be placed in the front imme-diately followed by the troops thetriumphant commander and the re-maining infantry bringing up therear (Vincent Vol III p29899)

It may be that Paul is eludingto such a victory march in this pas-sage Colossians 215 claims ofChrist ndash ldquoHaving disarmed princi-

20

πάντοτε θριαmicroβεEcircοντι lemicroᾶς sectν τldquo Χριστldquo

καlsaquo τOslashν UgraveσmicroOslashν τinfinς [alefsym1 omits] γνasympσεως αEgraveτοEuml

φανεροEumlντι δι᾿ lemicrolaquoν sectν παντlsaquo τOgraveπƒ 15 τι

ΧριστοEuml εEgraveωδα sectσmicrocentν τldquo Θεldquo sectν τοrsaquoς

σωζοmicrodegνοις καlsaquo sectν τοrsaquoς ἀπολλυmicrodegνοις 16 οAcircς

microcentν ıσmicroOslash [alefsymABc - sectκ tm omit ] θανάτου ες

θάνατον οAcircς δcent UgraveσmicroOslash [alefsymABc - sectκ tm omit ]

ζωinfinς[alefsym had - ν] ες ζωAEligν καlsaquo πρUacuteς ταEumlτα τς

ltκανOgraveς 17 οEgrave γάρ sectσmicroεν hellipς οlt [alefsymABtc -

mdash But 2to- 1favor to-theGod =thanks (one)

always leading-in- us in the Christtriumph

and the aroma of-the knowledge of-Him

shining through us in every place Because

2of- 1(the)sweet- we- to- God in the-Christ aroma are the ones

being- and in thebeing- to-whomsaved ones destroyed =to-the-one

mdash (the) [out-of] death untoaroma

death to-whom mdash (the) [out-of]=to-the-other aroma

life unto life And to these- whothings

(is)- 3not 1For 2we-are as theworthy

Kyle P

ope

Ruins of Ancient Troas

Chapter Two

palities and powers He made a public spectacle of them triumphing overthemrdquo In Paulrsquos first epistle the apostle felt that God had made the apostlesa ldquospectacle to the worldrdquo (I Corinthians 49) It seems that the deliverancethat God had granted to him helped him to overcome such a feeling of despairclaiming in this epistle that God ldquoalways leads us in triumphrdquo (II Corinthians214)

I n versef i f t e e nP a u l

declares thatChristians areto God theldquofragrance of

Christrdquo to God Notice some pointsabout the definition of the wordtranslated ldquofragrancerdquo

ldquoFragrancerdquo (vs 15) mdash Euodia(εEgraveωδα) - ldquoA sweet smell gratefulodour fragrancerdquo (Moulton p 178)ndash ldquoa a sweet smell fragrance ba fragrant or sweet-smelling thingincensean odor of somethingsweet-smelling in the Septuagint often for an odor of acquiescence satisfac-tion a sweet odor spoken of smell of sacrifices and oblationsrdquo (Thayer p264)

21

[many the-rest] peddling the

word of- God but as out-the of

clarity but

as out- God [in-the-pressence of

opposite-to [of-the] God=before]

in Christ we-speak

πολλο p46m- λοιπο] καπηλεEcircοντες τUacuteν

λOgraveγον τοEuml ΘεοEuml ἀλλ᾿[B has - ἀλλὰ] hellipς sectξ

ε[alefsymA omit]λικρ[B2 adds - ε]ινε[alefsymA omit]ας ἀλλ᾿

hellipς sectκ ΘεοEuml [alefsym2tm-κατενasympπιον alefsym1ABc-

κατdegναντι] [alefsym2tm- τοEuml alefsym1ABc omit] ΘεοEuml

sectν Χριστldquo λαλοEumlmicroεν

II Corinthians 217

Second Corinthians

22

Chapter Two Review

1 With what did Paul not wish to return toCorinth

2 What were some of the problems which Paul ad-dressed in his first epistle to the Corinthians

3 What had Paul hoped to accomplish in first writ-ing to the Corinthians

4 What three phrases does Paul use to describe thedifficulty he felt in writing to them

5 To what does the word ldquopunishmentrdquo in verse six refer6 What are some of the things which the church is authorized to do as

punishment of the unrepentant7 Explain the bearing that withdrawal from an unrepentant sinner has

upon their fellowship with God8 What is the general meaning of the word translated ldquoforgiverdquo in

verse seven9 Does the Bible give religious authorities the power to forgive or

retain sins (Give scriptures to prove your answer)10 What does Paul warn the brethren Satan may do if they are not

cautious in their dealings with the disciplined brother11 What are some ldquodevicesrdquo of Satan12 Why was Paul distressed when he came to Troas13 Why had he come to Troas14 What were some important characteristics of ancient Troas which

may account for Paulrsquos planning to meet Titus there15 Explain the ancient practice to which Paul appears to refer in

verse fourteen16 What is the full meaning of the word translated ldquofragrancerdquo in

verse fifteen

Outline

I The Epistles of Christ (vss 1-3)II The Spirit and the Letter (vss 4-6)III The Glorious New Covenant (vss 7-11)IV The Veiling of Godrsquos Word (vss 12-18)

The Epistles of Christ 31-3

Paulrsquos Defense ofHis Authority

Aconstant problem for theApostle Paul concernedthose who questioned his au-

thority as an Apostle As a resulthe felt it necessary on occasion todefend the fact that God Himself hadgiven him authority Later in thisvery epistle Paul will devote a gooddeal of time to this matter (see1081213 1156 amp 2223)

Paul makes a powerful state-ment in chapter ten verse eighteenndash ldquoFor not he who commends himself is approved but whom the Lord com-mendsrdquo It wasnrsquot Paulrsquos commendation of himself that proved his authoritybut rather the fact that the Lord had approved Paulrsquos Apostleship

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R T H R E E T H R E E T H R E E T H R E E T H R E E

1 ᾿ΑρχOgravemicroεθα πάλιν bullαυτοAacuteς [Atcm -

συνιστάνειν alefsym - συνιστάνιν B -

συνιστάν] [alefsymAtc - ŭ Am - ε] microOslash χρῄζοmicroεν

Agraveς[A has - Agraveσπερ] τινες συστατικlaquoν

sectπιστολlaquoν πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς ŭ sectξ Iacutemicrolaquoν [tm -

συστατικlaquoν alefsymABc omit] 2 le sectπιστολOslash lemicrolaquoν

(Do)-we-begin again ourselves

[to-commend]

[Or if] not we-need

as [just-as] some commendatory

epistles to you or 2from 3you

1commendatory-(epistles)

II Corinthians 31

23

Second Corinthians

ldquoEpistles of Commendationrdquo

In ancient times all travel from place to place was slowand involved moving either by foot donkey or shipIt became important for brethren living in different

locations to have some way of confirming the messagebrought to them by a preacher or teacher This was gen-erally done by sending a written commendation in the

hand of a traveling preacher written by respected brethren Many of Paulrsquosepistles contain notes of commendation of the preachers who not only carriedthe epistles but then themselves preached upon their arrival

In verses 1-3 Paul somewhatmockingly asks the Corinthians ifhe needed such an ldquoepistle of com-mendationrdquo in order for them to re-ceive his teachings While in gen-eral the Corinthians seem to haveaccepted Paulrsquos admonitions in hisfirst epistle there is the indicationthat some had challenged his rightto give such instructions If any-one should have understood Paulrsquosauthority it should have been theCorinthians Paul himself had firstbegun the church in Corinth (Acts181-17) It is to this fact that Paulrefers in verse two in claiming thatthey were an ldquoepistle written in ourheartsrdquo

Standing WithOne Another

The wordtranslatedldquo c o m -

mendrdquo in verseone is the Greekword sunistemi (συνστηmicroι) meaning literally ndash ldquostanding-withrdquosomeone Early in Paulrsquos work as a gospel preacher there

1commendatory- 3the 4epistle 5of-us(epistles)

1you- 2are [having-been-inscribed]all

in the hearts

[of-us of-you-all]

being- and being-readknown

by all men being-manifested

that you- [it-will-be] (an)-epistle of-Christall-are

having-been-served by us [and]

having-been-written

not by-ink but in-Spirit

2God 1of-(the)- not in 2tablesliving

1stony but in 3tables

2hearts [heart] 1fleshly

II Corinthians 323

Iacutemicroεrsaquoς sectστdeg [B2tcm - sectγγεγραmicromicrodegνη alefsymAB1 -

sectνγεγραmicromicrodegνη] sectν ταrsaquoς καρδαι[alefsym has ε]ς

[p46ABtcm - lemicrolaquoν alefsym - Iacutemicrolaquoν] γ[B adds -

ε]ινωσκοmicrodegνη καlsaquo ἀναγ[B adds - ε]ινωσκοmicrodegνη

Iacuteπο πάντων ἀνθρasympπων 3 φανεροEcircmicroενοι

˜τι sectστcent[A - αι] sectπιστολOslash ΧριστοEuml

διακονηθε[alefsymomits]rsaquoσα Iacuteφ lemicrolaquoν [B adds - καlsaquo]

[B 2t cm - sectγγεγραmicromicrodegνη alefsymAB 1 -

sectνγεγραmicromicrodegνη] οEgrave microdegλανι ἀλλὰ ΠνεEcircmicroατι

ΘεοEuml ζlaquoντος οEgraveκ sectν [tm - πλαξlsaquo alefsymABc -

πλαξlsaquoν] λιθναις ἀλλ sectν [tm - πλαξlsaquo alefsymABc

- πλαξlsaquoν] καρδαι[t omits]ς σαρκναις trade

24

3confidence 1But 2this- we- [I-have] throughsame have

of- Christ toward the God not thatthe

[2comp- 1we- by ourselves byetent are

ourselves 2comp- 1we- 2comp-etent are etent

1we- to-account something [byare]

ourselves] as from ourselves [the- but thesame]

comptence of-us (is)- the God who evenfrom

Chapter Three

was an occasion when a brother ldquostood-withrdquo Paul at a critical time In Acts112627 we learn that Barnabas had received Paul even at a time when oth-ers feared him It was Barnabas who took Paul to the other Apostles for thefirst time

+ ldquoWhat are some situations in which it is important for brethren toldquostand-withrdquo one anotherrdquo mdash When a brother or sister has repented ofsin yet others view them with skepticismmdash When false accusations are made against brethrenmdash When Christians face hardship or persecutionmdash When a brother or sister becomes weak or discouragedmdash When a Christian faces family problems

The Spirit and the Letter 34-6

Manrsquos Insufficiency

Paul claimsin versefive that

the Corinthiansshould not thinkthat the truths ofthe Gospel werefrom themselves

It is clear that the Corinthians weregiven various miraculous gifts of theSpirit (I Corinthians 14-8) It mayhave been easy for the Corinthiansto misinterpret this as coming fromthemselves Paul reminds themthat God had made them sufficientto be ldquoministers of the New Cov-enantrdquo That is the Covenant wasfrom Godrsquos Spirit not manrsquos spirit

+ ldquoIn what sense had God made them lsquosufficientrsquordquo Note In chapter twoverse sixteen Paul had asked the question ldquohellipAnd who is sufficient for thesethingsrdquo This was immediately after pointing out that to those being savedthey were the aroma of ldquolife to liferdquo Eternal life is something that no mortal is

I Corinthians 345

4 πεποθησιν δcent τοιαEcircτην paraχοmicroεν[A - ω] διὰ

τοEuml ΧριστοEuml πρUacuteς τUacuteν ΘεOgraveν 5 οEgraveχ τι [tm

- κανο sectσmicroεν ἀφ bullαυτlaquoν alefsymBc - ἀφ

bullαυτlaquoν κανο sectσmicroεν A - κανο

sectσmicroεν]trade tradeλογσασθα τι[B omits ] [A adds - ἀφ

bullαυτlaquoν] hellipς sectξ bull[B omits ]αυτlaquoν ἀλλ le

κανOgraveτης lemicrolaquoν sectκ τοEuml ΘεοEuml 6 ˘ς καlsaquo

25

sufficient to obtain of themselves It is only through the grace of God thatman has been given the privilege of access to life with God (Ephesians 28-10)This grace teaches man how he must behave in this life as he looks towardsthe life which is to come (Titus 211-13)

ldquoThe Letter Kills but the Spirit Gives Liferdquo

Many doctrines voiced in the religious world focusupon the statement found in verse six concern-ing the Spirit and the letter A few false argu-

ments made from these verses are as follows1 The New Covenant is not a system of law but of ldquoinspi-rationrdquo as Godrsquos Spirit personally directs each believer

As a result any precise analysis of Scripture is following the ldquoletterrdquo (whichkills) but not the ldquoSpiritrdquo (which gives life)2 The Spirit leads man through theword but in addition the Spirit di-rects manrsquos understanding of Scrip-ture As a result to challengeanyonersquos understanding of Scrip-ture is challenging what the Spirithas led them to believe

The real focus of this passageseems to deal with a comparison ofthe strength of the New Covenantin contrast to the Old CovenantThe following points are clearmdash The New Covenant is a new lawsystem (Galatians 62 I Corinthians921)mdash The Old Law offered no complete remission of sins ie sacrifices had to bemade continually (Hebrews 101-4)mdash Christ offered Himself as a complete sacrifice for sins (Hebrews 911-1424-28)mdash The New Covenant has been fully revealed by the Holy Spirit (John 1613)mdash Those who allow Godrsquos Spirit to dwell in them through faith will obtaineternal life and forgiveness of sins (Romans 89-11 amp Ephesians 317)mdash Scripture is sufficient to give man what is needed for his salvation (IITimothy 31617)

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 36

κάνωσεν lemicroᾶς διακOgraveνους καινinfinς διαθAEligκης

οEgrave γράmicromicroατος ἀλλὰ πνεEcircmicroατος τUacute γὰρ

γράmicromicroα [Bt - ἀποκτενει alefsymc - ἀποκτdegννει

p46Am - ἀποκτdegνει] τUacute δcent πνεEumlmicroα ζωοποιεrsaquo

has-made us (as)-servants of-the- covenantcompetent new

not of-letter but of-spirit 2the 1for

letter [kills kills

will-kill] the but spirit makes-alive

26

Chapter Three

mdash Jesus and the Apostles used Scripture very precisely (Matthew 223132Galatians 316)mdash The New Covenant is a law of life and Spirit (Romans 812 John 663)mdash The New Covenant overcomes the weaknesses of the Old Law and of theflesh (Romans 834 Hebrews 71819 amp 87)

The Glorious New Covenant 37-11

ldquoThe Ministry of Deathrdquo

Paul refers in verse seven to the ldquoministry of deathrdquoThis appears to be a reference to the Law of MosesIn what sense may the Mosaic Law be thought of as

ldquothe ministry of deathrdquo Romans 77-84 gives a very goodexplanation of

this Consider the points Paulmakes in this regard1 Law brings the knowledge of sin(Romans 77)2 When knowledge is born desireis born with it (Romans 78)3 When desire is acted upon sincomes to life and kills (Romans 79-11 see also James 11415)4 Law is good even though it indi-rectly leads to sin (Romans 712-14)5 When law is present desire can-not be completely removed (Romans715-24)6 Christrsquos sacrifice and the sys-tem of faith tied to it frees man fromthis cycle of sin and death (Romans725-84)

ldquoIs The Old Covenant Still Bindingrdquo

Many within the religious world hold the view thatelements of the Old Mosaic law are still in effectPassages sometimes appealed to in support of

7 ε δcent le διακονα τοEuml θανάτου [alefsym1 had ΘΥ]

sectν γράmicromicroασιν[B - γράmicromicroατι] sectντετυπωmicrodegνη

[alefsym2t - sectν alefsym1AB omit] λθοις sectγενAEligθη sectν δOgraveξ˙

Agraveστε microOslash δEcircνασθαι[alefsym-ε] ἀτενσαι τοAacuteς υοAacuteς

᾿ΙσραOslashλ ες τUacute πρOgraveσωπον [At - Μωσdegως

alefsymBcm - Μωϋσdegως] διὰ τOslashν δOgraveξαν [alefsym1 added

αEgrave]τοEuml προσasympπου αEgraveτοEuml τOslashν

καταργουmicrodegνην 8 πlaquoς οEgraveχ[alefsym1- δ]lsaquo microᾶλλον

le διακονα τοEuml πνεEcircmicroατος paraσται[alefsym- ε] sectν

δOgraveξ˙

II Corinthians 378

2if1Yet the service of-the death [of-God]

in letters [letter] having-been-type-pressed-in

[in] stone has- in glorybecome

so- not to-be- [you-all- to-gaze the sonsthat able are-able]

of- into the face [of-Moses]Israel

through the glory [of-him]

of-the face of-him the-one

being-done- how not ratheraway

the service of-the spirit will- [you- inbe all-are]

glory

27

Second Corinthians

this view are (Matthew 51718 amp Romans 331) There are two ways that thisviewpoint is sometimes presented1 The Old Law is still in effect (only the ceremonial laws of the Jews havebeen done away with)2 The Ten Commandments and the Law of Moses were separate bodies oflaw The latter has passed away but the Ten Commandments are still bind-ing

+ ldquoIs the Old Law still bindingrdquo

In verses 7-18 it is clear that Paul is discussing the Law which wasgiven to Moses yet the following statements are made in reference to it1 It was ldquopassing awayrdquo (vs 7 11 13)2 It was inferior to the ldquoministry of the Spiritrdquo in glory (vs 8-11)

Note The same point is made inother passages as well (see Hebrews813 Romans 74 Colossians 213-17)

+ ldquoAre the Ten Commandmentsa separate body of law from theLaw of Mosesrdquo mdash In the Old Tes-tament there is no distinction madebetween the Ten Commandmentsand the Law of Moses (Deuteronomy51-22)mdash II Corinthians 37 makes refer-ence to what was ldquowritten and en-graved on stonesrdquo then refers to itas ldquopassing awayrdquo (vss 7 11 13)The Ten Commandments were in-cluded within the Law which waswritten in stone (Exodus 201-3118 3118 amp 3414)

δOgraveξ˙ 9 ε γὰρ [Btm - le p46alefsymAc - τordf]

διακονα τinfinς κατακρσεως δOgraveξα πολλldquo

microᾶλλον περισσεEcircει le διακονα τinfinς δικαι[alefsym-

ε]οσEcircνης [alefsym2tm - sectν alefsym1ABc omit] δOgraveξ˙[alefsym1-

α] 10 καlsaquo γὰρ οEgrave[t adds δcent] δεδOgraveξασται τUacute

δεδοξασmicrodegνον sectν τοEcircτƒ τldquo microdegρει szligνεκεν τinfinς

IacuteπερβαλλοEcircσης δOgraveξης 11 ε γὰρ τUacute

καταργοEcircmicroενον διὰ δOgraveξης πολλldquo microᾶλλον τUacute

microdegνον sectν δOgraveξ

glory 2if 1For [the in-the]

service of-the condemnation (was)- muchglory

rather abounds the service of- right-the eousness

[in] glory

Indeed for not[neither] has-been the-glorified (thing)

having-been- in this in- part for-the theglorified the sake-of

surpassing glory 2if 1For the-(thing)

being-done- through glory much rather the-away (thing)

re- in glorymaining

28

Chapter Three

The Veiling of Godrsquos Word 312-18

The Veiling of Moses

In verse seven and thirteen reference is made to theveiling of Moses after he had spoken with the LordThis refers to the account found in Exodus 3429-35

After Moses had spoken to the Lord his face appears tohave reflected the light of Godrsquos glory for a time This was

so frightening to the Israelites thatMoses would veil his face after hav-ing been with the Lord In the timeof Paul (even to the present) whenthe Law of Moses is read in Jewishsynagogues the reader veils himself(II Corinthians 314) Paul makestwo points from Mosesrsquo veiling andthe Jews veiling of themselves whenMoses was read1 Moses face shown with the glorythat he had experienced when inGodrsquos presence This glory passedaway in contrast to the glory of theNew Covenant which does not passaway2 Those who read Moses withoutrealizing that Jesus is the Christhave their minds veiled to the truth

The Hardeningof Manrsquos Mind

The hard-ening ofm a n rsquo s

mind is re-ferred to inverse fourteenMany in the religious world hold the notion that God causes

men to be hardened to His word if He chooses to the point that they cannoteven choose to obey The Bible often makes reference to the hardening of

12 ῎Εχοντες οOcircν τοιαEcircτην sectλπδα πολλordf

παρρησᾳ χρasympmicroεθα 13 καlsaquo οEgrave καθάπερ [At

- Μωσinfinς alefsymBcm - Μωϋσinfinς] sectτθει κάλυmicromicroα

sectπlsaquo τUacute πρOgraveσωπον [alefsymtm - bullαυτοEuml ABc -

αEgraveτοEuml] πρUacuteς τUacute microOslash ἀτενσαι τοAacuteς υοAacuteς

᾿ΙσραOslashλ ες τUacute τdegλος[A has πρOgraveσωπον] τοEuml

καταργουmicrodegνου 14 [Atm - ἀλλ alefsymBc -

ἀλλὰ] sectπωρasympθη τὰ νοAEligmicroατα αEgraveτlaquoν ἄχρι

γὰρ τinfinς σAEligmicroερον [alefsymABc - lemicrodegρας tm omit]

τUacute αEgraveτUacute κάλυmicromicroα sectπ[alefsym adds ε]lsaquo τordf ἀναγνasympσει

τinfinς παλαιᾶς διαθAEligκης microdegνει microOslash

ἀνακαλυπτOgravemicroενον [t - ˜ τι cm - ˜τι] sectν

Χριστldquo καταργεrsaquoται 15 ἀλλ szligως σAEligmicroερον

2having 1There- this- hope 2muchfore same

3boldness 1we-use 2even 1Not as

[Moses] was- (a)-laying covering

over the face [of-himself

of-him] for the not gazing the sons

of- into the end [of-(the)- of-the-Israel face] (thing)

being-done- [but]away

4were- 1the2thoughts 3of-them 2untilhardened

1for the present [day]

the same covering (is)- [since] in-the readingover

of- old covenant remains notthe

being-uncovered [which- because] inthing

Christ is-being- But until this-daydone-away

29

Second Corinthians

leνκα [alefsymABc - ἂν tm omit] ἀναγ[alefsymB add

ε]ινasympσκεται [At - Μωσinfinς alefsymBcm - Μωϋσinfinς]

κάλυmicromicroα sectπlsaquo τOslashν καρδαν αEgraveτlaquoν κεrsaquoται 16

leνκα [alefsym2Btm - δ ἂν p46 alefsym1Ac - δcent sectὰν]

sectπιστρdegψ˙ πρUacuteς ΚEcircριον περιαι[B 2 -

ε]ρεrsaquoτα[A - ε]ι [B adds in bracets κάλυmicromicroα sectπlsaquo τOslashν

καρδαν αEgraveτlaquoν κεrsaquoται leνκα δ ἂν sectπιστρdegψ˙

πρUacuteς ΚEcircριον περιαιρεrsaquoται] τUacute κάλυmicromicroα 17

when [if] 2is-being-read

[1Moses]

(a)-cover- 2over 3the 4heart 5of- 1liesing them

2when [1But if]

should- towards (the)-Lord is-being-turn-over taken-off

[is-taken-off] [(a)-cover- 2over3theing

4heart 5of- 1lies 2when [1But if] should-them turn-over

to- (the)-Lord is-being- the coveringwards taken-off

manrsquos heart (or spirit) yet it is clear that man always retains the freewill tochoose to obey or disobey Consider a few references

mdash Pharoahrsquos heart was hardened(Exodus 71314228151932)mdash Sihonrsquos spirit was hardened(Deuteronomy 230)mdash The Philistines hardened theirhearts (I Samuel 66)mdash The Israelites hardened theirldquonecksrdquo (II Kings 1714 Nehemiah929)mdash Zedekiah stiffened his ldquoneckrdquo (IIChronicles 3611-13)mdash Nebuchadnezzar was hardenedin spirit (Daniel 520)

+ ldquoIn what sense can it be saidthat God hardens the heartrdquoWhen man rejects Godrsquos word orfails to diligently study it and applyit to his life it is because his heartis hardened to the things of GodThis is not because God has hin-dered him from understanding it Ifanyone hinders the unbeliever it is

Satan II Corinthians 44 teaches that those who are perishing have mindswhich ndash ldquohellipthe god of this age has blindedhelliprdquo

The Gospel and the Heart

During Jesusrsquo earthly ministry he made a numberof statements about the nature of the messageof the gospel In John 939 Jesus said ndash ldquohellipFor

judgment I have come into this world that those who donot see may see and that those who see may become blindrdquoBy this Jesus appears to refer to the fact that the gospelweighs the hearts of those who hear it in order to test theirsincerity In Matthew 1310-17 Jesus explains that when

people have closed their eyes and ears to truth they do not understand it evenwhen they hear it (Matthew 1315) This is clearly demonstrated in the ldquoPar-able of the Sowerrdquo (Matthew 131-9 amp 18-23) In this parable what determines

30

Chapter Three

the growth of the word is the condition of the soil The gospel of Luke claimsthat the good soil represents the ldquonoble and good heartrdquo (Luke 815)

The Jews hearts were hardened to the gospel because they were unwill-ing to reject their preconceptions about the Messiah They were unwilling tosee that Scripture actually referred to Jesus in the very texts which they readevery Sabbath So just as the veil covered their head as they read it alsocovered their hearts If they were to accept Jesus as the Messiah all the thingswhich were hidden to them because of their own stubbornness would becomeclear Thus ndash ldquohellipwhen one turns to the Lord the veil is taken awayrdquo (II Corin-thians 316)

The Liberty Thatis in Christ

In verse seventeen Paul makesthe statement ndash ldquohellipwhere theSpirit of the Lord is there is lib-

ertyrdquo The book of James refers tothe Christian system as the ldquolaw ofLibertyrdquo (James 212)

+ ldquoIn what things is there liberty in Christrdquomdash There is freedom from sin (Romans 64-7)mdash There is freedom from condemnation (Romans 81)mdash There is freedom from death (Hebrews 21415)mdash There is freedom from the Old Law (Romans 74-6)mdash There is freedom from dietary restrictions (Colossians 21617)mdash There is freedom from fear (I John 41718)mdash There is freedom from anxiety (Matthew 63334)mdash There is freedom from racial and nationalist barriers (Galatians 328)

Beholding as in a Mirror

Unlike the fading glory of the Old Covenant the New Covenant has anenduring glory In the gospel of Christ the Christian sees the reflec-tion of the glorious life with God which is to come In I Corinthians

1312 Paul uses the figure of a mirror in reference to the temporary nature ofspiritual gifts in contrast to the final complete revelation when such gifts wouldpass away Here Paul seems to refer to the insight the gospel gives us intoeternity

17 ı δcent ΚEcircριος τUacute ΠνεEumlmicroά sectστιν ο δcent τUacute

ΠνεEumlmicroα Κυρου [alefsym2tm - sectκεrsaquo p46 alefsymAB omit]

sectλευθερα

2the1But 3 Lord 5the 6Spirit 4is 2where1Butthe

Spirit of-(the)- [there]Lord-(is)

freedom

II Corinthians 317

31

Second Corinthians

Transformed Into the Same Image

I n versee i g h t -een Paul

claims that aswe view the re-flected glory ofthe Lord in the

gospel we are being ldquotransformedinto the same image from glory togloryrdquo The word here translatedldquotransformedrdquo is the Greek wordmetamorphootilde (microεταmicroορφOgraveω) fromwhich we get our word in Englishldquometamorphosisrdquo meaning ndash ldquohellip2 Amarked change in appearancecharacter etc 3 Marked changesin form and mode of life during development to maturity as in insectsrdquo (Ameri-can Heritage Dictionary p 444) One of the most glorious aspects of the hopeof the New Covenant is the promise that children of God will one day partakeof the image of Godrsquos glory Paul claims here we are undergoing a spiritualldquometamorphosisrdquo as we behold the present glory of the gospel looking unto thefuture glory of bearing the image of the Lord Consider the promisesmdash We will bear the image of the ldquoheavenly manrdquo (I Corinthians 1549)mdash We may become ldquopartakers of the divine naturerdquo (II Peter 14)mdash We will be like Him when He comes (I John 32)

sectλευθερα 18 lemicroεrsaquoς δcent πάντες

ἀνακεκαλυmicromicrodegνƒ προσasympπƒ τOslashν δOgraveξαν

Κυρου κατοπτριζOgravemicroενοι τOslashν αEgraveτOslashν εκOgraveνα

microετα[alefsym1 added φορ]microορφοEcircmicroεθα[A - νοι] ἀπUacute

δOgraveξης ες δOgraveξαν καθά[B - asympσ]περ ἀπUacute

Κυρου ΠνεEcircmicroατος

freedom 2we 1But all

2having-been- 1with-face the gloryuncovered

of-(the)- beholding-in- the same imageLord a-mirror

we-are-being- [is-transforming] fromtransformed

glory unto glory even-as from

2of-(the)- 1(the)-Lord Spirit

II Corinthians 318

32

Chapter Three

Chapter Three Review

1 What apparently had led Paul to feel the need todefend his authority as an Apostle in verse one

2 What were ldquoepistles of commendationrdquo whichare referred to in verse one

3 What does Paul claim served as his ldquoepistlerdquo4 What is the literal meaning of the word trans-

lated ldquocommendrdquo in verse one5 Is ldquostanding withrdquo one another as Christians an important service

Why or why not6 In what does Paul claim in verse five that the Corinthians should

not think they were ldquosufficientrdquo of themselves7 Where does manrsquos sufficiency come from8 What two false doctrines are sometimes incorrectly drawn from the

phrase ldquothe Letter kills but the Spirit gives liferdquo9 What are two Scriptures which prove that the New Covenant is a

new system of law10 What passage proves the all-sufficiency of Scripture11 What were some weaknesses of the Old law which are overcome

through the ldquolaw of the Spirit of liferdquo12 What passage gives a detailed explanation of the sense in which

the Old law was a ldquoministry of deathrdquo Explain this passage13 What are two false arguments that are made which both suggest

that portions of the Old Law are still in effect14 What phrase used three times in this chapter shows that the Old

Law was not to remain in effect when the New Covenant was insti-tuted

15 Does this chapter give any insight into the question of whetherthe Ten Commandments and the Mosaic Law were separate bodiesof law Explain

16 Why was it necessary for Moses to veil himself17 What custom existed with respect to the veil when the Law was

read and how does Paul relate this to the condition of the Jews

33

Second Corinthians

34

18 When the Bible describes God ldquohardeningrdquo someonersquos heart orspirit should this phrase be understood to mean that a personrsquosfreewill is taken away

19 What part of a person will determine whether the gospel will effecttheir life or they will be hardened to it

20 List eight things from which man is freed in Christ21 Explain the phrase ldquobeholding as in a mirrorrdquo22 What word in English comes from the word translated ldquotrans-

formedrdquo in verse eighteen Into what is the Christian being ldquotrans-formedrdquo

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R F O U R F O U R F O U R F O U R F O U R

Outline

I The Light of the Knowledge of the Glory of God(vss 1-6)

II Treasure in Earthen Vessels (vss 7-15)III Seeing the Eternal and the Unseen (vss 16-18)

The Light of the Knowledgeof the Glory of God 41-6

The Commendation ofHuman Conscience

In general what should concernthe Christian is not what otherpeople think about us but

rather what God thinks of us Paulshows this in his first letter to theCorinthians in declaring ldquoBut withme it is very small thing that Ishould be judged by you or by ahuman court In fact I do not evenjudge myselfhellipbut He who judgesme is the Lordrdquo (I Corinthians 434)However in verse two Paul declaresthat his manner of life and preach-ing commends himself ldquoto everymanrsquos conscience in the sight ofGodrdquo By this he appears to sug-gest that those who had seen hisefforts served as evidence beforeGod that he had faithfully dis-charged his responsibility

II Corinthians 412

1 ∆ιὰ τοEumlτο paraχοντες τOslashν διακον13αν

ταEcircτην καθς plusmnλεAEligθηmicroεν οEgraveκ [tm -

sectκκακοEumlmicroεν p46alefsymABc- sectγκακοEumlmicroεν] 2 [t-

ἀλλ᾿ alefsymABcm - ἀλλὰ] ἀπειπάmicroεθα τὰ

κρυπτὰ τinfinς ασχEcircνης microOslash περιπατοEumlντες sectν

πανουργ13ᾳ microηδcent δολοEumlντες τUacuteν λOgraveγον τοEuml

ΘεοEuml ἀλλὰ τordf φανερasympσει τinfinς

ἀληθε[alefsymomits]13ας [tm-συνιστlaquoντες p46Bc-

συνιστάνοντες alefsym- συνιστάντες] bullαυτοAacuteς

πρUacuteς πᾶσαν συνε[alefsymomits]13δησιν ἀνθρasympπων

sectνasympπιον τοEuml ΘεοEuml 3 ε δcent καlsaquo [tm- paraστι

Through this= having mdash 2serviceTherefore

1this as we-have-been notgiven-mercy

[we-faint]

[But] we-have- therenounced

hidden- mdash of-shame not walking inthings

craftiness nor entrapping= the word of-thecorrupting

God but in-the bringing-to-light= of-themanefestation

truth

[commending] ourselves

to every conscience of-men

in-the- of-the God 3if 1But2even 4[is]pressence

35

Second Corinthians

+ ldquoWill other peoplersquos views of us be taken into account on theday of judgmentrdquo mdash Paul claimed that the fact that he had fully preachedthe whole counsel of God freed him from ldquothe blood of all menrdquo (Acts 202627)mdash Peter claimed that when Christians live as they should any who speakagainst them will be forced to glorify God on the day of Christrsquos return (I Peter21112)

The God of This Age

In line with his references in theprevious chapter to the heartsof the unbelieving being veiled

Paul in verse four attributes thisveiling (or blinding) to ldquothe God ofthis agerdquo Identification of to whomthis phrase refers will tell us a greatdeal about who is responsible formanrsquos failure to accept (or under-stand) the truth+ ldquoWho is the god of thisagerdquo mdash When Jesus was temptedby Satan the devil claimed that allthe authority of the nations of theworld had been delivered to him todistribute at his will (Luke 46)mdash The gospel of John in three in-stances uses the phrase ldquoprince ofthis worldrdquo in reference to Satan(John 1231 1430 1611)mdash Paul refers to Satan as theldquoprince of the power of the airrdquo andthe ldquospirit that now works in thesons of disobediencerdquo (Ephesians 22)mdash In some sense the Bible teaches that Satan is ldquoin the worldrdquo (Job 17 IJohn 44)mdash The Bible teaches that Satan ldquodeceives the whole worldrdquo and thus thewhole world ldquolies in wickednessrdquo ((Revelation 129 I John 519)

This seems to make it clear that Satan is the one Paul is calling in ourtext ldquothe god of this agerdquo That tells us that the blame for manrsquos failure to

II Corinthians 434

alefsymABc- paraστιν] κεκαλυmicromicrodegνον τUacute εEgraveαγγdegλιον

lemicrolaquoν sectν τοrsaquoς ἀπολλυmicrodegνοις [tm- paraστι

alefsymABc- paraστιν] κεκαλυmicromicrodegνον 4 sectν οAcircς ı θεUacuteς

τοEuml αlaquoνος τοEcircτου [tm-sectτEcircφλωσε alefsymABc-

sectτEcircφλωσεν] τὰ νοAEligmicroατα τlaquoν ἀπ13στων ες

τUacute microOslash [B adds δι᾿] αEgraveγάσαι [tm-αEgraveτοrsaquoς alefsymABc

omit] τUacuteν φωτισmicroUacuteν τοEuml εEgraveαγγελ13ου τinfinς δOgraveξης

τοEuml ΧριστοEuml ˜ς sectστιν εκν τοEuml ΘεοEuml [alefsym2

adds τοEuml ἀορατοEuml] 5 οEgrave γὰρ bullαυτοAacuteς

5being-covered 1the 2good-news=gospel

3of-us in thebeing-destroyed (it)[is]ones

being-covered in whom the god

mdash 2age 1of-this [has-blinded]

the minds of-the unbelieving unto

the not= [through] shining [in-them]lest

the illumination of-the good-news= of-the glorygospel

of-the Christ who is (the)- of-the Godimage

[of-the invisible] 2not 1For ourselves

36

understand and accept Godrsquos word rests upon Satan and not upon God Itshould be noted that while in a legal sense Christ now has been given allauthority (Matthew 2818) we do not currently see all the world in subjectionto Christ (I Corinthians 1524-28) It is also unclear to what extent Satan isnow allowed to exercise influence over man given that Jesus death restrictedhis direct influence (see Zechariah 132 John 123132 amp Revelation 201-3)

The Divinity of Christ

Paulrsquos claim in verse four that Christ is the ldquoimage ofGodrdquo runs contrary to the assertion made by many inthe religious world that Jesus is not fully divine The

arguments made in this regard are demostrated by the fol-lowing views

1 God could not become flesh thus Jesus was a prophetbut not God in the flesh (The Muslim view)

2 God by nature is only one person yet his creatures can be thought ofas ldquosons of Godrdquo - thus gods themselves Jesus became a god inthis sense (The Jehovahrsquos Witness view)

3 In becoming man deity was forced to abandon some portion of itsdivinity Thus Jesus became fully man but no longer fully God

Though it is difficult for man to comprehend it is clear from Scripturethat Jesus is both fully man and fully God Note the following pointsmdash John claims Jesus (the Word) ldquowas Godrdquo (John 11) That shows Jesusdid not become divine but was divinemdash The Hebrew writer (well after Christrsquos resurrection) claims that Jesus isldquothe brightness of Hisrdquo (that is Godrsquos) ldquoglory and the express image of Hispersonrdquo (Hebrews 13) That tells us that Jesus currently has both the gloryand image of God Note Not simply the ldquoimagerdquo (which man also possesses- James 19) but the ldquoexpress imagerdquo (emphasis mine)mdash Paul on two occasions in the book of Colossians demonstrates that Jesusis God (Colossians 115 29) and tells Timothy ldquoGod was manifested in thefleshrdquo (I Timothy 316 KJV NKJV)

Chapter Four

37

Second Corinthians

ldquoWe Do Not Preach Ourselvesrdquo

In verse five Paul claims he did not preach himselfThis is an important example to all who would preachthe gospel The focus of gospel preaching must never

be the life knowledge and experience of the preacherRather the emphasis must be on Christ and His work InPaulrsquos first epistle he emphasized the same point in chap-ter two versesone through

five Notice four points declaredthere1 Paul did not make use of ldquoexcel-lence of speech or of wisdomrdquo (vs1) or ldquopersuasive words of humanwisdomrdquo (vs 4) in preaching thegospel2 This was by his own predetermi-nation (vs 2)3 What he did declare was ldquoJesusChrist and Him crucifiedrdquo (vs 2)4 This was done so that menrsquos faithwould be ldquoin the power of Godrdquo notin ldquothe wisdom of menrdquo (vs 5)Paul shows that gospel preachersmust exercise great restraint in theirpresentation of the gospel to preventthe emphasis being placed on theskill and polish of the preacherrather than the excellence of Godrsquosword

Treasure in Earthen Vessels 47-15

In ancient times the most common and least expen-sive containers for storing food grain or wine wereclay earthen pots While many vessels were made

out of gold silver bronze (or even glass) these were much

II Corinthians 456

κηρEcircσσοmicroεν ἀλλὰ [Btm-ΧριστUacuteν ᾿ΙησοEumlν

alefsymAc- ᾿ΙησοEumlν ΧριστUacuteν] ΚEcircριον bullαυτοAacuteς δcent

δοEcircλους Iacute[alefsym - le]microlaquoν διὰ [A v idB t cm -

᾿ΙησοEumlν alefsym- ΧΥ p46alefsym1A1- ᾿ΙησοEuml] 6 ˜τι

ı [A omits]ΘεUacuteς ı επν [alefsym1 adds ı erased] sectκ

σκOgraveτους φlaquoς [alefsym2tm -λάmicroψαι alefsymABc -

λάmicroψει] ˜ς paraλαmicroψεν sectν ταrsaquoς καρδ13αις lemicrolaquoν

πρUacuteς φωτισmicroUacuteν τinfinς γνasympσεως τinfinς δOgraveξης τοEuml

ΘεοEuml sectν προσasympπƒ [p46alefsymtcm-᾿ΙησοEuml AB omit]

ΧριστοEuml

we-preach but [Christ Jesus

Jesus Christ] (the)-Lord 2ourselves 1but

slaves of- [of-us] because-you-all of

[Jesus of-Christ of-Jesus] Because

the God the- having- [the-one] out-one spoken of

darkness light [to-have-shined

will- who has- in the hearts of-usshine] shone

to- illumination of- knowledge of- glory of-wards the the the

God in (the)-face= [of-Jesus appearance

of-Christ]

38

more expensive and only thewealthy would own them in abun-dance In verse seven Paul claimsthat the treasure of the light of thegospel is something which God hasplaced within ldquoearthen vesselsrdquoThis may either refer to the mortalnature of our bodies (see Genesis1827) or the common nature ofmost of those who accept the gos-pel (see I Corinthians 126-29)

There are three accounts of-ten cited which illustrate what Paulis referring to1 In Judges 716-20 when Gideonrsquosmen went to battle they carriedempty pitchers with torches insideIt was only when the pitchers werebroken that the light shone through2 The Greek historian Herodotusclaims the king of Persia kept his tribute stored in earthen vessels The goldor silver would be melted down then poured into the vessel to harden into asolid mass (Vincent Vol III p 312)3 Jewish Rabbis tell a story a Rabbi chided by an emperors daughter for hispoor appearance In response the Rabbi asked the girl why her father kept hiswine in earthen vessels (like the common people) After the girl had the wineput in silver vessels and it spoiled he explained that God seldom places wis-dom in the hearts of beautiful people because they are not humble enough topreserve it (Clarke Vol VI p 330)

Confidence in the Face of Trial

In verses eight and nine Paul uses eight phrases de-scribing the hardships and resistance of Christiansin the face of hardship temptation and persecution

Notice how this breaks downldquoHard pressedrdquo yet ldquoNot crushedrdquoldquoPerplexedrdquo but ldquoNot in despairrdquoldquoPersecutedrdquo but ldquoNot forsakenrdquoldquoStruck downrdquo but ldquoNot destroyedrdquo

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 47-9

2we-have 1Yet mdash 2treasure 1this in

earthen vessels in- the excellence of-order-that the

power may- of- God and not out- usbe the of

in all-(things) being-pressured= but notbeing-afflicted

being-cramped= without- but notbeing-constrained means

utterly-without- being- but notmeans persecuted

being-forsaken being-cast- butdown

not being- always 2the 3dyingdestroyed

7 ῎Εχοmicroεν δcent τUacuteν θησαυρUacuteν τοEumlτον sectν

Ugraveστρακ13νοις σκεEcircεσιν 8να le IacuteπερβολOslash τinfinς

δυνάmicroεως not τοEuml ΘεοEuml καlsaquo microOslash sectξ lemicrolaquoν 8

sectν παντlsaquo θλ[B adds ε] ιβOgravemicroενοι ἀλλ᾿ οEgrave

στενοχωροEcircmicroενοι ἀποροEcircmicroενοι ἀλλ᾿ οEgraveκ

sectξαποροEcircmicroενοι 9 διωκOgravemicroενοι ἀλλ᾿ οEgraveκ

sectγκαταλειπOgravemicroενοι καταβαλλOgravemicroενοι ἀλλ᾿

οEgraveκ ἀπολλEcircmicroενοι 10 πάντοτε τOslashν νdegκρωσιν

39

Second Corinthians

Consider some points from the meaning of the words used hereldquoHard pressedrdquo ndash Thlibo (θλ13βω) mdash ldquoTo press (as grapes) press hard uponproperlyhellip a compressed way ie narrow straightened contracted metaphori-cally to trouble afflict distressrdquo (Thayer p 291)ldquoCrushedrdquo ndash Stenochoreo (στενοχωρdegω) mdash ldquoTo crowd together into a narrowplace straiten passively to be in straits to be cooped up to be cramped fromaction to be cramped in feelingrdquo (Moulton p 375)ldquoPerplexedrdquo ndash Aporeo (ἀπορdegω) mdash ldquoTo be without resources to be in straits tobe left wanting to be embarrassed to be in doubt not to know which way toturnhellip Middle to be at a loss with onersquos self be in doubt not to know how todecide or what to do to be perplexedrdquo (Thayer p 66)ldquoIn Despairrdquo ndash Exaporeo (sectξαπορdegω) mdash ldquoTo be at a loss To be wholly withoutresource to despair utterlyrdquo (Zodiates p 600) ldquoBe in great difficulty doubtembarrassmenthellip despair of livingrdquo (BAG p 273)ldquoPersecutedrdquo ndash Dioko (διasympκω) mdash ldquo1 To make to run to run or flee put toflight drive away 2 To run swiftly in order to catch some person or thing torun afterhellip 3 In anyway whatever to harass trouble molest onehellip to be mal-treated suffer persecution on account of somethinghellip 4 Without the idea ofhostility to run after follow after someone 5 Metaphoricallyhellip to pursue ieseek after eagerly earnestly endeavor to acquirerdquo (Thayer p 153)ldquoForsakenrdquo ndash Egkataleipo (sectγκαταλε13πω) mdash ldquoTo leave in a place or situationto leave behind to forsake abandon to leave as a remnant from destructionrdquo(Moulton p 113)ldquoCast downrdquo ndash Kataballo (καταβάλλω) mdash ldquoTo throw cast To cast down usedtransitively for example from heaven In the sense of to prostratehellip In the middleto lay down a foundationrdquo (Zodiates p 826)ldquoDestroyedrdquo ndash Apollumi (ἀπOgraveλλυmicroι) mdash ldquo1 actively ndash a ruin destroyhellip b lose2 middle ndash a be destroyed ruined Of persons perish diehellip Of Things belost pass away be ruined b be lostrdquo (BAG p 95)

ldquoCarrying About in the Body theDying of the Lord Jesusrdquo

Paul claims in verse ten that he always carries aboutwithin his body the dying of Jesus In the contextPaul is probably eluding to the degree to which

Christrsquos sacrifice ever serves to atone for manrsquos sin Yet interms of our daily life this phrase also suggests some-thing about the things on which Christians should dailymeditate

40

Chapter Four

+ ldquoHow may Christians ben-efit from daily meditationupon Christrsquos deathrdquo mdash Itcan help us to see how much wehave been loved in the realizationthat Christ received what we de-servedmdash It can help us to avoid sin in therecognition that our sin crucifiedJesusmdash It can help us be more patientwith others when we think aboutthe patience Christ demonstratedtowards us during His time on thecrossmdash It can humble us when we con-sider our daily struggles with sinwhich actually crucify Christ again(in one sense)mdash It can help us to see how hor-rible any sin is in the fact that it allcontributed to Christrsquos deathmdash It can help us to see our ownhardships in the proper perspectivein that they are always small whencompared to Christrsquos sufferingmdash It can help us make the right choices if we think of ourselves as dead toourselves with Christ living in us

God Delivers From Death

P aul makes what might seem to be an oddreference to one of the Psalms in verse thirteen ndash ldquoIbelieved and therefore I spokerdquo then adding ldquowe also

believe and therefore speakrdquo This comes in the midst ofdescribing how he is delivered constantly over to death(vs 11) yet is confident that the Lord will redeem him fromdeath (vs 14)

The quote of verse thirteen comes from Psalm 16610 A study of thePsalm gives interesting insight into Paulrsquos use of this phrase in our text The

τοEuml [tm- Κυρου alefsymABc omit] ᾿ΙησοEuml sectν τldquo

σasympmicroατι περιφdegροντες να καlsaquo le ζωOslash τοEuml

᾿ΙησοEuml [A adds φανερωθordf] sectν [ABtcm - τldquo

σasympmicroατι alefsym - τοrsaquoς σasympmicroασιν] lemicrolaquoν

φανερωθordf 11 ἀεlsaquo γὰρ lemicroεrsaquoς ο ζlaquoντες ες

θάνατον παραδιδOgravemicroεθα διὰ ᾿ΙησοEumlν να καlsaquo

le ζωOslash τοEuml ᾿ΙησοEuml φανερωθordf sectν τordf θνητordf

σαρκlsaquo[A adds ε] lemicrolaquoν 12 Agraveστε ı [tm-microcentν

alefsymABc omit] θάνατος sectν lemicrorsaquoν sectνεργεrsaquoται le δcent

ζωOslash sectν Iacutemicrorsaquoν 13 paraχοντες δcent τUacute αEgraveτUacute πνεEumlmicroα

4of- 5[Lord] 6Jesus 7in 8thethe

9body 1carrying- in- even the life of-about order-that the

Jesus [may-be- in [themanifest]

body the bodies] of-us

may-be- 3always1For 2we theliving untomanifest (ones)

death (are)-being- because- Jesus in- evengiven-over of order-that

the life of-the Jesus may-be- in the mortalmanifest

flesh of-us So-as the mdash

death in us works 2the1But

life in you 2having 1But the same spirit

41

Psalm is a Psalm of thanksgiving for Godrsquos deliverance from death It outlinesas follows

I A declaration of the Psalmistrsquos Love for the Lord because his prayerswere answered (1161-2)

II The Nature of the Psalmistrsquos trial (1163)A Encompassed by the pains of death (vs 3)B Laid hold of by Sheol (vs 3)C In trouble and sorrow (vs 3)

III The Psalmistrsquos prayer - ldquoDeliver my soulrdquo (1164)IV The Lordrsquos answer (1165-9)

A God was gracious and merciful (vs 5)B God preserved him and saved him (vs 6)C This put the Psalmistrsquos soul at rest (vs 7)D God saved his feet

from falling (vs8)E God allowed him to

walk ldquoin the land ofthe livingrdquo (vs 9)

V The Psalmistrsquos doubts(1161011)A Before Godrsquos salva-

tion the Psalmistldquobelieved andtherefore spokerdquo ofhis great affliction(vs 10)

B Before Godrsquos salva-tion the Psalmistcharged all menwith lying (vs 11)

VI The Psalmistrsquos commitment to serve the Lordin response for Hissalvation from death(11612-19)

VII The Psalmistrsquos conclu-sion (11615)A Death of the Lordrsquos

saints is a preciousthing in Godrsquos sight(vs15)

Second Corinthians

τinfinς πστεως κατὰ τUacute γεγραmicromicrodeg[A is missing

from here to 127]νον Επστευσα διUacute [alefsymA adds καlsaquo

Btcm omit] sectλάλησα καlsaquo lemicroε[alefsym omits]rsaquoς

πιστεEcircοmicroεν διUacute καlsaquo λαλοEumlmicroεν 14 εδOgraveτες

˜τι ı sectγερας τUacuteν [alefsymtcm- ΚEcircριον p46B omit]

᾿ΙησοEumlν καlsaquo lemicroᾶς [alefsym2tm- διὰ alefsym1Bc- σAacuteν] [alefsym1

adds ι] ΙησοEuml sectγερεrsaquo καlsaquo παραστAEligσει σAacuteν Iacutemicrorsaquoν

15 τὰ γὰρ [B had τὰρ] πάντα δι᾿ Iacutemicroᾶς να

le χάρις πλεονάσασα διὰ τlaquoν πλειOgraveνων τOslashν

εEgraveχαρισταν περισσεEcircσ˙ ες τOslashν δOgraveξαν τοEuml

ΘεοEuml

of- faith accord- the- having-been-the ing-to things written

We-believed there- [even]fore

we-spoke and we

believed there- even we-spoke knowingfore

that the- having- the [Lord]one raised

Jesus even us [through with]

Jesus will- and will-set-beside= with youraise present-(us)

3the- 1For [for- 2all through you= thatthings the-things] (are)-for-your-sake

mdash grace may-abound through the majority the

thanksgiving may-excell unto the glory of-the

God

42

Chapter Four

It may be that Paul is contrasting the attitude of the Psalmist with theattitude which the Christian can now possess The resurrection of Christ hasprovided us with the assurance that regardless of hardships God will redeemour soul (if not from physical death then from spiritual death) Unlike thePsalmist who believed and thus spoke of his great affliction the Christian canbelieve and thus speak of their great salvation (even in the face of affliction)

Seeing the Eternal and the Unseen 416-18

Viewing Hardships in Perspective

In verse sev-e n t e e nP a u l

makes a state-ment which isalmost incom-prehensible inlight of what we

know about his sufferings He re-fers to his ldquolight affliction which isbut for a momentrdquo Latter on in thissame epistle Paul describes some ofthese afflictions (which here he re-fers to as ldquolightrdquo) Notice what chap-ter ten verses 24-27 tell us he washellip

mdash Given 39 lashes by the Jewsfive times (vs 24)

mdash Beaten with rods three times(vs 25)

mdash Stoned once (vs 25)mdash Shipwrecked three times (vs

25)mdash In the open sea for a day and a night (vs 25)mdash Peril from waters robbers his countrymen the Gentiles in the city in

the wilderness at sea and from false brethren (vs 26)mdash In weariness and sleeplessness (vs 27)mdash Often in hunger and thirst and fasting (vs 27)mdash In cold and nakedness (vs 27)

16 ∆ιUacute οEgraveκ [tm- sectκκακοEumlmicroεν p46alefsymBc-

sectγκακοEumlmicroεν] ἀλλ᾿ ε καlsaquo ı paraξω lemicrolaquoν

ἄνθρωπος διαφθερεται ἀλλ᾿ ı [tm- paraσωθεν

alefsymBc- paraσω] lemicrolaquoν ἀνακαινοEumlται lemicrodegρᾳ καlsaquo

lemicrodegρᾳ 17 τUacute γὰρ παραυτκα sectλαφρUacuteν τinfinς

θλ[ B adds ε] ψεως lemicrolaquoν[ B omits] καθ᾿

IacuteπερβολOslashν [ alefsym1 Btcm- ες IacuteπερβολOslashν alefsym2

omits] αasympνιον βάρος δOgraveξης κατεργάζεται

lemicrorsaquoν 18 microOslash σκοποEcircντων lemicrolaquoν τὰ

There- not [we-lose-fore heart]

but if even the outer 2of-us

1man is-being- but the [inner]decayed

of-us is-being- from- evenrenewed day

to- 2the 1For immediate= lightness of-theday momentary

pressure of-us mdash

exceeding [unto exceeding]

eternal weight of- worksglory

in- not looking us-(at) the-us things

43

Second Corinthians

Probably any one of these hardships would lead many Christians ofour day to completely deny their faith Yet in Paul we see one who under-stands in the face of trials that 1 God has not forsaken him 2 That anytrial is only light and temporary + ldquoHow can Christians maintain their confidence that Godstill cares for them when facing great hardshipsrdquo mdash By realizingthat God is not the cause of hardships we may face (Ecclesiastes 911)mdash By understanding that struggles are a natural part of life in this age (John1633)mdash Growing to see trials as occasions to develop our character (Romans 534)mdash By considering that Christ endured similar trials (Hebrews 210) + ldquoHow can we view our struggles as lsquolightrsquo and lsquotemporaryrsquordquomdash By comparing them with the severe trials of Christ and the apostles (I Peter221-24)mdash By meditating on the duration of our hardships in light of eternity (Romans818)mdash By taking comfort in the hope of freedom from pain in the life to come(Revelation 214)mdash By considering that in a small part we are able to share in the sufferingsChrist endured for us (I Peter 41213)

ldquoThe Things Which Are Not Seen Are Eternalrdquo

Many in the religious world deny that man hasbeen given a spirit (or soul) within them that isby nature eternal The main arguments made

are1 The righteous are said to be given immortality ratherthan to possess it naturally (see Romans 27)2 Jesus warned us to fear Him who can destroy bothbody and soul (see Matthew 1028 and compare Luke1245)

Both arguments overlook the facts that 1 The unrighteous are not givenldquoimmortalityrdquo in that they will be subjected endlessly to the ldquosecond deathrdquo(see Revelation 218 amp 1410) 2 The word ldquodestroyrdquo can be used to refer tothat which is decayed without being annihilated (see Mark 222 - Note ldquoru-inedrdquo= ldquodestroyedrdquo in the Greek)

44

βλεπOgravemicroενα ἀλλὰ τὰ microOslash βλεπOgravemicroενα τὰ γὰρ

βλεπOgravemicroενα πρOgraveσκαιρα τὰ δcent microOslash βλεπOgravemicroενα

αasympνια

being- but the- not being- 2the- 1forseen things seen things

being- (are)- 2the- 1but not being-seen temporary things seen

(are)-eternal

Chapter Four

Beyond this in our text Pauldemonstrates that man does in facthave something within him whichis eternal Note the contextmdash vs 7 Paul refers to the treasurewe are given in ldquoearthen vesselsrdquo (re-ferring to the knowledge of the gloryof God - vs 6 which dwells in themortal bodies of believers)mdash vs 8-11 No matter what hard-ships Christians face the ldquolife ofJesusrdquo can still be manifested withinmanrsquos mortal bodiesmdash vs 14 The same God whichraised Christ from the dead will oneday raise manmdash vs 16 This can give man comfort for we can know that when the outwardman (our physical bodies) perishes our inward man (our souls or spirits) isldquorenewed day by dayrdquomdash 51 Thus if our earthly house (our mortal bodies) are destroyed we havesomething eternal in the heavens (a resurrected body)It is within this context that Paul says ldquothe things which are not seen areeternalrdquo (vs 18) What are the things which are ldquonot seenrdquo Obviously theldquoinward manrdquo of verse sixteen which is manrsquos soul or spirit and the eternalhabitations which it can enjoy

II Corinthians 418

45

Chapter Four Review

1 On what basis does Paul claim that the con-science of ldquoevery manrdquo commended him in thesight of God

2 To whom is the gospel veiled3 Who is responsible for this veiling4 Who is the ldquogod of this agerdquo Give others Scrip-

tures to prove your answer5 List three false notions taught in the world about

the deity of Christ6 What likeness does Paul claim Jesus bears to God7 What must a gospel preacher not preach8 What are two ideas which can be drawn from Paulrsquos reference to

ldquotreasure in earthen vesselsrdquo9 What is the first definition of the word translated ldquoperplexedrdquo in

verse eight10 In the Psalm from which Paul quotes in verse thirteen what is the

Psalmist thankful for11 What did the Psalmist ldquobelieve and therefore speakrdquo12 List some of the things which Paul calls ldquolight afflictionrdquo13 To what is Paul referring when he speaks of the ldquoinwardrdquo man14 What are the two arguments made by those who deny that man

has an eternal soul15 What statement in this chapter demonstrates that the unseen part

of man is eternal

Second Corinthians

46

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R F I V E F I V E F I V E F I V E F I V E

Outline

I A Building From God Eternal in the Heavens (vss1-5)

II Absent From the Body Yet At Home With theLord (vss 6-8)

III The Terror of the Lord (vss 9-11)IV The Love of Christ Constrains Us (vss 12-15)V A New View of Others (vss 16-21)

A Building From God Eternal

in the Heavens 51-5

The Nature of OurPhysical Bodies

Paul uses two phrases to de-scribe our physical bodies inverse one ldquoearthly houserdquo

and ldquothis tentrdquo Consider what thesephrases tell us about manrsquos physi-cal life

The word for ldquoearthlyrdquo in theGreek is epigeios (sectπγειος) meaningndash ldquoupon the earth terrestrialrdquo This word is used in I Corinthians 1540 andPhilippians 210 There is another word in Greek which communicates theidea ldquomade of earthrdquo It is used in I Corinthians 1547 and translated ldquomade ofdustrdquo (Vincent Vol III p 315) The idea here seems to be that the body (thehome of our souls) which we have in this life belongs to the earth (see I Corin-thians 1550) In contrast to this the body the saved will have in the age tocome which will be a ndash ldquohelliphabitation which is from heavenrdquo (vs 2)

1 ΟDaggerδαmicroεν γὰρ ˜τι sectὰν le sectπγειος lemicrolaquoν

οκα τοEuml σκAEligνους καταλυθordf οκοδοmicroOslashν sectκ

ΘεοEuml paraχοmicroεν οκαν ἀχε[alefsym omits]ιροποητον

αasympνιον sectν τοrsaquoς οEgraveρανοrsaquoς 2 καlsaquo γὰρ sectν

2we-know 1For that if the earthly 4of-us

1house 2the 3tent should-be- (a)-build- fromdestroyed ing

of- we- (a)- not-made-with-handsGod have house

eternal in the heavens 2even 1For in

II Corinthians 51

47

Second Corinthians

The figure of the physical body being described as a ldquotentrdquo is used else-where in the New Testament The Apostle Peter in II Peter 113 14 speaks ofthe body as a temporary dwelling which he knew he must shortly ldquoput offrdquoPaul was undoubtedly familiar with the impermanent nature of a tent Acts183 records for us that Paul was by occupation a tentmaker The Apocryphalbook known as the Wisdom of Soloman (which was written by an AlexandrianJew impersonating King Soloman) uses the phrase ldquoearthly tabernaclerdquo in aninteresting manner The text reads ndash ldquoFor the corruptible body presseth downthe soul and the earthly tabernacle weigheth down the mind that musethupon many thingsrdquo (915 KJV) Some scholars argue that Paul (through thedirection of the Holy Spirit) borrows this phrase from the apocryphal work Itis unknown whether Paul would have been familiar with the Wisdom of Solomanbut at the very least this demonstrates that pre-Christian Jews viewed thebody as a temporary dwelling for the soul

Notice the following contrasts drawn in this verse1 Here our dwelling (for the soul) belongs to the earth (vs 1) ndash in the age tocome our dwelling (for the soul) will belong to heaven (vs 12)2 Here our dwelling (for the soul) is a ldquotentrdquo that is fragile temporary andimpermanent (vs 1) ndash in the age to come our dwelling (for the soul) will be ldquoabuildingrdquo (permanent) ldquonot made with handsrdquo (sturdy) ldquoeternalrdquo (enduring)

Groaning to BeFurther Clothed

Augustine( t h eL a t i n

theologian thatlived in the 5thCentury AD)wrote of God mdash

ldquoYou made us for yourself and ourhearts find no peace until they restin yourdquo (Confessions Bk I Ch 1)In verse two of our text Paul claims that while we are in our earthly bodies ldquowegroanrdquo in desire for our heavenly habitation In Romans 819-23 Paul usessimilar language claiming that ldquothe whole creation groans and labors withbirth painsrdquo (Romans 822) and that Christians ldquogroan within themselves ldquoea-gerly waiting for the adoption the redemption of our bodyrdquo (Romans 823)

II Corinthians 523

τοEcircτƒ στενάζοmicroεν τUacute οκητAEligριον lemicrolaquoν τUacute

sectξ οEgraveρανοEuml sectπενδEcircσασθαι sectπιποθοEumlντες 3

[ alefsymtcm- εDagger γε p46B - εDaggerπερ] καlsaquo sectνδυσάmicroενοι

οEgrave γυmicroνοlsaquo εIacuteρεθησOgravemicroεθα

this we-groan 3the 4habitation 5of-us

6out- 7heaven 2to-put-on-over 1desiringof ourselves

[If-indeed if-indeed] even having-clothed-ourselves

not 2naked 1we-will-be-found

48

Chapter Five

It is evident that man has within him a restlessness which hinders usfrom being content with our earthly life as it is This restlessness leads us toexplore and create in an effort to improve our condition - or complain and feelsorry for ourselves when things are not what we wish they were In the paganworld even those who do not have the gospel feel the desire to look beyond thislife and imagine for themselves gods and how to attain life after death

+ ldquoWhat are some ways that human discontentment may

be thought of as longing for those things offered in Christrdquomdash LONELINESS ndash Everyone wants to have comrades who are interested intheir well-being In the church Christians have the assurance that there willalways be those around them interested in their physical and spiritual statemdash GOOD FAMILY RELATIONSHIPS ndash Many people feel great distress overcrumbling family relationships When people submit themselves to the guid-ance of Godrsquos word they can have some of the most fulfilling family relation-ships possiblemdash SORROW ndash When those around us pass away from this life we feel alonging to be able to bring them back to us or go to them In Christ alone isthere the sure promise that death is not the end One day those faithful to theLord will be reunited in peace joy and an eternity free from sorrowmdash MATERIALISM ndash Though experience should teach us that piling up mate-rial possessions never provides us with lasting contentment man neverthe-less regularly pursues happiness through possessions Only when the savedattain their ldquotreasure in heavenrdquo will that craving within us truly be satisfied

Note All of the things listed above may be ways in which men have a longingfor spiritual satisfaction yet the problem is that men do not see that in Christthere is a way to satisfy this longing Without Christ man is left in emptydiscontentment with this life and yet no way to satisfy that discontentment(either in this life on in that which is to come)

Those Clothed Yet Unclothed

In verse three Paul makes a statement which seemsparadoxical speaking of those ldquohaving beenclothedrdquo who are ldquofound nakedrdquo The context is still

dealing with what happens if our ldquoearthy house this tentis destroyedrdquo (vs 1) Dwelling within that ldquotentrdquo is theldquoinward manrdquo (416) which is ldquoeternalrdquo (418) When deathoccurs the inward man leaves its earthly tent (Ecclesias-tes 127) At the resurrection the inner man will return

to a body that is changed (I Corinthians 1550-53) The hope of man is that at

49

οEgrave γυmicroνοlsaquo εIacuteρεθησOgravemicroεθα 4 καlsaquo γὰρ ο ντες

sectν τldquo σκAEligνε[alefsym omits]ι στενάζοmicroεν βαροEcircmicroενοι

sectφ᾿ amp οEgrave θdegλοmicroεν sectκδEcircσασθαι [ Btcm- ἀλλ᾿

alefsym - ἀλλὰ] sectπενδEcircσασθαι να καταποθordf τUacute

θνητUacuteν IacuteπUacute τinfinς ζωinfinς 5 ı δcent

κατεργασάmicroενος lemicroᾶς ες αEgraveτUacute τοEumlτο ΘεOgraveς

ı [alefsym2tm- καlsaquo alefsym1 Bc omit ] δοAacuteς lemicrorsaquoν τUacuteν

ἀρρ[alefsym omits]αβlaquoνα τοEuml ΠνεEcircmicroατος 6

Second Corinthians

the resurrection he will be clothed with that ldquohabitation which is from heavenrdquo(52) ndash that is to say an incorruptible body that will dwell with God Howeverthe ungodly (though resurrected - John 52829) will not be clothed with aldquohabitation which is from heavenrdquo Thus they ldquohaving been clothedrdquo are ldquofoundnakedrdquo (Note Compare this idea with Jesusrsquo Parable of the Wedding Feast inMatthew 221-14 There the one without a wedding garment was expelledfrom the wedding)

Verses four and five contain a few words in the Greekwhich are valuable to our understanding of someof the concepts discussed previously in the epistle

Note a couple of them

ldquoMortalityrdquo (vs 4) mdash Thnetos (θνητOgraveς) - ldquoLiable to deathmortalhellipsubject to deathhelliprdquo (Thayer p 291) Note Inthis age all men (both in body and in spirit) are ldquomortalrdquo

in that they are ldquosubject to deathrdquo Our bodies are destined to die Our spiritsare subject to spiritual death in thatwe can in this age be spirituallyseparated from God The righteousat the resurrection will attain im-mortality as Jesus promises ndash ldquonorcan they die anymorerdquo (Luke 2036)The wicked however will receive theldquosecond deathrdquo (Revelation 218)which will be a state of ldquoeverlastingdestruction from the presence of theLordrdquo (II Thessalonians 19) Theyare eternally subject to deathldquoGuaranteerdquo (vs 5) mdash Arrabon(ἀρραβasympν) - ldquo To pledgehellip an ear-nest ie money which in purchasesis given as a pledge that the fullamount will subsequently bepaidhelliprdquo (Thayer p 75) ldquoAn earnestis a pledge of assurance that apromise will be kept God has con-firmed what He teaches by lsquosigns and wonders and by manifold powers andby gifts of the Holy Spirit according to His own willrsquo (Hebrews 234) Thus Godhas attested all His promises and all concerning all things through the apostlesrdquo(Commentary on Second Corinthians by David Lipscomb p 71)

II Corinthians 545

not 2naked 1we-will-be- 2even 1For the- beingfound ones

in the tent we-groan being-burdened

2because1not we- to-uncloth- [but]wish ourselves

put-on-over-ourselves in- 2should-be- mdash=further-clothed order-that swallowed

1mortality under= the life 2The- 1Yetby one

having-worked 4us 3into 2same- 1this (is)-thing God

The- [even] having- to- theOne given us

pledge of- SpiritThe

50

Chapter Five

Note The sense in which the Spirit is our deposit pledge guarantee or ear-nest could be understood in a couple of ways1 The miraculous gifts of the Holy Spirit served as the confirmation that whatGod had promised He would carry out We now have that confirmation in thewords of Scripture2 When believers manifest the ldquofruit of the Spiritrdquo (Galatians 52223) theyshow themselves to be ldquofilled with the Spiritrdquo (Ephesians 518) If the Spiritdwells within us (through the word) we can be assured of a resurrection likeChristrsquos (Romans 811)

Absent From the Body

Yet At Home With the Lord 56-8

The Christianrsquos Home

I n verses six and seven Paul uses the wordendemeo (sectνδηmicrodegω) meaning ndash ldquoTo dwell in a place beat homerdquo (Moulton p 138) and ekdemeo (sectκδηmicrodegω)

meaning ndash ldquoProperly To be absent from home go abroadtravel hence to be absent from any place or personrdquo(Moulton p123) Here Paul suggests a different way ofviewing our lives on earth (in the body) When we are ldquoat

homerdquo in our physical bodies we areldquoaway from homerdquo with respect tothe Lord (vs 6) Yet if we are ldquoawayfrom homerdquo with respect to ourphysical bodies that means that theChristian is really ldquoat homerdquo withrespect to God

In the book of Philippians(written probably near the end ofPaulrsquos physical life) Paul shows hisown perspective on life In chapterone Paul claims ndash ldquoFor to me to liveis Christ and to die is gainrdquo (121)He adds further ndash ldquoI am hardpressed between the two having adesire to depart and be with Christwhich is far betterrdquo (123) Paulcould have this view of life and death

II Corinthians 56-8

6 θαρροEumlντες οOcircν πάντοτε καlsaquo εδOgraveτες ˜τι

sectνδηmicroοEumlντες sectν τldquo σasympmicroατι sectκδηmicroοEumlmicroεν ἀπUacute

τοEuml Κυρου 7 (διὰ πστεως γὰρ

περιπατοEumlmicroεν οEgrave διὰ εDaggerδους) 8 [Btcm-

θαρροEumlmicroεν alefsym - θαρροEumlντες] δdeg καlsaquo

εEgraveδοκοEumlmicroεν microᾶλλον sectκδηmicroinfinσαι [alefsym2tcm-sectκ

alefsym1B omit ] τοEuml σasympmicroατος καlsaquo sectνδηmicroinfinσαι πρUacuteς

τUacuteν ΚEcircριον

being- there- always even knowing thatconfident fore

dwelling- in the body we-dwell- fromat-home out-of-home

of- Lord 3by 4faith 1Forthe

2we-walk not by sight

[2we-are- being- 1but evenconfident confident]

we-think- more to-dwell- [out]well out-of-home

of- body and to-dwell- withthe at-home

the Lord

51

Second Corinthians

because he clearly understood (as he stated later in the same epistle) ndash ldquohellip ourcitizenship is in heaven from which we also eagerly wait for the Savior theLord Jesus Christrdquo (320) Heaven is the place Christians view as their homeOn earth we are simply ldquosojourners and pilgrimsrdquo (I Peter 211)

Walking By Faith

The challenge of the Christian system of faith is liv-ing life on earth with a faith in the unseen InChrist we must have faith in

mdash The existence of God (Hebrews 113)mdash The reliability of Scripture (II Timothy 31617)mdash The existence of the human soul or spirit (Job 328)mdash The claims of Scripture about Jesus (I Cor 153-8)mdash The hope of a life after death (Acts 2415)

None of these things may be grasped by our physical senses As a result thebeliever must ldquowalk by faithrdquo That is not to suggest that faith itself is some-thing held without evidence Each of the points of faith mentioned above haveevidences which can lead rational thinking people to accept their reality Con-sider a few of these evidences

The Existence of God mdash1 There is no known example of there existing a cause without an effectSince the universe exists there must have been a cause (ie God or a forcegreater than all the laws of the universe) to produce the effect (ie the uni-verse)2 All cultures demonstrate some concept of the existence of deity (or deities)What would make man imagine deity (Note All products of human imagina-tion are mixtures of that which man has in part experienced)

The Reliability of Scripture mdash1 The Bible is a book written by an estimated 40 authors writing from theyears c 1400 BC - c 90 AD yet maintaining a unity of thought and purposeunimaginable if merely a human creation2 The Bible is one of the oldest books which records the earliest informationwe have about recorded human history and yet it has never been conclusivelyproven wrong on any point of fact in human history (Note The evidence usedto defend the theory of evolution is subject to different interpretations whichdo not demand the acceptance of this theory There has been no evidencefound which demands an evolutionary explanation of human origins to theexclusion of all other interpretations)

52

There- even we-loving-honorfore =we-earnestly-strive

whe- dwelling-at- or dwelling-out- 2well-ther home out-of-home pleasing

3to- 1to-be mdash For of-all of-Him us

2to-be- 1it-is- in-front ofjudgment-manifested necessary the seat

of- Christ in- may-recieve- eachThe order-that for-himself

the- [through ones- of-the bodythings own-things]

pertain- what- he-has- whether good oring-to things done

[evil foul]

Chapter Five

Claims About Jesus mdash1 There are secular historical witnesses which attest to the earthly existence(and crucifixion) of Jesus The Roman historians Tacitus and Seutonius bothwrite about Jesus2 The majority of those who claimed to be witnesses of Christrsquos resurrectionwere executed because of their faith (when all that would have been requiredwas denial of Jesusrsquo life doctrine or resurrection) What would make peoplego to their graves defending a lie if they knew that it was a lie

The Terror of the Lord 59-11

The Judgment Seat of Christ

Verse ten speaks of the ldquojudgment seat of Christrdquoclaiming that all must one day appear before it toreceive the things ldquodone in the bodyrdquo Within the

religious world there are some who suggest that the ldquojudg-ment seat of Christrdquo differs from the ldquoGreat White ThroneJudgementrdquo (as it is called) which is described in Revela-tion 2011 The claim is that the judgment described in

our text is a believersrsquo (or church) judgment while the ldquoGreat White ThroneJudgmentrdquo will be for all others There are at least two false doctrines whichlogically demand that such a con-clusion be imposed upon the text

1 ldquoOnce Saved Always Savedrdquo ndashIf believers (once saved) can neverbe lost there must be some expla-nation for the various accounts ofjudgment scenes in which some aresaved and some are condemned InRevelation 2011-15 and Matthew2531-46 after judgment some aresaved while others condemned Toescape the conclusion that believerswill be judged (and saved or lost)according to their deeds advocatesof ldquoonce saved always savedrdquo claimthat the believersrsquo judgment is toassign greater and lesser rewards(not salvation or condemnation)

9 ∆ιUacute καlsaquo φ[B adds ε]ιλοτ[B adds ε]ιmicroοEcircmicroεθα

εDaggerτε sectνδηmicroοEumlντες εDaggerτε sectκδηmicroοEumlντες εEgraveάρεστοι

αEgraveτldquo εpermilναι 10 τοAacuteς γὰρ πάντας lemicroᾶς

φανερωθinfinναι δεrsaquo paramicroπροσθεν τοEuml βAEligmicroατος

τοEuml ΧριστοEuml να [alefsym1 had ε]κοmicroσηται szligκαστος

τὰ [alefsymBtcm- διὰ p46 - Daggerδια] τοEuml σasympmicroατος

πρUacuteς ἃ paraπραξεν εDaggerτε ἀγαθOgraveν εDaggerτε [p46Btm-

κακOgraveν alefsymc- φαEumlλον]

II Corinthians 5910

53

Second Corinthians

2 Premillennialism ndash The religious theory known as ldquoPremillennialismrdquo isbuilt on the assumption that Christrsquos kingdom would not be a spiritual king-dom but a physical kingdom like that of David Soloman etc Building uponthe symbols that are recorded in Revelation 201-6 dealing with the ldquofirst res-urrectionrdquo and the thousand year reign of Christ premillennialists argue thatwhen Christ returns the church will be resurrected and ldquorapturedrdquo to escapethe tribulation While the rest of mankind will not rise until the end of thethousand year reign Premillennialists are forced to categorize the variousjudgment scene accounts in order to justify their theory

+ ldquoDoes the Bible really teach two judgment scenesrdquo mdashIn our text here in Second Corinthians Paul makes two points which refutethe interpretation of this as a believerrsquos judgment1 Paul claims ldquowe must allrdquo appear before the judgment in question (vs 10)2 It is the terror of this which leads to the persuasion of men (vs 11)If the believersrsquo judgment is one to assign greater and lesser rewards whatabout this would lead Paul to ldquoterrorrdquo Further Why would this lead him toldquopersuade menrdquo (believers and unbelievers alike) if this judgment would noteffect those outside the church

Scripture speaks only of ldquothe judgment to comerdquo (Acts 2425) or theldquoday of judgmentrdquo (Matthew 1236 II Peter 37 I John 417) The New Testa-ment knows nothing of two scenes of judgment except where one is imposedupon it by those with a religious agenda to prop up It is clear from thevarious accounts that when the resurrection occurs all will be judged (seeDaniel 122 Matthew 2531-46 John 52829 Acts 1731 II Thessalonians1910 Hebrews 92728 Revelation 2011-15)

[Note There is no question that the Bible does promise that ldquothe dead inChrist will rise firstrdquo (I Thessalonians 416) and that the righteous will beldquocaught up togetherhellipto meet the Lord in the airrdquo (I Thessalonians 417) YetScripture does not separate this from the Lordrsquos coming in judgment of theentire world It is also clear that the book of Revelation speaks of the ldquofirstresurrectionrdquo (Revelation 205) Yet in the context we should note 1 Onlythose beheaded for Christ are specifically said to participate in it 2 Nowheredoes the text identify this as a physical bodily resurrection 3 The fact that itis spiritual by nature is evident from the fact that we are told the ldquoseconddeathrdquo has no power over those who have experienced it (206) Thus from thecontext this ldquofirst resurrectionrdquo must refer either to baptism (a spiritual resur-rection - Romans 65) or simply the resurrection of the cause for which themartyrs died as they reign spiritually with Christ]

54

Chapter Five

κακOgraveν alefsymc- φαEumlλον] 11 εδοτες οOcircν τUacuteν

φOgraveβον τοEuml Κυρου ἀνθρasympπους πεθο[p46-

ω]microεν Θεldquo δcent πεφανερasympmicroεθα sectλπζω δcent καlsaquo

sectν ταrsaquoς συνε[alefsym omits]ιδAEligσεσιν Iacutemicrolaquoν

πεφανερlaquoσθαι

[evil foul] Knowing there- thefore

fear of- Lord 2men 1we-[should]-the persuade

2to- 1yet we-have-been- 2I- 1butevenGod manifested hope

in the conscience of-you-all

to-have-been-manifested

II Corinthians 511

Judgment Seats

The word in Greek which is translated ldquojudgmentseatrdquo is the word bema (βinfinmicroα) meaning literally ndash ldquoastep pace footstephelliprdquo (Liddel amp Scott 1869 ed p

267) In ancient cities there was frequently a raised plat-form reached by stepsfrom which speakers ad-dressed the people Thebema was a place of

judgment where those charged with crimeswere brought before the judge or tribunal InCorinth the bema had been a place of injus-tice for the church In the early years of thechurches establishment (while Paul was stillin Corinth) the Jews of the city brought himbefore the judgment seat of a proconsul named Gallio Though Gallio dis-missed the charges against Paul he allowed the Greeks to beat a Christiannamed Sosthenes without taking notice of it (Acts 1812-17)

Fearing The Lord

John wrote (through the direction of the Holy Spirit)ndash ldquoThere is no fear in love put perfect love castsout fear because fear involves torment But he

who fears hasnot been madeperfect in loverdquo(I John 418)

If the apostle John writes in con-demnation of fear why does Paulclaim in verse eleven to know ldquotheterror of the Lordrdquo

The concept of godly fear istaught throughout Scripture with adramatic sense of confidence beforeGod being afforded to ChristiansSoloman taught that ndash ldquoThe fear ofthe Lord is the beginning of knowl-edgehelliprdquo (Proverbs 17) The book of Acts describes the early church as ndashldquohellipwalking in the fear of the Lord and in the comfort of the Holy Spirithelliprdquo (Acts931) As children of God believers must maintain a healthy reverence for thesovereignty of God Though in Christ believers can have boldness (Hebrews

Kyle P

ope

The Bema of Ancient Corinth

55

Second Corinthians

56

1019-22 I John 417) and a spirit of sonship (Romans 815) we must notallow this to leads us to arrogance or a lack of due reverence Though we canhave the confidence that if we abide in Him we will be saved we must main-tain the awareness that if we fall we will be ldquocut offrdquo This is what Paul told theRomans ndash ldquohellipDo not be haughty but fearrdquo (Romans 1120)

ldquoWe Persuade Menrdquo

The gospel is designed to reshape men and womenrather than appease them However it is the vi-tal task of those who have accepted the Christian

faith themselves to convince others of the truth containedwithin the gospel Paul declares in this text that the prom-ise of standing in judgment before God serves as a moti-

vation to ldquopersuade menrdquo (vs 11) Persuasion involves reasoning (Acts 198)conviction (I Corinthians 142425) humility gentleness and patience (II Timo-thy 22425) It also demands a willingness to take people to the Scripturesallowing them to develop convictions for themselves (Acts 1711)

The Love of Christ

Constrains Us 512-15

The Motivation forChristian Service

Verse fourteen tells us a littlebit about the apostlersquos moti-vation for serving the Lord

and others He claims ndash ldquoFor thelove of Christ constrains ushelliprdquo Theword ldquoconstrainrdquo is defined as ndash ldquo1To compel oblige 2 To confine3 To restrainrdquo (American HeritageDictionary p 155) Certain actsperformed on our behalf by othersldquoobligerdquo us to return their generos-ity or service The great love thatGod has shown to mankind (whenrealized) obligates the recipient to-wards service No longer may onesimply choose to serve but they are

12 ΟEgrave γὰρ πάλιν bullαυτοAacuteς συνιστάνοmicroεν

Iacutemicrorsaquoν ἀλλὰ ἀφορmicroOslashν διδOgraveντες Iacute[B2 - le]microrsaquoν

καυχAEligmicroατος Iacuteπcentρ [tcm - lemicrolaquoν p 46alefsymB -

Iacutemicrolaquoν] να paraχητε πρUacuteς τοAacuteς sectν προσasympπƒ

καυχωmicrodegνους καlsaquo οEgrave καρδᾳ 13 εDaggerτε γὰρ

sectξdegστηmicroεν Θεldquo εDaggerτε σωφρονοEumlmicroεν Iacutemicrorsaquoν 14

le γὰρ ἀγάπη τοEuml ΧριστοEuml συνdegχει lemicroᾶς

κρ[B adds ε]ναντας τοEumlτο ˜τι [alefsym2tm- ε

p46alefsym1 Bc omit ] εAcircς Iacuteπcentρ πάντων ἀπdegθανεν

ἄρα ο5 πάντες ἀπdegθανο[alefsym1 had ε]ν

2not 1For again 2ourselves 1we-commend

to- but (an)- giving to- [to-you opportunity you us]

of-(a)-boast concern- [of-us ing

of-you- in- you-all-may- to the- 2in 3(the)-faceall] order-that have ones =appearance

1boasting and not in-(the)- 2whether 1Forheart

we-are- (it-is)-for- if we-are-of- (it-is)-beside-ourselves God sound-mind for-you-all

2the1For love of- Christ constrains usThe

having-judged this that [if]

One 2on- 3of-all 1has-diedbehalf

then theall they-died [died]ones

Chapter Five

bound to serve the one who has loved them so (see Rom 618 I John 49-11)

ldquoOne Died for Allrdquo

The doctrine taught in the religious world known asldquoCalvinismrdquo (named for its formulator - John Calvin1509 - 1564) advocates a principle referred to as

ldquoLimited Atonementrdquo This concept holds that Christ didnot die for all men but only for the ldquoelectrdquo (those God hadalready predestined to save) Louis Berkoff in his book A

Summary of Christian Doctrine writes ndash ldquoReformed churcheshellip believe in a lim-ited atonement Christ suffered and died for the purpose of saving only theelect and that purpose is actually accomplished Christ not merely made sal-vation possible but really saves to the uttermost every one of those for whomhe laid down His lifehelliprdquo (p 107 - Emphasis the authorrsquos) In many ways itmust be admitted that if the other premises of Calvinism are true (Total He-reditary Depravity Unconditional Election etc) then ldquoLimited Atonementrdquo isa logical (and necessary) consequence However if God instead has given manthe freewill to choose good or evil and the elect are those who choose obedi-ence to the gospel (of their own freewill) limited atonement must be rejected

+ ldquoWhat does II Corinthians 514 indicate about lsquolimited

atonementrsquordquo mdash Our text states in verse fourteen that ldquohellipif One died forall then all diedrdquo The difficult (yet vital) part of this phrase is the declarationldquothen all diedrdquo How may this be understood Consider a few interpretationsmdash ldquoThen all had diedrdquo Christrsquos death was to cover the sins of those whohad died in sin Romans 512 teaches that ldquohellipdeath spread to all men be-cause all sinnedrdquo There is no question that all were ldquodead in trespasses andsinsrdquo (Ephesians 21) Paul may be showing that the reason it was necessaryfor Christ to die for mankind was the necessity of redeeming man from deathmdash ldquoThen all died in Christrdquo Calvinists affirm that when Adam sinned ldquoalldied in Adamrdquo Could Paul be suggesting here that when Christ died Hisrighteous act effected mankind in a similar way that (as Calvinists claim) Adamrsquossin did Romans 518 claims ndash ldquohellipthrough one Manrsquos righteous act the freegift came to all men resulting in justification of liferdquo If so we must eitheraccept that all men will be saved (which Scripture denies - Matthew 71314)or all men have not been effected by Adamrsquos sin [Note The Bible indicatesthat physical death is an indirect consequence of Adamrsquos sin - I Corinthians1522 Genesis 322 All men spiritually die when they imitate Adamrsquos ex-ample of disobedience - Romans 512]mdash ldquoThen all the elect diedrdquo This is how Calvinists would have us to under-stand this verse They suggest that the all in both phrases refers to those

57

Second Corinthians

unconditionally predestined to bethe elect However the very nextverse says ndash ldquoand He died for allthat those who live should live nolonger to themselveshelliprdquo (vs 15) Adistinction is drawn here betweenthe all for whom Christ died andldquothose who liverdquo Those who live arethose who have accepted life inChrist Yet if Christ died only forthe unconditionally predestinedelect we have Paul in essence say-ing ldquoIf One died for all the elect thenall the elect died and He died for allthe elect that those of the elect who live should live no longer for themselveshelliprdquoDonrsquot all the elect live

Living to the One Who Died

The one who comes to Christ must view themselvesas dead to themselves and living to the one whohas redeemed them from death That means sur-

rendering our wishes and desires to the Master It meanslooking first and foremost to the Masterrsquos will when decid-ing what to do in life Then accepting with contentmentwhere His service takes us Paul wrote in Galatians 220ndash ldquoI have been crucified with Christ it is no longer I who

live but Christ lives in me and the life which I now live in the flesh I live byfaith in the son of God who loved me and gave Himself for merdquo

A New View of Others 516-21

A Fleshly Regard for Others

In verse sixteen Paul says that we must no longer regard others ldquoaccordingto the fleshrdquo acknowledging in the same verse that we once regarded Christsimply according to the flesh As Christians we must see one another and

others as spiritual beings (not just fleshly creatures) Those with a fleshlyregard for others determine the value of others by what the other person hasto offer them Perhaps it is financial gain status stimulation or sensual plea-

then the all they-have [have- anddied died]

on- of-all [then the allbehalf

they-have- and on- of-all] He-died in-died] behalf order-that

theliving no-longer 2for- 1should- but for-ones themselves live the

2on- 3of-(the)- 1(one)-having- and having-behalf same-(ones) died been-raised

ἄρα ο5 πάντες ἀπdegθανο[alefsym1 had ε]ν 15 καlsaquo

Iacuteπcentρ πάντων [p 46 omits - ἄρα ο5 πάντες

ἀπdegθανον καlsaquo Iacuteπcentρ πάντων ] ἀπdegθανεν να

ο ζlaquoντες microηκdegτι bullαυτοrsaquoς ζlaquoσιν ἀλλὰ τldquo

Iacuteπcentρ αEgraveτlaquoν ἀποθανOgraveντι καlsaquo sectγερθdegντι

II Corinthians 515

58

Chapter Five

sure In Christ we must see the lost as souls in danger of eternal punishmentand other Christians as fellow travelers striving heavenward We should burninto our minds the Lordrsquos admonition to Samuel ndash ldquohellipFor the Lord does not seeas man sees for man looks at the outward appearance but the Lord looks atthe heartrdquo (I Samuel 167)

ldquoIf Anyone is in Christrdquo

A most beautiful declaration is made in verse sev-enteen regarding the condition of the one who isldquoin Christrdquo The text claims such a person is ndash

ldquohellipA new creation old things have passed away beholdall things have become newrdquo Letrsquos consider these claimsfor a moment

+ ldquoWhat old things lsquopass awayrsquo in Christrdquomdash Our former alienation from the Lord (Eph 214-17)mdash Our former conduct (Ephesians 23 422)mdash Our past sin debt (Isaiah 592)mdash Our former spiritual condition(Ephesians 21 5)mdash Our former destiny (Romans289 II Thessalonians 189)+ ldquoWhat things become

new in Christrdquo mdash Our spiri-tual condition (John 33 I Peter12223)mdash Our conduct (Ephesians 41Philippians 127)mdash Our privileges (Ephesians 13 IJohn 19 I Peter 312)mdash Our relationship to God (Gala-tians 32627 I John 312)mdash Our future hope (Titus 12 37)+ ldquoWhat identifies one as

being lsquoin Christrsquordquo mdash Faith(John 316 Acts 1043 Romans 10910)mdash Repentance (Luke 135 Acts 238 319 2620)mdash Confession (Matthew 103233 Romans 10910 I John 415)mdash Baptism (Matthew 2819 Mark 1616 Acts 238 836-49 2216 Romans61-6 Galatians 32627)mdash Faithfulness (John 1510 I Corinthians 1512 Revelation 210)

59

16 Agraveστε lemicroε[alefsym omits]rsaquoς ἀπUacute τοEuml νEumlν οEgraveδdegνα

οDaggerδαmicroεν κατὰ σάρκα ε [alefsym2tm- δcent p46alefsym1 Bc

omit ] καlsaquo sectγνasympκαmicroεν κατὰ σάρκα ΧριστOgraveν

ἀλλὰ νEumlν οEgraveκdegτι γ[B adds ε]ινasympσκοmicroεν 17

Agraveστε εDagger τις sectν Χριστldquo καινOslash κτσις τα

αρχαrsaquoα παρinfinλθεν δοAacute [tm- γdegγονε alefsymBc-

γdegγονεν ] καινὰ [tm- τὰ πάντα alefsymBc omit ]

so-that we from mdash now no-one

we- accord- (the)- 2if [1Yet]know ing-to flesh

even 2we-are-in-a-state- 3accord- 4(the)- 1Christof-having-known ing-to flesh

but now no- we-may-longer know

So-that if any- (is)- in-Christ (he-is- creation theone in a)-new

former- have-passed behold [2are-in-a-state-things by of-having-become]

3new- [1all-the-things]things

Second Corinthians

Reconciliation with God

Verses eighteen through twenty speak of ldquoreconcili-ationrdquo claiming 1) ldquoGod was in Christ recon-ciling man to Himselfrdquo (vs 18) 2) God ldquohas com-

mitted to us the word of reconciliationrdquo (vs 19) and 3)ldquoWe implore you on Christrsquos behalf be reconciled to Godrdquo(vs 20) In brief this describes the power of the gospelits nature and plea Consider a few words and their mean-ings

ldquoReconciledrdquo ndash Katalasso(καταλλάσσω) mdash ldquoTo change ex-change to reconcile passively to bereconciledrdquo (Moulton p 217) mdashAT Robertson claims this is an ldquooldword for exchanging coinshellip Godrsquoslove (John 316) provided the meansand basis for manrsquos reconciliationto God against whom he had sinnedIt is all Godrsquos plan because of hislove but Godrsquos own sense of justicehad to be satisfied (Romans 326)and so God gave his Son as a propi-tiation for our sins (Romans 325Colossians 120 I John 22 410)hellipGod has made possible throughChrist our reconciliation to him butin each case it has to be made ef-fective by the attitude of each indi-vidualrdquo (Vol IV p 232)ldquoAmbassadorsrdquo ndash Presbeuo(πρεσβεEcircω) mdash ldquoTo be an elder to bean ambassador perform the dutiesof an ambassadorrdquo (Moulton p340) mdash Moulton and Milliganclaim the word ldquowas the regularword in the Greek East for the Emperorrsquos legatehellip (it) comes to be used ofpetition or intercessionhelliprdquo (p 534) mdash ldquoPaul has a natural pride in using thisdignified term for himself and all ministers The ambassador has to be per-sona grata (Latin for a ldquopleasing personrdquo ie on good terms) with both coun-tries (the one that he represents and the one to which he goes) Paul is ChristrsquosLegate to act in his behalf and in his steadrdquo (Vol IV p 232)

18 τὰ δcent πάντα sectκ τοEuml ΘεοEuml τοEuml

καταλλάξαντος lemicroᾶς bullαυτldquo διὰ [tm- ΙησοEuml

alefsymBc omit ]ΧριστοEuml καlsaquo δOgraveντος lemicrorsaquoν τOslashν

διακοναν τinfinς καταλλαγinfinς 19 hellipς τι ΘεUacuteς

ampν sectν Χριστldquo κOgraveσmicroον καταλλ[alefsym omits]άσσων

bullαυτldquo microOslash λογιζOgravemicroενος αEgraveτοrsaquoς τὰ

παραπτasympmicroατα αEgraveτlaquoν καlsaquo θdegmicroενος sectν lemicrorsaquoν

[p46Btm- τUacuteν λOgraveγον alefsymc- τUacute εEgraveαγγdegλιον] τinfinς

καταλλαγinfinς 20 Iacuteπcentρ ΧριστοEuml οOcircν[p46 omits]

πρεσβεEcircοmicroεν hellipς τοEuml ΘεοEuml παρακαλοEumlντος

δι᾿ lemicrolaquoν δεOgravemicroεθα Iacuteπcentρ ΧριστοEuml

καταλλάγητε τldquo Θεldquo

3the- 1Yet 2all (are)- of- God the-things from The one

having-reconciled us to- through [Jesus]Himself

Christ and has-given to-us the

service of-the reconciliation 2as 1That God=ministry

was in Christ 2(the)- 1reconcilingworld

to-Him- not accounting to-them theself

trespasses of-them even has- in usplaced-for-Himself

[the word the good-news of-=gospel] the

reconciliation On-behalf of- thereforeChrist

we-are-elders as of- God calling-beside=ambassadors The =admonishing

through us we-pray on-behalf of-Christ

be-reconciled to- GodThe

60

Chapter Five

What Christ Became For Man

Regarding God the Father in His prayer on the nightof His betrayal Jesus said ndash ldquohellipYou loved Me be-fore the foundation of the worldrdquo (John 1724)

Only a few hours latter Jesus in anguish would look upinto heaven and cry ndash ldquohellipMy God My God why have youforsaken Merdquo (Matthew 2746) From everything thatwe know of Jesus Christ never before had He faced the

prospect of separation from communion with God Yet in going to the crossthat was exactly what He was forced to experience God had forsaken Him ina very real way

In order to satisfy both the justice and the mercy of God the Father (inthe face of mankindrsquos sin) it was necessary that there be a substitutionarysacrifice on manrsquos behalf Animal sacrifice was not sufficient (Hebrews 104)If man bore the penalty for sin himself it would mean eternal separation fromGod The cost of sin was spiritual death (Romans 623) The only way for sinto be atoned for and menrsquos souls to be saved was for Jesus Christ (God in theflesh) to bear the sins Himself on behalf of man The prophecies about theMessiah which were given in the book of Isaiah pointed to Christrsquos offeringHimself for sin Chapter fifty-three declared of the Messiah ndash ldquoHe was woundedfor our transgressionrdquo (vs 5) ldquothe Lord has laid on Him the iniquity of us allrdquo(vs 6) ldquohe bore the sin of manyrdquo(vs12)

The barrier of sin served as aveil of separation that kept manfrom the holiest places of commun-ion with God This was symbolizedin the tabernacle which had an in-ner room separated from the outerroom by a veil (Hebrews 923) Ina very real way this veil representedthe sin that kept man separate fromGod Yet in His death Jesus becamethe veil ndash the symbol of sin that as His body was torn asunder so also mightbe the separation between man and God (Hebrews 1019-22)

Our text here in Second Corinthians chapter five concludes the chapterby declaring that God ndash ldquohellipmade Him who knew no sin to be sin for usrdquo (vs21) Christ became that very thing which God hates that we might have re-newed access into His presence

II Corinthians 521

be-reconciled to- God 2The- [1For]The One

not having- sin on-known behalf

of-us sin He- in- wemade order-that

[might- might-have- (the)-right-become become] eousness

of- in HimGod

καταλλάγητε τldquo Θεldquo 21 τUacuteν [alefsym2tm- γὰρ

p46alefsym1Bc omit ] microOslash γνOgraveντα ἁmicroαρταν Iacuteπcentρ

lemicrolaquoν ἁmicroαρταν εποησεν )να lemicroε[alefsym omits]rsaquoς

[t- γινasympmicroεθα alefsymBcm- γενasympmicroεθα ] δικαιοσEcircνη

ΘεοEuml sectν αEgraveτldquo

61

Second Corinthians

62

Chapter Five Review

1 Does the word translated ldquoearthlyrdquo in verse onerefer to what our bodies are made of or wherethey belong to

2 What are some things that are indicated aboutour physical bodies in referring to them as aldquotentrdquo

3 For what does Paul claim that we ldquogroanrdquo4 What is the definition of the word translated ldquomortalityrdquo Will the

wicked ever face a time when they are not ldquosubject to deathrdquo5 What are some things in which Christians must ldquowalk by faithrdquo6 Give one evidence for reasonably accepting each of the following

points of faith the existence of God the reliability of Scriptureand claims about Jesus

7 Where does Paul claim that he will be if he should be ldquoabsent fromthe bodyrdquo

8 What two false doctrines require a belief in two judgment scenesExplain

9 From the context what does this chapter teach about the questionof one or two judgment scenes

10 What is the primary meaning of the word translated ldquojudgmentseatrdquo in verse ten and what does it describe about ancient judg-ment seats

11 What had taken place before the judgment seat in Corinth12 Is there any sense in which Christians should fear God Explain13 What did Paul claim the love of Christ did to him14 What is the Calvinistic doctrine of ldquoLimited Atonementrdquo15 What does verse fourteen indicate to us regarding ldquoLimited Atone-

mentrdquo16 List three old things that ldquopass awayrdquo in Christ and three things

that ldquobecome newrdquo in Christ17 What identifies a person as being ldquoin Christrdquo18 According to Robertson what practice was the word translated

ldquoreconciledrdquo first associated with19 What is the primary meaning of the word translated ldquoambassa-

dorsrdquo20 Explain the sense in which God made Jesus ldquoto be sin for usrdquo

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R S I X S I X S I X S I X S I X

Outline

I The Urgency of the Gospel (vss 12)II The Marks of Paulrsquos Ministry (vss 3-10)III Paulrsquos Affection for the Corinthians (vss 11-13)IV ldquoBe Separate says the Lordrdquo (vss 14-18)

The Urgency of the Gospel 612

Working Together with God

In verse one Paul counts himself as a co-worker withGod As an Apostle of Jesus Christ there was a spe-cial sense in which God worked with him and through

him In a broad sense all Christians work together withGod as they seek to do Godrsquos will Consider a few waysthat we can work together with God

mdash When we share the gospel with others God is working through us (throughHis word) to change the life of another person ( I Thessalonians 213)mdash When we show kindness to oth-ers out of obedience to the teach-ings of Christ the Lord is workingthrough us to show kindness to oth-ers (Philippians 21213)mdash When we participate in the workof the local church we are workingwith God in the things which edifyour brethren (I Corinthians 1610)mdash When give upon the first day ofthe week in a sound church we are aiding in the performance of the Lordrsquoswork - thus working with God to carry out this work (II Corinthians 867)

63

II Corinthians 61

1 συνεργοEumlντες δcent καlsaquo παρακαλοEumlmicroεν[p46

- ντες] microOslash ες κε[alefsym- αι ]νUacuteν τOslashν χάριν τοEuml

ΘεοEuml δdegξασθαι Iacute[alefsym1- le]microᾶς 2 (λdegγει γάρ

2working-together 1But even 1we-admonish

[admon- 3not 9in 10empti- [new] 5the 6grace 7of-ishing] (ness)=vain the

8God 4to-receive 2you [us] 2He-says 1for

mdash When we help those who are in need out of the means with which God hasblessed us we are working with God to carry out such help (II Cor 81)

Receiving Godrsquos Grace in Vain

Many in the religious world believe Godrsquos gracewhich leads unto salvation is a supernatural forcewhich acts upon the human heart and spirit al-

lowing a person to do good that they could not do other-wise Once this force has acted upon them it is believedthat it cannot be resisted or rejected In verse one Paulurges the Corinthians not to ldquoreceive the grace of God in

vainrdquo If one cannot resist or reject the grace of God how would it be possibleto receive it ldquoin vainrdquo

ldquoWhat does the Bible teach regarding Godrsquos gracerdquo1 It is simply Godrsquos unmerited favor (Romans 126 Ephesians 17)2 It is something which teaches man (Titus 211)3 One may fall from it (Galatians 59 Hebrews 1215)4 One must continue in it (Acts 1343)5 One must grow in it (II Peter 318)

ldquoNow Is The Day of Salvationrdquo

When the Apostle Paul was brought before thewicked Roman governor Felix and he spoke withhim regarding ldquorighteousness self-control and

the judgement to comerdquo the Bible tells us that Felix wasafraid and said to Paul ndash ldquohellipGo away for now when I havea convenient time I will call for yourdquo There is no indica-tion from Scrip-ture or history

that Felix ever found this ldquoconve-nient timerdquo to act upon the messagewhich Paul had brought to himMany people in the world delayobeying the gospel for some reasonPerhaps becausehellipmdash They donrsquot see the need to actquickly (I Thessalonians 52)mdash They donrsquot feel they are yet readyto live a faithful life (I Peter 22)

II Corinthians 62

in-(a)- accept- I-heard you even in (the)-time able day

of-sal- I-have-run-to- for- Behold now (is-the-)vation the-cry=helped you time

well-acceptable behold now (is-the-) of-salvationday

Καιρldquo δεκτldquo sectπAEligκουσά σου καlsaquo sectν lemicrodegρᾳ

σωτηρας sectβοAEligθησά σοι δοEcirc νEumlν καιρUacuteς

εEgraveπρOgraveσδεκτος δοEcirc νEumlν lemicrodegρα σωτηρας)

Second Corinthians

64

mdash They are too drawn to the pleasures of this world (II Timothy 34)mdash They are not fully persuaded regarding the truth (Acts 184)

In our text Paul reminds us ldquohellipNow is the accepted time behold now isthe day of salvationrdquo (vs 2) The only time that any of us can count on havingis the present Any delay in obedience to the gospel is foolishness given thefact that the Lord could return at any time

The Marks of Paulrsquos Ministry 63-10

Avoiding Offense to Others

Paul claims in verse three that he strives to ldquogive nooffense in anythingrdquo in order that the cause of thegospel and his service to it may not be blamed

Christians must exercise great caution that we do not actin such a way that our lives can become a ldquocause of stum-blingrdquo to others This means that at times we must rejectcertain liberties we have if there is the danger that actingupon them could shame the cause of Christ (or leave the

wrong impression) Yet at the same time there is some sense in which Chris-tians have the right to resist the efforts of those who would bind upon otherswhat God does not bind Consider Paulrsquos example in this regard

I He taught abstinence from meatsthat might lead Gentile Christiansto think one was worshipping anidol (I Corinthians 1028) ndash yettaught that one could eat what wasset before them without question-ing where it came from (I Corinth-ians 1027)II Paul taught abstinence from meats that new Jewish Converts might feelwas a violation of Godrsquos law (Romans 142021) ndash yet taught that all foodswere acceptable for Christians to eat (Romans 1414 I Timothy 445)III Paul had Timothy (the son of a Gentile father) circumcised in order that hemight travel freely with him among the Jews (Acts 163) ndash Yet refused to haveTitus circumcised when Judiazing teachers tried to insist upon it (Galatians23-5)

II Corinthians 63

3 microηδεmicroαν sectν microηδενlsaquo διδOgraveντες προσκοπAEligν

να microOslash microωmicro[B omits]ηθordf le διακονα

no-one in no- giving a-cause-thing of-stumbling

in- 3not 4may-be-blamed 1the 2serviceorder-that =ministry

Chapter Six

65

ldquoTumultsrdquo (vs 5) mdash akatastasiais (ἀκαταστασαις) ndashldquoProperly instability hence to be in an unsettled statedisorder commotion tumult seditionrdquo (Moulton p 12)Used in Luke 219 ndash ldquoBut when you hear of wars andCOMMOTIONS do not be terrified for these things mustcome to pass firsthelliprdquo ldquoThis is one of the words whichshows the influence of political changes From the origi-nal meaning of unsettledness it developed through the

complications in Greece and in the East after the death of Alexander into thesense which it has in Luke ndash political instability One of the Greek translatorsof the Old Testament uses it in the sense of dread or anxious carerdquo (VincentVol III p 322)

The Armor of

Righteousness

seven to the ldquoar-mor of righ-teousness onthe right handand on the leftrdquo

In his letter to the church inEphesus in chapter five Paul spellsout in more detail the makeup of thisldquoarmorrdquo Consider what is taught

Girded around the waist ndashTRUTH (vs14)

Breastplate ndash RIGHTEOUSNESS(vs 14)

On the feet ndash THE GOSPEL OFPEACE (vs 15)

Shield ndash FAITH (vs 16)Helmet ndash SALVATION (vs 17)Sword ndash THE WORD OF GOD (vs

17)Paul declares in our text that

he had surrounded himself with thisarmor on all sides Modern Chris-

II Corinthians 64-7

να microOslash microωmicro[B omits]ηθordf le διακονα 4 ἀλλ᾿

sectν παντlsaquo [alefsym2tm - συνιστlaquoντες p46alefsym1c -

συνιστάντες B - συνιστανOgraveντες] bullαυτοAacuteς hellipς

ΘεοEuml διάκονοι sectν Iacuteποmicroονordf πολλordf sectν θλ[B

adds ε]ψεσιν sectν ἀνάγκαις sectν στενοχωραις

5 sectν πληγαrsaquoς sectν φυλακαrsaquoς sectν

ἀκαταστασαις sectν κOgraveποις sectν ἀγρυπναις sectν

νηστεαις 6 ἁγνOgraveτητι sectν γνasympσει sectν

microακροθυmicroᾳ sectν χρηστOgraveτητι sectν ΠνεEcircmicroατι

῾Αγƒ sectν ἁγάπ˙ ἀνυποκρτƒ 7 sectν λOgraveγƒ

ἀληθε[alefsym omits]ας sectν δυνάmicroε[alefsym omits]ι ΘεοEuml

διὰ τlaquoν πλων τinfinς δικαιοσEcircνης τlaquoν δεξιlaquoν

καlsaquo ἀριστερlaquoν

in- 3not 4may-be-blamed 1the 2service butorder-that =ministry

in all- [commending]things

ourselves as

2of- 1servents in 2patience 1much inGod =ministers

pressures in necessities in narrowness=afflictions =straits

in stripes in imprisonments in

instabilities in troubles in watchings in

fastings in-purity in knowledge in

long-suffering in kindness in (the)Spirit

Holy in love sincere in (the)word

of-truth in (the)power of God

thro- the weapons of- righteousness of- rightugh the the

and of-(the)left

Second Corinthians

66

67

tians should do the same To leave even one part of our spiritual lives un-guarded by the ldquoarmor of righteousnessrdquo is to leave ourselves open to theassaults of the enemy

Optimism in the Face of Adversity

In chapter four verse eight andnine Paul expressed an amaz-ing sense of optimism in the face

of the many hardships he faced Asin that passage in verses eightthrough ten of chapter six Paul ex-presses a similar view of life inChrist which serves as a great ex-ample to us Notice his attitude

He faced HONOR mdash and DIS-HONOR (vs 8)

He was subject to EVIL RE-PORT mdash and GOOD RE-PORT (vs 8)

He was thought of as a DE-CEIVER mdash yet he wasTRUE (vs 8)

He was UNKNOWN mdash and yetWELL KNOWN (vs 9)

He felt as if he was DYING mdashand yet WE LIVE (vs 9)

He was CHASTENED mdash yet NOT KILLED (vs 9)He felt SORROWFUL mdash yet was ALWAYS REJOICING (vs 10)He was POOR mdash yet he was MAKING MANY RICH (vs 10)He had NOTHING mdash and yet he possessed ALL THINGS (vs 10)

Faith in the Lord enabled Paul to look beyond the pressures of his presentsituation and see the glory that awaited him If we will do this in our own livesit can transform our attitude when we face hardships and adversities

καlsaquo ἀριστερlaquoν 8 διὰ δOgraveξης καlsaquo ἀτ[B adds

ε]ιmicroας διὰ δυσφηmicroας καlsaquo εEgraveφηmicroας hellipς

πλάνοι καlsaquo ἀληθεrsaquoς 9 hellipς ἀγνοοEcircmicroενοι καlsaquo

sectπιγ[B adds ε] ινωσκOgravemicroενοι hellipς

ἀποθνAEligσκοντες καlsaquo δοEcirc ζlaquomicroεν hellipς

παιδευOgravemicroενοι καlsaquo microOslash θανατοEcircmicroενοι 10 hellipς

λυποEcircmicroενοι ἀει δcent χαροντες hellipς πτωχο

πολλοAacuteς δcent πλουτζοντες hellipς microηδcentν paraχοντες

καlsaquo πάντα κατdegχοντες

and of-(the) through glory and dishonorleft

through bad-words and good-words as=reproach =commendation

deceivers and- true as one-being- and-(yet) unknown (yet)

one-being-well-known as

one-dying and- behold we-live as(yet)

one-being- and- not one-being- aschastised (yet) put-to-death

as-one- 2always1yet joyous as beggarsbeing-greived

3many 1but 2enriching as 2nothing 1having

and- 2all- 1possessing(yet) things

Chapter Six

Paulrsquos Affection for the Corinthians 611-13

Restricting Affections

Within the human heart there is (figuratively) spacewhich we set aside for those people and thingswe care about This point was brought home

clearly to a certain man some years ago Before the birthof his second child this father was concerned because hedidnrsquot think hecould ever loveanother child

as much as he had his first childYet when his second child was bornrather than finding ldquono roomrdquo for thesecond child in his heart he foundinstead that his heart had ldquoen-largedrdquo so that the same love he feltfor his first child he felt equally forhis second child

Paul like the father men-tioned above assures the Corinth-ians that his heart was ldquowide openrdquo(vs 11) Perhaps the strong natureof the rebuke he had offered in hisfirst epistle had led some to feel that his love for them was limited (or re-stricted) Or perhaps the divisions which had led the Corinthians to esteemone teacher over another had affected their attitude towards Paul In versetwelve Paul declares ndash ldquohellipyou are restricted by your own affectionsrdquo To rem-edy this he urges them ldquoNow in return for the samehelliprdquo (that is his open affec-tion towards them) ldquoyou also be openrdquo (vs 13) In Christ (just as in the family)our hearts should be enlarged to have room enough to care for and love all ourbrethren

ldquoI Speak to You as to Childrenrdquo

The relationship of fellow Christians to one another is that of broth-ers and sisters Jesus taught that Christians are not to refer to reli-gious leaders as ldquoFatherrdquo ldquoRabbirdquo or ldquoMasterrdquo for (among other things)

ldquoyou are all brethrenrdquo (Matthew 238-11) Yet at the same time there is aspecial relationship which exists between brethren regarding those youngerin faith with respect to those more mature in the faith or even towards those

11 ΤUacute στOgravemicroα lemicrolaquoν ἀνdegƒγε πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς

Κορνθιοι le καρδα lemicrolaquoν πεπλάτυνται 12

οEgrave στενοχωρεrsaquoσθε sectν lemicrorsaquoν στενοχωρε[alefsym

omits]rsaquoσθε[alefsym- αι] δcent sectν τοrsaquoς σπλάγχνοις Iacutemicrolaquoν

13 τOslashν δcent αEgraveτOslashν ἀντιmicroισθαν (hellipς τdegκνοις

λdegγω) πλατEcircνθητε καlsaquo Iacutemicroε[alefsym omits]rsaquoς

The mouth of-us (is)-open towards you

O-Corinth- the heart of-us is-being-ians broadened

Not you-all-are- in us you-all-are-being-constrained being-constrained

[to-be- but in the bowels of-youconstrained] =bowels-of-compassion

2the1But same recompense 2as 3to-child-ren

1I-speak 3be-enlarged 2also 1you

Second Corinthians

68

Chapter Six

II Corinthians 614

who brought us to faith Paul taught in First Timothy 512 that as Christianswe must view each other as all part of Godrsquos family (Ephesians 315)

ldquoBe Separate Says the Lordrdquo 614-18

ldquoDo Not Be Unequally Yoked Togetherrdquo

The word translated ldquounequally yoked togetherrdquo isthe word heteroedzugountes (sectτεροζυγοEumlντες)meaning ndash ldquoto come under an unequal or different

yokehelliprdquo (Thayer p 254) The noun form of this word wasused to refer to two different types of animals being ldquoyokedtogetherrdquo to perform work As it is used here Paul seemsto be referring to relationships which we choose to in-volve ourselves in which may prove to be destructive to

our spiritual life Consider a number of such relationshipsmdash Choosing to marry a non-Christian (Note Scripture clearly commandsthat when a Christian finds themselves married to a non-believer that mar-riage must be upheld but nowheredo we see such encouraged - I Cor-inthians 71213 I Peter 312)mdash Business partnerships with non-Christians (While it is clearly law-ful for Christians to engage in busi-ness with the world a partnershipwith one who does not share thevalues ethics and morals of a Chris-tian may put the believer in difficultsituations)mdash Close friendships with non-Christians (Christians in one sense should befriends with all men Yet at the same time if we choose to bind ourself in aclose friendship with a non-Christian we will very soon find ourselves beingpulled away from the Lord and towards the values of our friend)

14 ΜOslash γ[B adds ε] νεσθε sectτεροζυγοEumlντες

ἁπστοις τς γάρ microετοχOslash δικαιοσEcircν˙ καlsaquo

ἀνοmicroᾳ τς δcent κοινωνα φωτlsaquo πρUacuteς σκOgraveτος

Not you-all-must- unequally-yokedbecome

to-un- 2what 1For share (has)-right- andbelievers -eousness

law- 2what 1And fellowship (has)- to darknesslessness light

69

15 τς δcent συmicroφasympνησις Χριστldquo πρUacuteς Βελα[t -

λ alefsym Bcm - ρ] ŭ τς microερlsaquoς πιστldquo[B - ου] microετὰ

ἀπστου 16 τς δcent συγκατάθεσ[alefsym adds ε]ις

ναldquo ΘεοEuml microετὰ εδasympλων [p46alefsym2tm - Iacutemicroεrsaquoς

alefsym1 Bc - lemicroεrsaquoς] γὰρ ναUacuteς[alefsym1- ι] ΘεοEuml [p46alefsym2tm

- sectστε alefsym1 Bc - sectσmicroεν] ζlaquoντος καθς εpermilπεν ı

ΘεOgraveς ˜τι ᾿ΕνοικAEligσω sectν αEgraveτοrsaquoς καlsaquo sectmicro[B1 -

ν]περιπατAEligσω καlsaquo paraσοmicroαι αEgraveτlaquoν ΘεOgraveς καlsaquo

αEgraveτοlsaquo paraσοντα microοι λαOgraveς 17 διUacute Εξdegλθετε[alefsym-

αι] sectκ microdegσου αEgraveτlaquoν καlsaquo ἀφορσθητε λdegγει

ΚEcircριος καlsaquo ἀκαθάρτου microOslash ἅπτεσθε κἀγ

εσδdegξοmicroαι Iacutemicroᾶς 18 καlsaquo paraσοmicroαι Iacutemicrorsaquoν ες

πατdegρα καlsaquo Iacutemicroεrsaquoς paraσεσθdeg microοι ες υ2οAacuteς καlsaquo

θυγατdegρας λdegγει ΚEcircριος παντοκράτωρ

what 1But symphony (has)- to [Belial=accord Christ

Beliar] Or what part (has-a)- withbeliever

(an)-un- 2what1And sitting-down-togetherbeliever =alliance

(the)- of- with idols [2you temple God

we] 1For 4(the)- 6Godtemple[s]

[3are] 5of-(the)- just-as said Theliving

God that I-will-dwell in them and

walk-among- and I-will- 2of-them 1God(them) be

they will-be My people Therefore come-out

out of-(the)- of-them and you-all-must- saysmidst be-separate

(the)- and (the)-un- not you-all- and-ILord clean-thing must-touch

(will)- you and I-will- 2you 1untoreceive be

(a)-Father and you will-be 2Me 1unto sons and

daughters says (the)-Lord Almighty

Second Corinthians

70

The Christianrsquos

Relationship to the World

Through-out his-tory there

have been thosewho have heldsome type ofbelief in Christand have advo-

cated complete separation fromthose who did not accept their faithThe text here in Paulrsquos second let-ter to the Corinthians quotes thecommand given to the ancient Isra-elites in Isaiah 5211 Ezekiel203441 and applies it to Chris-tians The text reads ndash ldquoCome outfrom among them and be separatesays the Lord Do not touch whatis unclean and I will receive yourdquo

+ ldquoDoes the Bible teach

Christians to remove them-

selves from the world alto-

gether in order to lsquobe sepa-

ratersquordquo mdash Christians are com-manded to teach all the world (Mark1615)mdash Christians cannot go out of theworld (I Corinthians 5910)mdash Christians must separate from erring brethren (I Corinthians 511)mdash Christians must not be unequally yoked together with non-Christians (IICorinthians 614)

Paul uses several words in this text to express therelationships that cannot exist between theLordrsquos church and the world Consider two of them

ldquoAccordrdquo (vs 15) mdash sumphonesis (συmicroφasympνησις) ndash ldquoUni-son accord agreement concordrdquo (Moulton p 384) Thisword is related to the word sumphonia meaning ldquomusicrdquofrom which we get our word ldquosymphonyrdquo It is used ndash

ldquoPrimarily of the concord of soundsrdquo (Vincent Vol III p 325)ldquoAgreementrdquo (vs 16) mdash sugkatathesis (συγκατάθεσις) ndash ldquoTo set down to-gether with middle to assent accordrdquo Moulton p 379) ldquoTo deposit togetherwith another middle properly to deposit onersquos vote in the urn with anotherhence to consent to agree with vote forrdquo (Thayer p 592)

Belial

T he name Belial used in verse fifteen is a name whichduring the period between the Old and New Testa-ments came to refer to Satan This word is a transliteration of a Hebrew

word meaning ndash ldquoWithout profit worthlessness by extension destruction wick-ednessrdquo (Strongrsquos no 1100) The reference here in Paulrsquos letter to the Corin-thians is the only time it is used in the New Testament Some manuscriptshave Beliar meaning ndash ldquolord of the forestsrdquo (Thayer p 100) Some believe thatPaul through the direction of the Holy Spirit uses this particular name inreference to Satan because of the pagan worship of Aphrodite which was soprominent in Corinth Paul reminds the Corinthians that there is no way toserve Christ and wicked idolatry

71

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

72

Chapter Six Review

1 In I Corinthians 1610 who does Paul claim wasdoing ldquothe work of the Lordrdquo What was he do-ing

2 How can one receive the ldquograce of God in vainrdquo3 List two passages which show that one can ldquofall

from gracerdquo4 When does Paul claim is the ldquoacceptable timerdquo

and the ldquoday of salvationrdquo5 Why does Paul claim that he sought to avoid offense to others6 What does Paul claim surrounded him on the ldquorightrdquo and on the

left What Scripture gives a detailed explanation of this7 What is meant by the phrase in verse thirteen ldquoyou also be openrdquo8 How did Paul speak to the Corinthians9 How was the phrase ldquounequally yoked togetherrdquo used10 What word in English do we get from the root of the word in Greek

which is translated ldquoaccordrdquo in verse 1511 How was the word Belial used in the Old Testament What prac-

tice in Corinth may explain its use in our text

Outline

I Perfecting Holiness (vs 1)II ldquoYou Are in Our Heartsrdquo (vss 2-4)III Sorrow Unto Repentance (vss 5-12)IV Titusrsquo Report to Paul (vss 13-16)

Perfecting Holiness 71

ldquoTherefore Having These Promisesrdquo

The first verse of this chapter could very well have been included in theprevious chapter It continues a thought begun in verse fourteen ofchapter five where Paul admonishes the brethren ndash ldquoDo not be unequally

yoked together with unbelievershelliprdquo After expanding upon this admonitionPaul instructs them to be about the business of ldquoperfecting holinessrdquo (71)The reason they should do this isalso stated the fact that we haveldquothese promisesrdquo (71)

+ ldquoTo what promises does

Paul referrdquo ndash Most Likely Paulis referring directly back to thepromises found in chapter six versessixteen through eighteen Noticewhat is declared

Verse Sixteen

ldquoI will dwell with themrdquo - One ofthe grandest promises of the gospel is the hope that children of God may oneday dwell with the One who dwells in heaven (Psalm 1135 Isaiah 335 Rev-elation 713-17 212-4)

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R S E V E N S E V E N S E V E N S E V E N S E V E N

II Corinthians 71

1 ταEcircτας οOcircν paraχοντες τὰς sectπαγγελας

ἀγαπητο καθαρσωmicroεν bullαυτοAacuteς ἀπUacute

παντUacuteς microολυσmicroοEuml σαρκUacuteς καlsaquo πνεEcircmicroατος

sectπιτελοEumlντες ἁγιωσEcircνην sectν φOgraveβƒ [ p46 -

ἀγάπ˙] ΘεοEuml

3these 1There- 2having mdash promisesfore

beloved- we-should- ourselves fromones cleanse

all pollution-of flesh and spirit

bringing-to-com- holiness in (the)-pletion=perfecting fear

[(the)- of-Godlove]

73

Second Corinthians

ldquoAnd walk among themrdquo - When man was in the garden we are told that Godldquowalkedrdquo in the garden (Genesis 38) In Scripture those who maintained closefellowship with God were said to ldquowalkrdquo with Him (Genesis 524 Micah 68)The Israelites were to avoid uncleanness for it was said that God walked amongthem (Deuteronomy 2312-14) In Christ we have the assurance that God isalways in our presence When we do the Lordrsquos will we are walking with HimOne day just as Adam and Eve beheld the Lordrsquos presence as He walked amongthem so shall the faithfulldquoI will be their Godrdquo - The lost give themselves to another god (II Corinthians434) They worship and serve those things that are really no god at all (ICorinthians 84-6 Philippians 31819 Romans 122-25) As a result GodAlmighty denies them and His deity over them Yet to those who will surren-der to Him in obedience He identifies Himself as ldquotheir Godrdquo (Exodus 36Jeremiah 111-3)ldquoAnd they shall be My peoplerdquo - The Bible tells us that God is seeking people(John 42324) He is seeking people ldquofor His namerdquo (Acts 1514) These are tobe His own special possession (Titus 214 I Peter 29) God promises that ifwe would but seek Him we can be His people

Verses Seventeen and Eighteen

ldquoI will receive yourdquo - Those who live in sin and corruption yet pretend tooffer worship to the Lord are rejected (Malachi 16-10) In the end all who failto render obedience to the gospel will be rejected (Matthew 2546) Yet forthose who are willing to submit themselves in obedience to the gospel of JesusChrist there rests the promise that God will receive their worship and receivethem into everlasting habitations (Hebrews 131516 John 1423)ldquoI will be a Father to you and you shall be My sons and daughtersrdquo - Godis the father of all mankind (Hebrews 129 Acts 1726-29) Yet when wechoose to sin we alienate ourselves from this relationship to God and giveourselves over to another (John 844) In such a state we are children ofdisobedience (Ephesians 21-3) Yet in Christ there are the amazing promisesthat in spite of our rebellion and disobedience we can be reconciled back toGod and be ldquoadoptedrdquo as sons and daughters of God (Romans 814-17 Gala-tians 32627 I John 312)

Cleansing Ourselves

The religious world has the dangerous tendency ofjumping to extremes in their thinking concerningour duty and relationship to God Either they will

claim that there is nothing that man must do in order to

74

be saved or they will create man-made systems of merit that bear little (if any)resemblance to the Lordrsquos true expectations of man In our text Paul declaresldquoLet us cleanse ourselves from all filthiness of the flesh and spiritrdquo (vs 1)This makes it abundantly evident that while

1 Man cannot earn the promises of Godhellip2 He does bear the responsibility to ldquocleanse himselfrdquo should he hope

to receive them

+ ldquoWhat is involved in one lsquocleansingrsquo themselvesrdquo mdashmdash Obedience to the truth (I Peter 122)mdash Purifying the heart (James 48)mdash Confession of sins to the Lord (I John 19)mdash Rejecting profane and vain teachings (II Timothy 21621)mdash Abiding in the word (Ephesians 52526)

Christian Perfection

In the great sermon recorded in Matthew chapters fivethrough seven Jesus taught - ldquoTherefore you shall beperfect just as your Father in heaven is perfectrdquo (Mat-

thew 548) In our text Paul urges the Corinthians to beldquoperfecting holiness in the fear of Godrdquo Most of us realizethat it would be impossible for us to live up to the flawlesscharacter of God the Father Because our lives have al-ready been tarnished by sin if this was what Jesus were

commanding such ldquoperfectionrdquo would not be attainable No child of God willever grow to the point they no longer commit sin (I John 21)

+ ldquoIn what sense can a child of God attain lsquoperfectionrsquordquo mdashThe word translated ldquoperfectingrdquo in this text is the word epitelountes ( sectπιτελοEumlντες)meaning ndash ldquoTo bring to an end to finish complete perfect to perform to carryinto practice to realize to discharge to execute to carry out to completionhelliprdquo(Moulton p 162) The idea here appears to be completion perhaps evenmaturity The child of God should grow in their service to God In their lifethey should cultivate holiness unto the mature complete quality which Goddesires

Consider some things which the Bible teaches regarding perfectionbull At the end of this epistle what does Paul command the Corinthians to be(II Corinthians 1311)bull What can Scriptures inspired by God allow one to become (II Timothy31617)

Chapter Seven

75

bull Beyond the first principles of Christ what should Christians go on towards(Hebrews 61)bull What did the Hebrew writer pray that God would do for the Hebrews regard-ing ldquoevery good workrdquo (Hebrews 132021)bull What does James tell us can result from patience (James 14)bull What is said of the one who keeps Godrsquos word (I John 25)bull What did God find regarding the works of the saints in Sardis (Revelation32)

ldquoYou Are In Our Heartsrdquo 72-4

Dying Together and Living Together

Paul states in verse three ndash ldquoYou are in our hearts todie together and to live togetherrdquo Such wordsconfirmed to the brethren in Corinth his deep love

for them Jesus taught in both word and example thatoffering onersquoslife for others isthe greatestdisplay of love

In John 1513 Jesus taught ndashldquoGreater love has no one than thisthan to lay down onersquos life for hisfriendsrdquo The Apostle John taughtthrough the direction of the HolySpirit ndash ldquoBy this we know love be-cause He laid down His life for usAnd we also ought to lay down ourlives for the brethrenrdquo (I John 316)

+ ldquoIn what ways must Chris-

tians be willing to lay down

their lives for one anotherrdquomdash In the first century in times ofneed Christians were willing to sellall that they had in order to providefor their brethren (Acts 2444543435)mdash Barnabas risked his own repu-tation for Paul by commending him

II Corinthians 72-4

2 ΧωρAEligσατε lemicroᾶς οEgraveδdegνα plusmnδικAEligσαmicroεν

οEgraveδdegνα sectφθε[alefsym omits] ραmicroεν οEgraveδdegνα

sectπλεονεκτAEligσαmicroεν 3 [tm- οEgrave πρUacuteς κατάκρισιν

alefsymBc - πρUacuteς κατάκρισιν οEgrave] λdegγω

προερηκα γάρ ˜τι [alefsym1 added - sectστcent] sectν ταrsaquoς

καρδαις le[alefsym1 - Iacute]microlaquoν sectστcent[B omits] ες τUacute

συναποθανε[alefsym omits]rsaquoν καlsaquo συζordfν 4 πολλAElig

microοι παρρησα πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς πολλAElig microοι

καEcircχησις Iacuteπcentρ Iacutemicrolaquoν πεπλAEligρωmicroαι τordf

παρακλAEligσει IacuteπερπερισσεEcircοmicroαι [B adds - sectν] τordf

χαρᾷ sectπlsaquo πάσ˙ τordf θλψει lemicrolaquoν

Second Corinthians

Make-room for-us no-one we-have-wronged

no-one we-have-corrupted no-one

we-have- Not to- condem-taken-advantage-of wards nation

to- condem- not] I-speakwards nation

I-tell-(you)- mdash that [you-all-are] in thebeforehand

hearts of-us [of-you- you-all-are unto theall]

dying-together-with and (the)- Muchliving-with

to-me boldness towards you- much to-me=(is)-my all =(is)-my

boasting on-be- of-you- I-am-filled- with-half all the

consolation I-over-flow [in] with-the

joy over all the pressure of-us

76

5 Καlsaquo γὰρ sectλθOgraveντων lemicrolaquoν ες Μακε[alefsym-

αι]δοναν οEgraveδεmicroαν paraσχηκ[p46 B omit]εν ἄνεσιν

le σὰρξ lemicrolaquoν ἀλλ᾿ sectν παντlsaquo θλ[B adds

ε]ιβOgravemicroενοι paraξωθεν microάχαι paraσωθεν φOgraveβοι[

p46 - ς] 6 ἀλλ᾿ ı παρακαλlaquoν τοAacuteς ταπε[alefsym

omits]ινοAacuteς παρκάλεσεν lemicroᾶς ı ΘεOgraveς sectν τordf

παρουσᾳ Ττου 7 οEgrave microOgraveνον δcent sectν τordf

παρουσᾳ αEgraveτοEuml ἀλλὰ καlsaquo sectν τordf παρακλAEligσει

radic παρεκλAEligθη sectφ᾿ Iacutemicrorsaquoν ἀναγγdegλλων le[alefsym1 -

Iacute]microrsaquoν τOslashν Iacutemicrolaquoν sectπιπOgraveθησιν τUacuteν Iacutemicrolaquoν

UgraveδυρmicroOgraveν τUacuteν Iacutemicrolaquoν ζinfinλον Iacuteπcentρ sectmicroοEuml Agraveστε

microε microᾶλλον χαρinfinναι 8 ˜τι ε καlsaquo sectλEcircπησα

Iacutemicroᾶς sectν τordf sectπιστολordf οEgrave microεταmicrodegλοmicroαι ε [B

adds - δcent] καlsaquo microετεmicroελOgravemicroην βλdegπω[ p46 - ν]

γὰρ[ p46B omit] τι le sectπιστολOslash sectκε[alefsym omits]νη

ε καlsaquo πρUacuteς Agrave[alefsym omits]ραν sectλEcircπησεν Iacutemicroᾶς 9

2indeed 1For (at-the)-coming of-us intoMacedonia

not-any has-had [had] rest

the flesh of-us but in all-things

being-pressed outwardly fight- inwardly fears=being-distressed ings

[fear] But the- consoling theOne

humble comforted us the God in the

presentation of-Titus 2not 3only 1Yet in the=coming

presentation of- but even in the consolation=coming him

with- he-was- over you- announcing to-uswhich consoled all

[to- the 2of-you- 1earnest- the 2of-you-you-all] all longing all

1bitter-lamen- the 2of-you-1zeal on- of-me so-astation = mourning all behalf

me more to-rejoice Because 2if 1even I-grieved=So I rejoiced more

you- in the epistle not I-regret ifall

[but] even I-was- 3I-seeregretting-(it)

1For 2because the epistle that

if even for (an)-hour it-grieved you-all

Chapter Seven

to the Apostles (Acts 92627)mdash To take the truth to others Paul risked his own life (Acts 1419)mdash To help Paul Priscilla and Aquila risked their own lives (Romans 1634)

Sorrow Unto Repentance 75-12

Godly Sorrow

M o s ttrans-lations

use the phraseldquogodly sorrowrdquo inverse ten de-scribing the re-sponse which

the Corinthians had to Paulrsquos re-buke and their sorrow that suchrebuke had been necessary Thephrase in the original languagewhich is translated ldquogodlyrdquo is actu-ally two words kata theon (κατὰ ΘεUacuteν)meaning literally ldquoaccording to Godrdquo(or ldquowith reference to Godrdquo) Sev-eral translations bring out this idea

The New American Standard(1960) mdash Has ldquoThe sorrow that isaccording to the will of Godrdquo Thetranslators have inserted the phraseldquothe will ofrdquo in italics indicating thatit was not in the original but that ithelps to convey the meaningRheims-Douay (1582) mdash The ver-sion used by much of the Englishspeaking Catholic world until recentyears has ldquoThe sorrow that is ac-cording to Godrdquo Although this ver-sion was actually made from a Latintranslation it does bring out the lit-eral meaning

II Corinthians 75-8

77

now I-rejopice not be- you-all-have- but be-cause been-grieved cause

you-all-have- unto repentancebeen-grieved

2you-all-have- 1for accord- God inin nothingbeen-grieved ing-to order-that

you-all-may- from us 2the 1For 4accord- 5Godsuffer-loss ing-to

3grief repentance unto salvation not-to-be-regretted

[works]

2the1but 4of-the 5world 3grief death

works 2behold 1For (the)- thingsame

Second Corinthians

R C H Lenski (1937) mdash The respected New Testament commentator in hiscommentary on II Corinthians offers his own translation - ldquoThe grief accordingto Godrsquos wayrdquo This is very similar to the New American Standard renderingThe Concordant Literal Translation (1926) mdash Has ldquoSorrow according toGodrdquo This version was the product of an innovative attempt to harmonizedifferences in early manuscripts and at the same time produce an Englishtranslation which was highly literal Boldface type indicated words (or partsof words) which had a word for word correspondence from Greek to EnglishNormal type indicated words (or parts of words) which were not in the originalbut aided in understanding themeaning

+ ldquoHow can it be said that

there is such a thing as sor-

row which is lsquoaccording torsquo

Godrdquo mdash God has made man tobe a creature of conscience Whenan individual is trained to under-stand what God defines as right andwrong the human conscience worksto monitor a personrsquos obedience tothis knowledge (Hebrews 514)When man does right their con-science bears witness within themthat they have done right (II Corin-thians 112 Romans 91) Whenman does wrong the conscience re-minds them of their error and thisknowledge produces sorrow (John89) Unless a person chooses toharden their conscience by repeated failure to heed their conscience this pro-cess will work to bring man unto repentance (Titus 115) This is Godrsquos way ofusing sorrow to bring about a positive result This is the ldquosorrow according toGodrdquo

The Sorrow of the World

In verse ten Paul not only refers to ldquogodly sorrowrdquo whichleads to repentance but also something which hecalls ldquothe sorrow of the worldrdquo Unlike godly sorrow

which produces a positive result Paul claims this sorrowldquoproduces deathrdquo

9 νEumlν χαlsaquoρω οEgraveχ ˜τι sectλυπAEligθητε ἀλλ᾿ ˜τι

sectλυπAEligθητε [alefsym1 omits] ες microετάνοιαν

sectλυπAEligθητε γὰρ κατὰ ΘεOgraveν =να sectν microηδενlsaquo

ζηmicroιωθinfinτε sectξ lemicrolaquoν 10 le γὰρ κατὰ ΘεUacuteν

λEcircπη microετάνοιαν ες σωτηραν ἀmicroεταmicrodegλητον

[alefsym2tcm- κατεργάζεται alefsym1B - sectργάζεται]

le δcent τοEuml κOgraveσmicroου λEcircπη θάνατον

κατεργάζεται 11 δοAacute γάρ αEgraveτUacute τοEumlτο

78

Chapter Seven

79

+ ldquoWhat is meant by the phrase lsquothe sorrow of the worldrsquordquomdash Sometimes people in the world feel guilt and remorse over things which areof no consequence to God For example Animal rights advocates mourn thedeath of animals or feel guilty for having eaten meat in the past [Note WhileGod rebukes mistreatment of natural resources (Deuteronomy 254 Proverbs1210) plants and animals are given to man for their sustenance (Genesis 93I Timothy 44)]mdash Those in the world who know the truth may choose to dismiss their guilt byavoiding reminders of truth hiding from the truth or taking steps to forgetthe truthmdash When the Lord returns or man dies all opportunity to repent is lost Thoseof the world will at that time experience sorrow whether or not their ever feltremorse for their sins prior to that point or not

+ ldquoWhat are some situations in which it could be said that

worldly sorrow lsquoproduces deathrsquordquo mdash One who is a Christian rejectsthe faith The knowledge of the truth continues to plague them and causethem to feel guilt They may over time be able to quiet the cries of their con-science but it remains with them until death In such a case their sorrow doesnot aid them towards making their life better but rather it plagues them untildeathmdash A person hears the message of the gospel and recognizes themselves as asinner for whom Christ died Yet they never muster the courage to obey thegospel out of fear of failure The knowledge that they are a sinner stays withthem (causing grief and sorrow) but they have no way to deal with that sorrowthrough the forgiveness of God Thus what could produce repentance untolife in them produces sorrow unto deathmdash Two Christians desire to do what Scripture condemns (eg enter into anunscriptural marriage engage in unauthorized church activities frequentdrinking establishments etc) Rather than remaining with brethren whoadmonish them towards sound service to the Lord they seek out a churchwhich accepts what they wish to do Perhaps in doing so they actually suc-ceed in silencing the voice of their conscience (which led them to feel guiltwhen with sound brethren) Yet the result is that (whether others approve oftheir behavior or not) they have violated Godrsquos will They have dealt with theirguilt but in the wrong way

τUacute κατὰ ΘεUacuteν λυπηθinfinναι [alefsym2tm- Iacutemicroᾶς

alefsym1Bc omit] πOgraveσην κατε[B - η] ι[B1

omit]ργάσατο [alefsym2 adds - sectν] Iacutemicrorsaquoν σπουδAEligν

ἀλλὰ ἀπολογαν ἀλλὰ ἀγ[alefsym1

omits]ανάκτησιν ἀλλὰ φOgraveβον ἀλλὰ

sectπιπOgraveθησιν[p46alefsym1- ιαν] ἀλλὰ ζinfinλον [t- ἀλλ᾿

alefsymBcm - ἀλλὰ] sectκδκησιν sectν παντlsaquo

συνεστAEligσατε bullαυτοAacuteς ἁγνοAacuteς εpermilναι sectν τldquo

πράγmicroατι 12 ἄρα ε καlsaquo paraγραψα Iacutemicrorsaquoν

mdash accord- God to-have-been- [you-all]ing grieved

how-great it-has- [it-has-render-worked ed-useless]

[in] you- hasteall =earnestness

but-(what) defense but-(what) indignation

[recovery] but-(what) fear but-(what)

earnest-longing but- zeal but-=strong-affection (what) (what)

vindication In all-things

you-all-have- yourselves 2pure 1to-be in thecommended

deed There- 2if 1even I-wrote to-you-fore all

The Results of the Corinthianrsquos Sorrow

The eleventh verse of this chapter lists the many dif-ferent responses which godly sorrow had producedin the Corinthians Consider each of those listed

and their meaning

ldquoDiligencerdquo mdash spouden (σπουδAEligν) ndash ldquo1 Haste with haste2 earnestness diligence universally earnestness in

accomplishing promoting or striving after anythingrdquo(Thayer p 585) mdash Paul uses the same word in 713 - ldquocare for you in thesight of Godrdquo 87 - ldquoBut as you abound in everythinghellipin all diligencerdquo and88 - ldquoI am testing the sincerity ofyour love by the diligence of oth-ersrdquo mdash The Corinthians had dem-onstrated carelessness prior to thisNow they acted with earnest dili-genceldquoClearingrdquo mdash apologian (ἀπολογαν)ndash ldquohellipSelf-defense from complicitywith the incestuous person by theirneglect and refusal to humble them-selvesrdquo (Vincent Vol III 329) mdashOur word ldquoapologyrdquo comes from thisword The dictionary defines it as -ldquoA formal defense in speech or writ-ing as of cause or doctrine andexcuse or explanation or an expres-sion of regret offered for somefaulthelliprdquo (New Century DictionaryVol I p 60)ldquoIndignationrdquo mdash aganaktesin(ἀγανάκτησιν) ndash ldquoTo be indignant orunder a great burden which resultsin indignationrdquo (Zodiates p 64) mdashThe fact that the sin they had ig-nored had defiled their fellowshipled them to indignation (Note The Sinai manuscript had anaktesin (ἀνάκτησιν)meaning ndash ldquoa regaining gaining 2 recovery of strengthrdquo (Liddell amp Scott p107 1869)ldquoFearrdquo mdash phobon (φOgraveβον) ndash ldquoOf the wrath of God [(according to) Sclater andCalvin] fear of Paul [(according to) Grotius]rdquo (Jamieson Fausset amp Brown p

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 711

80

Chapter Seven

312) mdash They had been ldquopuffed uprdquo (I Corinthians 52) now they demon-strated ldquofear and tremblingrdquo (715)ldquoVehement Desirerdquo mdash epipothesin (sectπιπOgraveθησιν) ndash ldquoLongingrdquo (BAG p 298) ndashldquoEarnest desire strong affectionrdquo (Moulton p 159) mdash ldquoThey dreaded hischastisements yet longed for his coming whether to receive the merited cor-rection or a restoration to favor through contritionrdquo (Lipsomb amp Shepherd p104)ldquoZealrdquo mdash zelon (ζinfinλον) ndash ldquoExcitement of mind ardor fervor of spirit 1 zealardor in embracing pursuing defending anythinghellip 2 an envious and conten-tious rivalry jealousyrdquo (Thayer p 271) ndash ldquoOn Godrsquos behalf to punish theoffenderrdquo (Alford Vol II p 677)ldquoVindicationrdquo mdash ekdikesin (sectκδκησιν) ndash ldquoSatisfaction vengeance punish-ment retributive justicerdquo (Moulton p 123) ndash ldquohellipAlways used of Godrsquos aveng-ing of sin not of manrsquos retaliationrdquo (Nicoll Vol III p 82)

The Biblical scholar Johannes Bengel (1687-1752) categorized the lastsix results of ldquogodly sorrowrdquo as follows

Towards God mdash

ldquoClearingrdquo mdash apologian (ἀπολογαν)ldquoIndignationrdquo mdash aganaktesin (ἀγανάκτησιν)

Towards Paul mdash

ldquoFearrdquo mdash phobon (φOgraveβον)ldquoVehement Desirerdquo mdash epipothesin (sectπιπOgraveθησιν)

Towards the Offender mdash

ldquoZealrdquo mdash zelon (ζinfinλον)ldquoVindicationrdquo mdash ekdikesin (sectκδκησιν)

(From Alford Vol II p 677)

The Demonstration of Care

Paul identifies in verse twelve the reason for offeringhis rebuke to them in the previous epistle Oddlyenough it was not offered for the sake of eitherhellip

1 ldquoHim who had done the wrongrdquo orhellip2 ldquoHim who had suffered wrongrdquo

Instead it was offered that ldquoour care for you in the sight ofGod might appear to yourdquo

+ ldquoHow does loving rebuke demonstrate care for another

Christianrdquo mdash It demonstrates an interest in the other personrsquos soul Arebuke that leads to repentance can result in salvation Sin left unrebuked

81

(it-was)-not [on-account-of] the-one

having-done- [yet] neitherwrong

[on-account-of] the- having-been-one wronged

but [on-account-of mdash=in-order-that]

to-be-brought- the haste [of-us to-light = to-reveal =earnestness

youmdash` on- [of-you- of-us]all] behalf all

to- you- in-the- of-the God Be- thiswards all presence cause-(of)

οEgraveχ[alefsym - κ] [tm- ε$νεκεν alefsymBc - szligνεκεν] τοEuml

ἀδικAEligσαντος [alefsym1tcm- omit alefsym2B - ἀλλ᾿]οEgraveδcent

[tm- ε$νεκεν alefsymBc - szligνεκεν] τοEuml ἀδικηθdegντος

ἀλλ᾿[B adds - ὰ] [tm- ε$νεκεν alefsymBc - szligνεκεν] τοEuml

φανερωθinfinναι τOslashν σπουδOslashν [t- lemicrolaquoν alefsymBcm-

Iacutemicrolaquoν] τOslashν Iacuteπcentρ [alefsymt- Iacutemicrolaquoν Bcm - lemicrolaquoν]

πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς sectνasympπιον τοEuml ΘεοEuml 13 διὰ τοEumlτο

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 712

82

can result in condemnation (I Cor-inthians 545)mdash It shows the other person thatthey are important enough to youthat you are willing to risk theiranger out of a desire for what is bestfor themmdash It demonstrates that you arethinking about the other person andnot dwelling upon your own lifealone (II Corinthians 73)mdash It shows that you care in thatyou were willing to share with theminformation you have (ie the truth)so that they might profit from it (Ga-latians 416)

If Paul had learned about theirdisobedience to the Lordrsquos will andyet chosen to ignore it the result may well have been their condemnation Inhaving the courage to rebuke their error he may well have saved their soulsWhat better demonstration of care that participation in the salvation of the soulof another

(Note Sometimes when it comes to individuals who are spiritually immaturerather than rebuke the Bible encourages patient teaching The result is thesame only the approach differs See I Thessalonians 514 Galatians 61)

Titusrsquo Report to Paul 713-16

The Joy of Titus

Verse thirteen records for us that the spirit of Tituswas ldquorefreshedrdquo by his reception among the Corin-thians The context makes it evident that to a great

extent this refers to the fact that they had been obedientto the Lord in their repentance However the principlethat brethren serve to ldquorefreshrdquo one another is one thatcan apply to many different aspects of our relationshipswith one another

παρακεκλAEligmicroεθα sectπlsaquo [p46t- omit alefsymBcm - δcent] τordf

παρακλAEligσει [tm- Iacutemicrolaquoν p 46alefsymBc - lemicrolaquoν]

περισσοτdegρως [t- δcent alefsymBcm - omit] microᾶλλον

sectχάρηmicroεν sectπlsaquo τordf χαρᾷ Ττου ˜τι

ἀναπdegπαυται τUacute πνεEumlmicroα αEgraveτοEuml ἀπUacute

πάντων Iacutemicrolaquoν [alefsym adds - Ν = αEgraveτlaquoν] 14 ˜τι εDagger

τι αEgraveτldquo Iacuteπcentρ Iacutemicrolaquoν κεκαEcircχηmicroαι οEgrave

κατ˙σχEcircνθην ἀλλ᾿ hellipς πάντα sectν ἀληθεᾳ

sectλαλAEligσαmicroεν Iacutemicrorsaquoν [alefsym1omits] [tm- οIumlτω alefsymBc

- οIumlτως] καlsaquo le καEcircχησις [alefsymtcm- lemicrolaquoν B -

Iacutemicrolaquoν] [p46alefsym2tcm- le alefsym1B omit] sectπlsaquo Ττου

ἀλAEligθεια sectγενAEligθη 15 καlsaquo τὰ σπλάγχνα

+ ldquoWhat are some ways that

Christians can lsquorefreshrsquo one

anotherrdquo mdash Display obedienceto the Lord When our brethren seethis obedience they are encouragedto continue in their own service toGodmdash Notice when our brethren arediscouraged and ask what troublesthem When we learn the source oftheir discouragement take whateversteps are available to you to be ofhelp (Note Sometimes we can helpone another simply by listeningmore than by any other action -James 119)mdash Praise a job done wellmdash Share scriptures with brethrenthat can help them through a trialmdash Offer to relieve some physicalburden they face For exampleclean their house mow their lawntake them food etc

Paulrsquos Boast Over the Corinthians

Early in the chapter Paul declares ldquogreat is my boasting on your behalfrdquo (vs 4) However it is not untilnear the end of the chapter that we see exactly why

it is that this is the case Consider the following chain ofevents

1 Titus had gone to Corinth but failed to meet Paul inTroas as expected (21213)

2 Going on into Macedonia Paul was troubled by the fact that Titus had notcome (213 75)

Chapter Seven

to- you- in-the- of-the God Be- thiswards all pressence cause-(of)

we-are-being- over [yet] (in)-consoled the

consolation [of-you- of-us]all

abundantly [yet] (even)-more

we-have-been over the joy of-Titus be-made-to-rejoice cause

4has-been- 1the 2spirit 3of-him fromrefreshed

all of-you- [(the)same-ones] Be- ifall cause

any- to-him on-behalf of-you- I-boasted notthing all

I-have-been- but as 2all- 3in 4truthashamed things

1we-have- to-you- [in-this-way]spoken all

even the boasting [of-us

of-you- [the] upon Titusall]

2truth 1has-become And the bowels = bowelsof-compassion

83

of-him abundantly unto you- areall

remembering-for- the 2[of-all]himself

3of-you-1hearkening as with fear andall =obedience

trembling you-all [to-have- him I-rejoicereceived received]

[therefore] be- in all- I-am-con- incause things fident

you-all

αEgraveτοEuml περισσοτdegρως ες Iacutemicroᾶς sectστν

ἀναmicroιmicroνησκοmicrodegνου τOslashν [alefsym2Btcm- πάντων

alefsym1 omits] Egravemicrolaquoν IacuteπακοAEligν hellipς microετὰ φOgraveβου καlsaquo

τρOgravemicroου sectδdegξασθε[alefsym - αι] αEgraveτOgraveν 16 χαρω

[t - οOcircν alefsymBcm - omit] ˜τι sectν παντlsaquo θαρρlaquo sectν

Iacutemicrorsaquoν

3 Upon the coming of Titus Paul was comforted (76)4 Paul had boasted to Titus about the Corinthians (714)5 Titus reported to Paul that the Corinthians had been obedient (715) and

refreshed his spirit (713)6 Upon hearing this Paul was not ashamed of his boast regarding the Corin-

thians and felt that what he had boasted about them had become in factthe truth about them (714)

It was because of the fact that the Corinthians had so readily acceptedPaulrsquos instructions and rebuke that Paul was able to boast greatly on theirbehalf

Confidence in the Corinthians

As the chapter draws to a close Paul makes a state-ment which is rather hard for the reader to com-prehend (given the history of the Corinthrsquos

struggles) The apostle says ndash ldquoI rejoice that I have confi-dence in you in everythingrdquo How could Paul look at theirmany problems and yet have confidence in them in every-thing

This is an important lessonfor us to learn about the matter oflove for others Rather than expect-ing the Corinthians to fail (as theyhad in the past) Paul demonstratesthat he expects them to succeed Itis very easy for us sometimes to bevery impatient with those whostumble spiritually time and timeagain We begin to lose confidencein their commitment or resolve tostay true to the Lord The HolySpirit tells us in I Corinthians 137that love ldquobears all things believesall things hopes all things enduresall thingsrdquo This means that in spiteof past failures when we love some-one else we maintain a confidence that they can be what God would havethem to be Five thoughts may help us accomplish this

Second Corinthians

84

1 Realize how patient God is with you in spite of your repeated personalfailures

2 Remember that the Lord asks nothing of us that we do not have the powerto carry out (I Corinthians 1013)

3 Keep in mind that sometimes we become what we think other people expectus to become (If we think others expect us to fail we often fail If we thinkothers expect us to succeed we often succeed)

4 Consider that the other personrsquos stumbling was really not an offense to youbut God Forgive them and let God do the judging of motives and sincerity

5 Remind yourself that as a child of God the Lord works through you (as youare obedient to His word) to strengthen others

Chapter Seven

85

Chapter Seven Review

1 Name at least two of the promises of God towhich Paul most likely refers in verse one

2 Does the Christianrsquos responsibility to ldquocleanserdquothemselves indicate that salvation is somethingwhich can be earned

3 What are some things which are involved in aperson cleansing themselves

4 What is the primary meaning of the word translated ldquoperfectingrdquo inverse one

5 Will any Christian ever attain ldquoperfectionrdquo in the sense ofsinlessness In what sense should Christians attain ldquoperfectionrdquo

6 What does Paul claim in verse three he was willing to do ldquotogetherrdquowith the Corinthians

7 List three ways in which Christians must be willing to lay downtheir lives for their brethren

8 How could the phrase ldquogodly sorrowrdquo be literally translated9 Explain how it is that sorrow is something which works on a Chris-

tian in a good way10 Explain the phrase ldquothe sorrow of the worldrdquo11 List the seven results of godly sorrow listed in verse eleven How

does Bengel categorize the last six of these12 For whose sake does Paul claim in verse twelve he had not written

the previous letter13 List two ways that rebuke demonstrates care for another14 What had the Corinthians done for Titus according to verse thir-

teen How may we do this for one another15 What does Paul claim was ldquofound truerdquo in verse fourteen Explain

this statement

Second Corinthians

86

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R E I G H T E I G H T E I G H T E I G H T E I G H T

Outline

I The Generosity of the Macedonians (vss 1-6)II ldquoAbound in This Grace Alsordquo (vss 7-11)III The Aim of Christian Generosity (vss 12-15)IV ldquoThe Messengers of the Churchesrdquo (vss 16-24)

The Generosity of the Macedonians 81-6

The Macedonian Churches

Paul begins this chapter with reference to the gener-osity of the ldquochurches of Macedoniardquo Acts chaptersixteen records the circumstances that led

to the entrance of the gospel into Macedonia The HolySpirit had forbidden Paul (at that time) to go into Asia Mi-nor (Acts 166) and Bithynia (Acts 167) While in Troashe saw a visionof a ldquoMan of

Macedoniardquo saying to him ldquoComeover to Macedonia and help usrdquo(Acts 169) After this Paul imme-diately sought to go into MacedoniaScripture records for us threechurches that were established asa result of these effortsThe Church at Philippi mdash Phil-ippi bears the name of its founderPhilip II the father of Alexander theGreat Though founded in 358 BCby the time of Paul it was a Romancolony as Scripture itself testifies(Acts 1612) Octavion (who wouldbe the emperor Caesar Augustus)

II Corinthians 812

1 Γνωρζοmicroεν δcent Iacutemicrorsaquoν ἀδελφο τOslashν χάριν

τοEuml ΘεοEuml τOslashν δεδοmicrodegνην sectν ταrsaquoς sectκκλησαις

τinfinς Μακε[alefsym - αι]δονας 2 ˜τι sectν πολλordf

δοκιmicroordf θλψεως le περισσεα τinfinς χαρᾶς

αEgraveτlaquoν καlsaquo le κατὰ βάθου[p46 omits]ς πτωχεα

αEgraveτlaquoν sectπερσσευσεν ε$ς [alefsym2tm - τUacuteν πλοEumlτον

alefsym1Bc - τUacute πλοEumlτος] τinfinς ἁπλOgraveτητος αEgraveτlaquoν

2we-make- 1Yet to- brothers the graceknown you

of- God mdash having- in the congregationsthe been-given =churches

mdash of-Macedonia That in great

trial of-pressure the abundance of- joy=affliction the

of- and 1the 3accord- 4depth 2povertythem ing-to =the deep poverty

of-them has-abounded into [the riches]

of- singleness of-themthe =liberality

87

Second Corinthians

established the city as a colonyfor Romans who had been faith-ful to Mark Antony (The NewCompact Bible Dictionary p456)

The church in Philippi beganwith the conversion of the sellerof purple named Lydia and herhousehold whom Paul met by theriver outside of the city (Acts1611-15) After casting an evilspirit out of a slave girl used fordivination Paul and Silas wereimprisoned This led to the con-version of the jailer who heldthem along with his household(Acts 1616-34) Being releasedfrom prison because of their Ro-man citizenship Paul then movedon to Thessalonica (Acts 1635-40)

The Church at Thessalonica mdashThessalonica was originallynamed Therma When Philipp IIand Alexander left Macedonia for Asia bent upon conquest they left an officernamed Antipater in charge of Macedonia (Smaller Classical Dictionary p 28)Antipaterrsquos son Cassander married Thessalonica the sister of Alexander theGreat Cassander renamed the city after his wife when he took control Thegulf the city is situated upon retained the original designation - The ThermaicGulf (Smithrsquos Bible Dictionary p 692)

The church in Thessalonica began with work in the Jewish synagogue inthe city After three Sabbath days of study many Jews believed in Jesus asthe Christ Others became envious an instigated a riot against Paul and SilasThey were dragged from the house of Jason and brought before the authori-ties False accusations were made against Paul and Silas but when Jasonand the rest paid ldquosecurityrdquo to the authorities they were released (Acts 171-9)

The Church at Berea mdash After leaving Thessalonica Paul and Silas came toBerea where they again preached in the Jewish synagogue Acts 1711 testi-fies of the Bereans ndash ldquoThese were more fair-minded than those in Thessalonicain that they received the word with all readiness and searched the Scriptures

HELLESPONT

M e d i t e r r a n e a n S e a

Aegean

Sea

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

THE CHURCHESOF MACEDONIA

THESSALONICA

BEREA

88

Chapter Eight

daily to find out whether these things were sordquo Though many Jews obeyed thegospel Berea as well faced persecution when Jews from Thessalonica cameand stirred up the nonbelievers there

When Giving Isnrsquot Easy

In referring to the generosity of the Macedonian breth-ren the remarkable fact is that Paul says theywere generous even in the midst of ldquogreat afflictionrdquo

Often our own generosity may come only when we findourselves confortable and secure While the Lord does notask us to ne-glect our re-sponsibilities to

either our families or those to whomwe have financial obligations (ITimothy 58 Romans 1378) wemust never limit or generosity to theLord or to those in need to onlythose times when it is easy In ourtext we note that the Macedoniansin the midst of affliction gave ldquobe-yond their abilityrdquo (83) It requiredsome sacrifice for them to do so andyet they did so with ldquomuch urgencyrdquo(84)

What motivated the Mace-donians to such generosity Theanswer lies in their very commit-ment to the Lord itself Paul tellsus they ldquofirst gave themselves to theLordrdquo (85) When a child of Godestablishes their responsibility tothe Lord as the main priority in theirlife personal sacrifice of timeresourses or personal desires willcome much more readily

89

II Corinthians 83-6

3 τι κατὰ δEcircναmicroιν microαρτυρlaquo καlsaquo [tm - Iacuteπcentρ

alefsymBc - παρὰ] δEcircναmicroιν αEgraveθα[alefsym - ε]ρετοι 4

microετὰ πολλinfinς παρακλAEligσεως δεOgravemicroενοι lemicrolaquoν

τOslashν χάριν καlsaquo τOslashν κοινωναν τinfinς διακονας

τinfinς ε$ς τοAacuteς ἁγους [t - δdegξασθαι lemicroᾶς] 5

καlsaquo οEgrave καθ(ς plusmnλπσ[B - κ]αmicroεν ἀλλ᾿ bullαυτοAacuteς

paraδωκαν πρlaquoτον τldquo Κυρƒ καlsaquo lemicrorsaquoν διὰ

θελAEligmicroατος ΘεοEuml 6 ε$ς τUacute παρακαλdegσαι lemicroᾶς

Ττον -να καθ(ς προ[B omits]ενAEligρξατο [tm

- οIumlτω alefsymBc - οIumlτως] καlsaquo sectπιτελdegσ˙ ε$ς Iacutemicroᾶς

καlsaquo τOslashν χάριν ταEcircτην 7 ἀλλ᾿ Agraveσπερ sectν

Be- accord- (their)- I-witness (that)- [abovecause ing-to power even

beside] (their)- (as)-ones-choosing-power for-themselves

with much calling-beside begging us=exhortation

the grace and the fellowship of- servicethe

of- unto the saints [to-receive of-us]the

and not as we-had- [we- but them-hoped hoped] selves

they- first to- Lord and to- thr-gave the us ough

(the)-will- God unto the consolation of-of us

Titus in- as [he-began] he-began-order-that before

[in-this-way] even he-might- unto you-complete all

mdash the 2favor 1same But just-as in=grace

Second Corinthians

90

ldquoAbound in This Grace Alsordquo 87-11

Christrsquos Poverty mdash Christian Riches

It is a sobering thought to real-ize the extent of Christrsquos sacrifice for mankind Existing with

God prior to his birth into this worldin all of the glory and splendor ofDeity and yet surrendering that inorder to rescue man from sin Whileit is true that upon His ascensionall glory and splendor was restoredto Him it does not diminish the factthat while on earth Christ was apauper in comparison to the richesHe held in heaven

Beyond the fact that Christwas impoverished by leavingheaven He was also impoverishedphysically He did not live like aking with servants and fine clothesand expensive possessions Insteadwe have no indication that he evereven own his own home (see Luke958)

Why did Jesus go from spiri-tual wealth to utter poverty Thatwe might have the hope of sharinghis glory This must lead us to re-alizehellipmdash Even the Christian in the mosthumble of circumstances is spiri-tually richmdash Since Christ was willing to giveup so much for us we must not hesi-tate to sacrifice for Him

allyou-all- [in] in-faiththings abound

and in- and in- and in- haste evenword knowledge all =dilligence

mdash from [you- us] inall

[us you- in-love in- even in thisall] order-that

mdash favor you-all- Not acc- command=grace may-abound ording-to

I- but thr- the 2of- 1haste even mdashspeak ough others =dilligence

the 3of-yours 2love 1genuine to-prove

2you-all- 1For the favor of- Lordknow =grace the

of- Jesus [Christ]us

that be- [you] [3He-became-cause-of poor]

2rich 1being in- youorder-that

by- 2of-that- 1poverty you-all-mightthe (One) become-rich

And (a)-mind in this I-give 2this 1for=judgement

to- it-(is)- who not only the to-doyou profitable

but even the to-will you-all-had frombegun-before

last- 2now 1But even the to-doyear

παντlsaquo περισσεEcircετε [alefsym1 - sectν] πστε[alefsym omits]ι

καlsaquo λOgraveγƒ καlsaquo γνasympσει καlsaquo πάσ˙ σπουδordf καlsaquo

τordf sectξ [alefsymtm - Iacutemicrolaquoν p46Bc - lemicrolaquoν] sectν [alefsymtm -

lemicrorsaquoν p46Bc - Iacutemicrorsaquoν] ἀγάπ˙ -να καlsaquo sectν ταEcircτ˙

τordf χάριτι περισσεEcircητε 8 οEgrave κατ᾿ sectπιταγOslashν

λdegγω ἀλλὰ διὰ τinfinς bullτdegρων σπουδinfinς καlsaquo τUacute

τinfinς Iacutemicroετdegρας ἀγάπης γνAEligσιον δοκιmicroάζων

9 γ[B - ε]ινasympσκετε γὰρ τOslashν χάριν τοEuml Κυρου

lemicrolaquoν ᾿ΙησοEuml [p46alefsymtcm - ΧριστοEuml B omits]

˜τι δι᾿ [p46alefsymBtcm -Iacutemicroᾶς] [tm - sectπτlaquoχευσε

alefsymBc - sectπτlaquoχευσεν] πλοEcircσιος gtν -να Iacutemicroεrsaquoς

τordf sectκενου πτωχε[alefsym omits]ᾳ πλουτAEligσητε 10

καlsaquo γνasympmicroην sectν τοEcircτƒ δδωmicroι τοEumlτο γὰρ

Iacutemicrorsaquoν συmicroφdegρει ο-τινες οEgrave microOgraveνον τUacute ποιinfinσαι

ἀλλὰ καlsaquo τUacute θdegλειν προενAEligρξασθε ἀπUacute

πdegρυσι 11 νυν[B - ε]lsaquo δcent καlsaquo τUacute ποιinfinσαι

Chapter Eight

91

ldquoReadinessrdquo

In verse eleven Paul urges the Corinthians to followthrough with the giving of the gift which they had ndash ldquoareadinessrdquo to give a year earlier The word translated

ldquoreadiness here in the Greek word prothumia (προθυmicroα)meaning ndash ldquo1zeal spirit eagerness 2 inclination readi-ness of mindrdquo (Thayer p 539) While the word is foundsome five times in Scripture four of the five come in thisepistle (8111219 amp 92)

This word is used in Acts1711 to describe the wonderful at-titude that the Bereans had regard-ing the message of the gospel Thetext tells us that they ndash ldquohellipreceivedthe word with all readiness andsearched the Scriptures daily to findout whether these things were sordquo(Acts 1711) In Second CorinthiansPaul uses it of the Corinthians ea-gerness to help others Paul urgesthe brethren to act upon their zealand complete what they had set outto do This is always a challenge to follow through with those things whichinitially stir up our zeal

The Aim of Christian Generosity 812-15

Godrsquos Providence in the Human Condition

When brethren are impoverished or enriched it putsthem in a position to participate in thescheme of Godrsquos providential care for His people

Since all blessings come from God (see James 117) whenChristians prosper they must give God the thanks and thecredit for this prosperity Yet it must also be understoodthat with the blessing of prosperity comes the responsibil-ity to practice generosity (see Ephesians 428) As Godrsquos

people share their prosperity with their brethren who face need in a very realway God is acting through them to help His people who struggle

II Corinthians 811

sectπιτελdegσατε[alefsym - αι] ˜πως καθάπερ le

προθυmicroα τοEuml θdegλειν [tm - οIumlτω alefsymBc -

οIumlτως] καlsaquo τUacute sectπιτελdegσαι[alefsym - ε] sectκ τοEuml paraχε[alefsym

omits]ιν

you-all- thus even-as themust-complete

readiness of- to-will [so]the

even the to-complete out- the to-haveof=what-you-have

Second Corinthians

92

In verse fourteen of our textPaul points out to the brethren thatthe prosperity which they enjoyedas compared to the saints in Judeaput them in a position to be of helpto the saints in Judea He declaresndash ldquoYour abundance may supply theirlackrdquo Yet he also sugests that theyshould be generous so that ndash ldquotheirabundance may also supply yourlackrdquo While their may be somespiritual diminsion to Paulrsquos state-ment (compare Romans 1527)most likely Paul is in a very practi-cal way pointing our that if they helpthe saints in Jerusalem now thetime may come when they will needhelp themselves and at that time itmay be that the saints in Judeawould be in a postiion to supplywhat they lacked

ldquoThe Messengers of the Churchesrdquo 816-24

ldquoOf His Own Accordrdquo

Paul praises Titus in verse seventeen for having goneto the brethren to receive the gift from them ldquoof hisown accordrdquo In the Greek this phrase comes from

the single word authairtetos (αEgraveθαρετος) ndash meaning mdash ldquoProp-erly one who chooses his own course of action acting spon-taneously of onersquos own accordrdquo (Moulton p 59) In thecontext Paul is pointing out that he did not have to compelTitus to serve the brethren This is true of our service to

the Lord as well While there are necessities of the gospel all of our service tothe Lord must be of our own accord and by our own choice

omits]ιν 12 ε$ γὰρ le προθυmicroα πρOgraveκειται

καθUacute sectὰν[alefsym omits] paraχ˙ [tm - τις alefsymBc omits]

εEgraveπρOgraveσδεκτος οEgrave καθUacute οEgraveκ paraκει 13 οEgrave γὰρ

-να ἄλλοις ἄνεσις Iacutemicrorsaquoν [alefsym2tm - δcent alefsym1Bc omits]

θλrsaquoψις 14 ἀλλ᾿ sectξ $σOgraveτητος sectν τmdash νEumlν καιρldquo

τUacute Iacutemicrolaquoν περσσευmicroα ε$ς τUacute sectκενων Iacuteστdegρmicroα

-να καlsaquo τUacute sectκενων περσσευmicroα γdegνηται ε$ς

τUacute Egravemicrolaquoν Iacuteστdegρηmicroα ˜πως γdegνηται $σOgraveτης

15 καθ(ς γdegγραπται Ο τUacute πολAacute οEgraveκ [tm -

sectπλεOgraveνασε alefsymBc - sectπλεOgraveνασεν] καlsaquo ı τUacute

Ugraveλγον οEgraveκ plusmnλαττOgraveνησε

2if 1For the readiness (is)-present

as if should- [someone]=according-to-(what) have

(it-is)- not as- not has 2not 1Foracceptable (one)

in- to-others be-loosed to- [but]order-that =at-ease you-all

pressure but out- equality in the pre- time=hardship of sent

(that)- 2of- 1abundance unto mdash of-them what-is-the you-all lacking

in- even the 2of-them 1abundance may-become untoorder-that

mdash ofwhat-is- thus may-be equalityyou-all lacking

Just-as it-has-been- The- mdash much (was)-written one not

[having-more-than-enough] and the-mdashone

a-little (was)- having-too-not little

Chapter Eight

93

Who Was Titus

Through-out thee p i s t l e

Paul refers tothe evangelistTitus Con-sider a briefoutline of what

the Bible teaches us about Titusbull Paul addressed an entire NewTestament epistle to Titus In thisepistle he instructs Titus to appointelders in every city in Crete (Titus15) instruct the older and youngermen and women along with the ser-vants (Titus 21-10) avoid disputesand divisive men (Titus 39-11) tocome to him at Nicopolis where Paulwill spend the winter (Titus 312)and send provide for Zenas andApollos as they are sent on theirjourney (Titus 313)bull Paul had been distressed uponcoming to Troas when he did notfind Titus (II Corinthians 213)bull Titusrsquo report to Paul had givenhim comfort regarding the Corinth-ians (II Corinthians 76)bull Titus was the one who assistedin the carying of the gift to the saintsin Judea (II Corinthians 8616)bull A postscript contained in somelate manuscripts claims that theepistle of Second Corinthians wascarried to the brethren by TitusThe King James Version containsthis postscript in II Corinthians1314bull When Paul returned to Jerusa-lem he took Titus (Galatians 21)

16 Χάρις δcent τldquo Θεldquo τldquo [alefsym1Btm - διδOgraveντι

p46 alefsym2c - δOgraveντι] τOslashν αEgraveτOslashν σπουδOslashν Iacuteπcentρ

Iacutemicrolaquoν sectν τordf καρδᾳ Ττου 17 ˜τι τOslashν microcentν

παράκλησιν sectδdegξατο σπουδαιOgraveτερος δcent

Iacuteπάρχων αEgraveθαρετος [tm - sectξinfinλθε alefsymBc -

sectξinfinλθεν] πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς 18 συνεπdegmicroψαmicroεν δcent

[alefsym1 - τUacuteν ἀδελφUacuteν] microετ᾿ αEgraveτοEuml τUacuteν ἀδελφUacuteν

ο ı paraπαινος sectν τldquo εEgraveαγγελƒ διὰ πασlaquoν

τlaquoν sectκκλησιlaquoν 19 οEgrave microOgraveνον δdeg ἀλλὰ καlsaquo

χειροτονηθεlsaquoς IacuteπUacute τlaquoν sectκκλησιlaquoν

συνdegκδηmicroος lemicrolaquoν [p46 alefsymtcm - σAacuteν B - sectν] τordf

χάριτι ταEcircτ˙ τordf διακονουmicrodegν˙ Iacuteφ᾿ lemicrolaquoν

πρUacuteς τOslashν αEgraveτοEuml[B omits] τοEuml Κυρου δOgraveξαν

καlsaquo προθυmicroαν [t - Iacutemicrolaquoν alefsymBcm - lemicrolaquoν] 20

στελλOgravemicroενοι τοEumlτο microAElig τις lemicroᾶς microωmicroAEligσται

sectν τordf ἁδρOgraveτητι ταEcircτ˙ τordf διακονουmicrodegν˙ Iacuteφ᾿

lemicrolaquoν [p46 omits - πρUacuteς τOslashν αEgraveτοEuml τοEuml Κυρου

δOgraveξαν καlsaquo προθυmicroαν Iacutemicrolaquoν 20 στελλOgravemicroενοι

τοEumlτο microAElig τις lemicroᾶς microωmicroAEligσται sectν τordf ἁδρOgraveτητι

ταEcircτ˙ τordf διακονουmicrodegν˙ Iacuteφ᾿ lemicrolaquoν]

2favor 1But (be)- God the- [giving=thanks to-the One

having-given] the same haste on-=dilligence behalf

of- in the heart of-Titus Be- mdash in-you-all cause deed

2consolation 1having- 3more-earnest 1and=beseeching received

2becoming choosing-for- [he-came-out]himself

to you- 2we-have- 1Butall sent

[the brother] with him the brother

of- the praise- in the good-news through allwhom(is) =gospel

of- congregations 2not 3only- 1and but eventhe =churches (this)

the-one-hand-picked by the congregations=appointed =churches

(a)-fellow- of-us [with in] thetraveler

favor this thebeing-served by of-=grace one us

to the same- of- Lord-of gloryone the

and (the)- [of-you of-us]readiness all

withdrawing- (from)- not any- us should-find-ourselves this one fault

in the abundance this thebeing-served byone

us [to the same- of- Lord-ofone the

glory and (the)- of-you withdrawing-readiness all ourselves

(from)- not any- us should-find- in the abundancethis one fault

this thebeing-served by us]one

Second Corinthians

94

bull Though a Greek Titus did not succomb to pressures to be circumcised(Galatians 23)bull II Timothy 410 relates Titus departing from Paul unto Dalmatiabull Paulrsquos epsitle to Titus identifies him as Paulrsquos ndash ldquotrue son in our commonfaithrdquo (Titus 14)bull A postscript found in a number of late manuscripts of Paulrsquos epistle to Titusidentifies Titus as a bishop in the church in Crete The King James Versioncontains this postscript in Titus 315

Providing Honorable Things

I n versetwenty-one Paul

claims that heatempts toprovide ndashldquo h o n o r a b l ethings not

only in the sight of the Lord butalso in the sight of menrdquo It mightbe easy for a Christian to take theposition that they care only what theLord thinks of them given that theLord will serve as manrsquos judge InPaulrsquos first epistle to the Corinth-ians he had declared the fact thatldquoHe who judges me is the Lordrdquo (ICorinthians 44) and thus he couldsay ldquoit is a very small that I shouldbe judged by you or by a humancourtrdquo (I Corinthians 43) Yet theChristian has at least tworesponsiblities to others in matterssuch as this1 They must always live in such away as to influence the non-Chris-tian to obey the gospel2 They must always live in such away as to influence the Christian toremain faithful to the gospel

[minding-before- we-mind-before-hand=providing hand=we-provide]

[For] good- not onlythings

in-the- of-(the)- but even in-the-pressence Lord pressence

of-men 2we-have-sent 1But with the

brother of-us the- we-have in in-many-one-whom proved things

in-many 2earnest 1being 2now 1buttimes

much more-earnest in-confidence

[yet] great mdash unto you- If- on- of-yet behalf Titus

2partner 1my and unto you- (a)-fellow- if-all worker yet

brothers of-us the-ones-sent- of-(the)- (the)-out=apostles congregations glory

of-Christ 2the1There- 3pointing-out of-fore the

love of-you- and- of-us boasting on-all (the) behalf

of- unto them [you-all-must- you-all point-out

we-point-out] even into (the)-face of-the=presence

congregations=churches

ταEcircτ˙ τordf διακονουmicrodegν˙ Iacuteφ᾿ lemicrolaquoν] 21 [tm -

προνοοEcircmicroενοι p46alefsymBc - προνοοEcircmicroεν] [tm -

omit alefsymBc - γὰρ] καλὰ οEgrave microOgraveνον [alefsym2Btcm -

sectνasympπιον alefsym1 omits] Κυρου ἀλλὰ καlsaquo sectνasympπιον

ἀνθρasympπων 22 συνεπdegmicroψαmicroεν δcent αEgraveτοrsaquoς τUacuteν

ἀδελφUacuteν lemicrolaquoν ˘ν sectδοκιmicroάσαmicroεν sectν πολλοrsaquoς

πολλάκις σπουδαrsaquoον ˆντα νυν[B - ε]lsaquo δcent

πολAacute[p46 omits] σπουδαιOgraveτερον πεποιθAEligσει

[B - δcent] πολλordf τordf ε3ς Iacutemicroᾶς 23 εDaggerτε Iacuteπcentρ Ττου

κοινωνUacuteς sectmicroUacuteς καlsaquo ε3ς Iacutemicroᾶς συνεργOgraveς εDaggerτε

ἀδελφοlsaquo lemicrolaquoν ἀπOgraveστολοι sectκκλησιlaquoν δOgraveξα

ΧριστοEuml 24 τOslashν οOcircν paraνδε[alefsym omits]ιξιν τinfinς

ἀγάπης Iacutemicrolaquoν καlsaquo lemicrolaquoν καυχAEligσεως Iacuteπcentρ

Iacutemicrolaquoν ε3ς αEgraveτοAacuteς [alefsymtm - sectνδεξασθε Bc -

sectνδεινEcircmicroενοι] καlsaquo ε3ς πρOgraveσωπον τlaquoν

sectκκλησιlaquoν

Chapter Eight Review

1 Identify the four instances of the word ldquogracerdquobeing used in this chapter and explain the mean-ing of each

2 What had the Macedonian brethren done in spiteof their ldquodeep povertyrdquo

3 With respect to their ability how does Paul de-clare that the Macedonians had given

4 In a general sense does God expect things of us that are beyond ourability Explain

5 What was the first thing the Macedonians had given to the LordHow are some ways we can do the same thing

6 What did Paul urge Titus to ldquocompleterdquo7 In what five things does Paul claim the Corinthians abounded in

verse seven8 What does he urge them to add to these five things9 By whom was Paul testing the diligence of the Corinthians10 List three things in which Jesus had been rich yet became ldquopoorrdquo

for our sakes11 How can Christians become ldquorichrdquo through the poverty of Christ12 At the time this epistle was written when had the Corinthians

previously had the willingness and the desire to help the Judeansaints

13 According to what does verse twelve tell us that a Christianrsquos giv-ing is acceptable

14 How could it be that the abundance of the Judean saints couldsupply what was lacking for the Corinthians

15 How does verse seventeen claim that Titus had gone to the Corin-thians brethren

16 List three things that the Bible tells us about Titus17 Why is it important for a Christian to ldquoproviderdquo honorable things

in the sight of both God and men

Chapter Eight

95

96

Second Corinthians

1 Περlsaquo microcentν γὰρ τinfinς διακονας τinfinς ες τοAacuteς

ἁγους περισσOgraveν [p46 - τερον] [alefsymtcm - microο B

- sectmicroο] [tm - sectστι alefsymBc - sectστιν] τUacute γράφειν

Iacutemicrorsaquoν 2 οpermilδα γὰρ τOslashν προθυmicroαν Iacutemicrolaquoν partν

Iacuteπcentρ Iacutemicrolaquoν καυχlaquomicroαι ΜακεδOgraveσιν τι Αχα˛α

παρε[alefsym1 - α]σκεEcircασται ἀπUacute πdegρυσι καlsaquo [tm

- ı p46alefsymBc - τUacute] [tm - sectξ p46alefsymBc omit] Iacutemicrolaquoν

ζinfinλος plusmnρdegθισε[c - ν] τοAacuteς πλεονας 3 paraπεmicroψα

2con- ndash 1Yet of- service ndash unto thecerning the

saints superfluous [more-super- [for-me fluous]

for-mine] [(it)-is] to-write

to- 2I-know 1for the readi- of-you- whichyou-all ness all

on- of-you- I-boast in-Macedonia that Achaiabehalf all

has-been- from a-year- andprepared ago

[the] [out] of-you-all

zeal has- the greater-provoked number

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R N I N E N I N E N I N E N I N E N I N E

Outline

I The Corinthiansrsquo Readiness (912)II Preparations Regarding the Corinthiansrsquo Gift

(93-5)III Principles Governing Church Collections (96-9)IV The Consequences of Giving (910-15)

The Corinthiansrsquo Readiness 912

As we have noted previously the Corinthians had been anxious a yearearlier (perhaps when Paul first wrote them) to give aid to the saints inneed Because of this Paul had boasted to the Macedonians about the

readiness of the Corinthians As a result the Apostle begins this chapter bydeclaring that it would be ldquosuperfluousrdquo for him to write to them again regard-ing giving for the saints The wordtranslated ldquoSuperfluousrdquo here is theword ndash Perissos (περισσOgraveς) meaningndash ldquoExceeding some number or mea-sure or rank or need 1 Over andabove more than is necessaryhelliprdquo(Thayer p 505) In other wordsthey already had the zeal to giveAny other admonition to stir up thiszeal was not necessary This re-minds us of Paulrsquos words to theThessalonians in his first epistle tothem ndash ldquoBut concerning brotherlylove you have no need that I shouldwrite to you for you yourselves aretaught by God to love one anotherrdquo(49) May it be our goal that suchcould be said of us

97

II Corinthians 912

δcent τοAacuteς ἀδελφοEcircς ampνα microOslash τUacute καEcircχηmicroα le[B1 -

Iacute]microlaquoν τUacute Iacuteπcentρ Iacutemicrolaquoν κενωθordf sectν τldquo microdegρε[alefsym

omits]ι τοEcircτƒ ampνα καθς paraλεγο[alefsym1 - ε]ν

παρεσκευασmicrodegνοι +τε 4 microAElig πως sectὰν[B omits]

[tm - paraλθωσι alefsymBc - paraλθωσιν] σAacuteν sectmicroοlsaquo

Μακε[alefsym - αι]δOgraveνες καlsaquo εIumlρωσιν Iacutemicroᾶς

ἀπαρασκευάστους καταισχυνθlaquomicroεν lemicroεrsaquoς

ampνα microOslash λεγasympmicroεν[p46 omits] Iacute[B1 - le]microεrsaquoς sectν τordf

Iacuteποστάσει ταEcircτ˙ [alefsym2tm - τinfinς καυχAEligσεως

alefsym1Bc omit] 5 ἀναγκαrsaquoον οOcircν leγησάmicroην

παρακαλdegσαι τοAacuteς ἀδελφοEcircς ampνα

προdegλθωσιν ες[B - πρUacuteς] Egravemicroᾶς καlsaquo [alefsymtm -

προκαταρτσωσι Bc - προκαταρτσωσιν]

τOslashν [tm - προκατηγγελmicrodegνην alefsymBc -

προεπηγγελmicrodegνην] εEgraveλογαν Iacutemicrolaquoν ταEcircτην

bullτοmicroην εpermilναι οIumlτως hellipς εEgraveλογαν καlsaquo[p46alefsym1

omits] microOslash [t - Agraveσπερ alefsymBcm - hellipς] πλεονεξαν

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 93-5

2I-have-sent

1Yet the brothers in- not the boast of-usorder-that

[of- ndash on- of- may-be- in the partyou-all] behalf you-all emptied

this in- just-as I-said [it-was-order-that said]

having-been- you- not in- ifprepared all-were any-way

[should-come] with me

(a)-Macedonian even should- you-find all

unprepared 2should-be- 1weashamed

in- not we- [I-say] you- [we] in theorder-that should-say all

basis this [of-the boasting]=confidence

3necessary 1There- 2I-thought-fore (it)

to-admonish the brothers in-order-that

they-go- unto [to] you- andforward all

[may-prepare]

the [having-been- declared-beforehand

having-been- good-speech of- thispromised-beforehand] =blessing you-all

prepared to-be in- as good-speech andthis-way =blessing

not [just-as as] a-grudging-gift

98

Motivating by Example

Apparently the readiness of the Corinthians hadbeen a great motivation to other churches Inthe second verse Paul had declared - ldquoyour zeal

stirred up the majorityrdquo A good example though some-times only

heard about from a distance canhave a powerful influence on oth-ers Consider a few ways this mightbe truemdash A worldly person learns that afriend has turned away from theworld in obedience to Christ Theircuriosity about their friendrsquos changeof life leads them to follow their ex-ample in obeying the gospel them-selvesmdash A church located in a difficultarea of the world stands up braveand strong for the truth in spite ofintense persecution Churchesmiles away who learn about this aremotivated to greater faithfulnessthemselvesmdash A majority of churches in a givenarea give way to falsehood In spiteof pressure from the majority onesole congregation holds out in op-position to error Miles away an-other church facing a similar ordealtakes courage from the faithfulnessof their brethren and they remainfaithful to the truth

Preparations Regarding

the Corinthiansrsquo

Gift 93-5

In order to insure that the Cor-inthians would not be caughtunprepared Paul had sent ldquothe

Chapter Nine

brethrenrdquo to them (vs 3) This is undoubtedly a reference to Titus and hiscompanions as referred to in the previous chapter (86) Given the great boastingthat Paul had done on behalf of the Corinthians he wanted to insure that theywould not embarrass him or themselves In this we see a willingness on thepart of Paul to protect their feelings and to spare them any pain+ ldquoWhat are some situations in which we can show this kind of consider-ation for the feelings of othersrdquomdash We hear a rumor about a brother or sister that could be potentially embar-rassing to them Rather than keep it to ourselves or spread it to others we goto the person to see if what we have heard is true Then we offer ourselves tothe brother or sister in order to help them set things right to avoid embarrass-mentmdash A young Christian plans to make a suggestion at a business meetingWithout realizing it the suggestion would involve involving the church in some-thing unscriptural Rather than letting them make the suggestion and beembarrassed or discouraged you talk with them and study with them aboutthe matter beforehandmdash A young man gives a Bible talk for the first time During the course of hislesson he makes some points which could use some refinement or correctionRather than embarrassing him you take him aside privately and show himwhere improvement can be made (See Acts 1824-28)

Principles Governing Church Collections 96-9

Sparing and Bountiful Sowing

Beyond just the area of giving the Christian life isoften described in terms of ldquosowingrdquo and ldquoreap-ingrdquo In Galatians 678 the Apostle tells us ndash ldquoDo

not be deceivedGod is notmocked forwhatever a mansows that he

will also reap For he who sows tohis flesh will of his flesh reap cor-ruption but he who sows to theSpirit will of the Spirit reap ever-lasting liferdquo In Second CorinthiansPaul declares ndash ldquohellipHe who sowssparingly will also reap sparinglyand he who sows bountifully will

II Corinthians 96

6 ΤοEumlτο δdeg ı σπε[alefsym omits]ρων

φειδοmicrodegνως φε[alefsym omits]ιδοmicrodegνως καlsaquo θερσει

καlsaquo ı σπε[alefsym omits]ρων sectπ᾿ εEgraveλογαις sectπ᾿

εEgraveλογαις καlsaquo θερσει 7 szligκαστος καθς [tm

99

2this 1Yet the (one)-sowing

sparingly sparingly even will-reap

and the (one)-sowing over of-good-speech over=liberally

of-good- even will-reapspeech =liberally

- προαιρεrsaquoται alefsymBc - προῄρηται] τordf καρδᾳ

microOslash sectκ λEcircπης ŭ sectξ ἀνάγκης gtλαρUacuteν γὰρ

δOgraveτην ἀγαπᾷ ı ΘεOgraveς 8 [tm - δυνατUacuteς

Each just-as

[he-chooses- one-having- in- heartfor-himself chosen-for-himself] the

not out- of- or out- necessity 5cheerful 1forof sorrow of

6giver 4He- 2the 3Godloves

Second Corinthians

also reap bountifullyrdquo (vs 6) The idea is basically you will get back what yougive Consider a few areas in which Scripture teaches this principle

Forgiveness (Matthew 61415)Judgment (Matthew 712)Peace (James 315-18)Giving (Luke 63738)

ldquoAs He Purposes in His Heartrdquo

In verse seven the Holy Spirit directs through theApostle Paul the attitude with which giving is to becarried out He writes ndash ldquoSo let each one give as he

purposes in his heart not grudgingly or of necessity forGod loves a cheerful giverrdquo Among many modernchurches a practice has developed which is referred to asldquopurposingrdquo In this practice members are asked to fillout a card which is turned into the elders often declaring

the memberrsquos annual income and how much they intend to give during thecoming year The justification given for this practice is that it helps the eldersdetermine how to budget for the coming year and in some cases rebuke thosewho are not giving as they ought to

ldquoDoes the Bible authorize thepractice referred to as lsquopurpos-ingrsquordquomdash Jesus taught that giving is to bea private matter (Matthew 61-4)Would it not violate this teaching ifonersquos planned giving were madepublic (even if just to the elders)Would this not increase the temp-tation to flaunt onersquos giving beforemenmdash In the Old Testament giving wasa matter of necessity and a fixedobligation (Deuteronomy 1422-29) It was to be ten percent of onersquos goodsNew Testament giving is not to be a tithe Instead each gives

1 ldquoAs he purposes in his heartrdquo2 ldquoNot grudginglyrdquo3 ldquoOr of necessityrdquo

Requiring members to pledge ahead of time what they will give makes it a

II Corinthians 97

100

matter of necessity (Note This is not to suggest that members themselvesmay not plan budget and set goals for themselves Such would be purposingldquoin the heartrdquo not on the card)mdash Christian planning must always be done with a realization that we do notknow what tomorrow may offer (James 413-17) While elders do need to setgoals for church work often what pushes churches into the position wheresome type of pledge system becomes (almost) necessary is either

1 Obligating themselves beyond their ability2 Involving themselves in so many unnecessary (or possibly even

unscriptural works) that budgeting becomes a complicated and risky busi-ness

ldquoPurposesrdquo mdash proaireo (προαιρdegω) ndash ldquoTo bring forwardbring forth from ones stores Middle to bring forth for onesself to choose for ones self before another i e to prefer topurposerdquo (Thayer p 537)ldquoGrudginglyrdquo mdash lupe (λEcircπη) ndash ldquoPain distress grief sor-rowhelliprdquo (Moulton p 254) The King James Version trans-lates this word as follows - ldquosorrowrdquo (11) ldquoheavinessrdquo (2)ldquogrievousrdquo (1) ldquogrudgingrdquo (1) grief (1)

ldquoNecessityrdquo mdash anagke (ἀνάγκη) ndash ldquo1 Necessity pressure of any kind outeror innerhellip 2 distress calamityhellip 3 the means of compulsionhelliprdquo (BAG p 52)ndash ldquo1 Necessity imposed either bythe external condition of things orby law of duty regard to ones ad-vantage custom argumenthelliprdquo(Thayer p 36)

What God is Able to Do

After in-structingthe breth-

ren to give gen-erously Paul re-assures them inverse eight ndashldquoAnd God is

able to make all grace abound to-ward you that you always havingall sufficiency in all things have anabundance for every good workrdquo

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 989

p46alefsymBc - δυνατεrsaquo] δcent ı ΘεUacuteς πᾶσαν χάριν

περισσεEumlσαι ες Egravemicroᾶς ampνα sectν παντlsaquo πάντοτε

πᾶσαν αEgraveτάρκειαν paraχοντες περισσεEcircητε ες

πᾶν paraργον ἀγαθOgraveν 9 καθς γdegγραπται

᾿ΕσκOgraveρπισεν [tm - paraδωκε alefsymBc - paraδωκεν] τοrsaquoς

πdegνησιν le δικαιοσEcircνη αEgraveτοEuml microdegνει ες τUacuteν

αlaquoνα 10 ı δcent sectπιχορηγlaquoν [alefsymtm - σπdegρmicroα

[2having-power

He-is 1But the God all favorpowerful] =grace

to-overflow unto you- in- in all- at-all-=to-abound all order-that things times

all sufficiency having (that)-you-all- untomay-abound

every 2work 1good just- it-has-been-as written

He-has- [He-has-given] to-thescattered

one- the righteousness of-Him remainsunto theworking-for-his-bread = needy

ages

101

Second Corinthians

102

This tells us that when we do what God asks us God is able to give us what weneed+ ldquoHow does God give us what we needrdquo1 Through His providence In verse ten in reference to what God gives Paulclaims that God - ldquosupplies seed to the sowerrdquo Obviously God does not createa new seed every time that a farmer needs to plant his crops The fact thatGod created a process (natural plant reproduction) and sustains that processis a means by which God provides man with food2 Through His instruction The word of God tells us that Godrsquos people are towork for their food (see II Thessalonians 36-13 Ephesians 65-9) When menfollow this instruction using the abilities God has given them to work in avery real way God is providing what they need3 Through His people Sometimes circumstances arise in which we cannotwork Perhaps a person loses their job or becomes disabled in these casesthey cannot work for their own living When these things happen there aretwo other ways that God can give us what we need

mdash The family (I Timothy 53-16 especially 48 amp 16)mdash The church (Acts 61-7 1127-30)

The Gospel of Prosperity

Many in the religious world have taken passagessuch as Second Corinthians chapter nine verseeight and suggested that the more generous we

are the more prosperous we can become (materially)Many religious organizations have filled their bank ac-counts by proclaiming such notions+ ldquoWas Paul telling the Corinthians that generositywould guarantee their material prosperityrdquo

1 The promise is that we will have an abundance ldquofor every good workrdquo Thatis to say we will have what we need in order to do what God wants us to2 Paul tells us that we should be content with lifersquos basics (I Timothy 68)3 In the previous chapter Paul claimed that there might be a time when theJudean saints (who were then impoverished) might be in a position where ndashldquotheir abundance also may supply your lackrdquo Doesnrsquot that show us that inspite of their generosity poverty might lay ahead of them

Chapter Nine

p46Bc - σπOgraveρον] τldquo σπεροντι καlsaquo ἄρτον

ες βρlaquoσιν [alefsym2tm - χορηγAEligσαι alefsym1Bc -

χορηγAEligσει] καlsaquo [alefsym2tm - πληθEcircναι p46alefsym1Bc -

πληθEcircνει] τUacuteν σπOgraveρον Iacutemicrolaquoν καlsaquo [p46alefsym2tm -

αEgraveξAEligσαι alefsym1Bc - αEgraveξAEligσει] τὰ [t - γεννAEligmicroατα

alefsymBcm - γενAEligmicroατα] τinfinς δικαιοσEcircνης Iacutemicrolaquoν

11 sectν παντlsaquo πλουτιζOgravemicroενοι ες πᾶσαν

ἀπλOgraveτητα yenτις[p46 - εDagger τις] κατεργάζεται

δι᾿ lemicrolaquoν εEgraveχαριστ[B - ε] αν τldquo[B omits]

Θεldquo[B - οEuml] 12 ˜τι le διακονα τinfinς λε[alefsymB1

2the 1But (one)-supplying [seed

seed-sown] to- (one)- and breadthe sowing

unto eating [may-He-supply-funds

He-will- and [may-He-multipy supply-funds]

He-will- the seed- of-you- andmultiply] sown all

[may-He- He-will- the [produceincrease increase] =fruits]

of- righteousness of-the you-all

In all-things being-enriched unto all

singleness which [if any- works-=liberality thing] out

thr- us thanksgiving to-theough

God [of-God]

The Consequences of Giving 910-15

Causing God to be Worshipped

In the text here in chapter nine Paul reminds the Cor-inthians that their gift to the saints would accom-plish two things1 Supply the needs of the saints (vs 12)2 Abound unto many thanksgivings to God

When Christians do as they should in their service toGod the result may often be that it leads others to wor-

ship and praise God themselves Inverse thirteen Paul tells the Corin-thians that others ndash ldquoGlorify God forthe obedience of your confession tothe gospel of Christrdquo

+ ldquoWhat are some ways that ourobedience to the Lord can resultin God being glorifiedrdquomdash When others follow our exampleof faithfulness themselvesmdash When unbelievers (though theyremain unconverted) acknowledgeChristiansrsquo good deeds before Godand the world (see I Peter 21112)mdash When other Christians are moti-vated to service to God by our obe-dience

103

omit]ιτουργας ταEcircτης οEgrave microOgraveνον [tm - sectστlsaquo

alefsymBc - sectστlsaquoν] προσαναπληροEumlσα τὰ

IacuteστερAEligmicroατα τlaquoν ἁγων ἀλλὰ καlsaquo

περισσεEcircουσα διὰ πολλlaquoν εEgraveχαριστιlaquo[p46

- α]ν τldquo Θεldquo[B - Χριστldquo] [B - καlsaquo] 13 διὰ

τinfinς δοκιmicroinfinς τinfinς διακονας ταEcircτης

δοξάζοντες τUacuteν ΘεUacuteν sectπlsaquo τordf Iacuteποταγordf τinfinς

ımicroολογας Iacutemicrolaquoν ες τUacute εEgraveαγγdegλιον τοEuml

ΧριστοEuml καlsaquo ἁπλOgraveτητι τinfinς κοινωνας ες

αEgraveτοAacuteς καlsaquo ες πάντας 14 καlsaquo αEgraveτlaquoν δεAEligσει

Iacuteπcentρ Iacute[alefsym1B - le]microlaquoν sectπιποθοEcircντων Iacutemicroᾶς [alefsym2

- Daggerδιν] διὰ τOslashν Iacuteπερβάλλουσαν χάριν τοEuml

ΘεοEuml sectφ᾿ Iacutemicrorsaquoν 15 χάρις [alefsym2tm - δcent alefsymBc omit]

τldquo Θεldquo sectπlsaquo τordf ἀνεκδιηγAEligτƒ αEgraveτοEuml δωρεᾷ

Be- the service of-cause the

ministration this not only [is]

filling-up the

things-lacking of-the holy-ones but even=saints

abounds through much thanksgiving

to- God [Christ] [and] throughthe

of- proof of- 2service 1thisthe

glorifying the God over the submission of-the

profession of- unto the good-news of-you-all =gospel the

Christ and in-singleness of- communion unto=in-liberality the =fellowship

them and unto all and the- prayer-same-ones (offer)

on- of- [of- desiring-for you-behalf you-all us] all

[to- through the surpassing favor of-know] =grace the

God over you- 2Favor [1Yet]all =Thanks

to- God over the inexpressible 2of-Him 1giftthe

ldquoAll saintsrdquo or ldquoAll menrdquo

In verse thirteen many translations have inserted initalics at the end of the verse the word ldquomenrdquo As aresult some have argued that this would indicate

that the church is described as providing benevolent as-sistance to ldquoall menrdquo

+ ldquoDoes the Bible Authorize theChurch to Provide Financial Re-lief to Anyone or Saints Onlyrdquo1 The collection is described as ndashldquoFor the saintsrdquo (I Corinthians 161)2 It is referred to as ndash ldquoMinisteringto the saintsrdquo (II Corinthians 91)3 All examples of the collectionbeing used concern its distributionto Christians (Acts 61 1127-30 ITimothy 58-16)4 As individuals we are obligatedto help all as we have opportunity(Galatians 610)

ldquoHis Indescribable Giftrdquo

After urg-ing theCorinth-

ian saints to bediligent in theirgiving Paulpraises God

Himself for the gift He has given tomankind In verse fifteen he de-clares ndash ldquoThanks be to God for Hisindescribable giftrdquo Consider for amoment the grandeur of this ldquoinde-scribable giftrdquo

104

Second Corinthians

mdash God became man (I Timothy 316)mdash He humbled Himself to live among us (Philippians 25-7)mdash He submitted Himself to persecution (I Peter 221-24)mdash He submitted Himself to death (Philippians 28 Hebrews 29)mdash He offers man the hope of eternal life with Him (Titus 34-7)

105

Chapter Nine

Chapter Nine Review

1 Explain what Paul means by saying it would beldquosuperfluousrdquo for him to write to them concern-ing the ministering to the saints

2 What had the Corinthianrsquos zeal done for the ldquoma-jorityrdquo of churches who had learned of it

3 What had Paul done to prevent the Corinthiansbeing embarrassed

4 Explain what is meant by ldquosparingrdquo and ldquobountifulrdquo sowing5 List at least four aspects of service to God in which it may be said ldquowe

will reap what we sowrdquo6 What is the practice referred to by some churches as ldquopurposingrdquo7 List three reasons we must question the scriptural authority for such

a practice8 What is Thayerrsquos definition of the word translated ldquopurposesrdquo in verse

seven9 What three factors indicate to us that Paul is not promising the Corin-

thians material prosperity10 Is the church authorized to extend benevolence to non-Christians

from the collection Why or why not11 What was the faithfulness of the Corinthians causing with respect to

God12 How may we do the same13 List three characteristics of Godrsquos ldquoindescribablerdquo gift

Second Corinthians

106

3myself 1Now 2I Paul admonish

you- thro- of- [meekness]all ugh the

and fairness of-=gentleness the

of-Christ who accord- (the)-face indeed (is)-ing-to =appearance humble

in you- being- but I-am- unto [thro-all absent bold ugh]

you- 2I-ask 1but ndash not being- to-be-boldall present

in- con- which I-acc- to-be- overthe fidence ount daring

some the- accounting us as 2accord-ones ing-to

3(the)- 1walkingflesh

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R T E N T E N T E N T E N T E N

Outline

I Paulrsquos Boldness (1012)II Spiritual Warfare (103-6)III Criticism of Paul (107-11)IV The Scope of Paulrsquos Authority (1012-18)

Paulrsquos Boldness 1012

The Meekness and Gentleness of Christ

Paul begins chapter ten with an appeal to them for obedience He claimsto make this appeal with (or through) the meekness and gentleness ofChrist The Greek philoso-

pher Aristotle (384-322 BC) in hiswork named for his father calledNicomachean Ethics discusses bothof the words Paul uses in referenceto Christ While by no means aninspired writer his words help us tounderstand the general usage ofthese words in ancient timesldquoMeeknessrdquo mdash praotetos(πρᾳOgraveτητος) ndash Spiros Zodiates writesndash ldquohellippraotes according to Aristotleis the middle stand ing between twoextremes getting angry without rea-sonhellip and not getting angry at allhellip Therefore praotes is getting an-gry at the right time in the rightmeasure and for the right reason(p 1210 commenting on Bk II 7)ldquoGentlenessrdquo mdash epieikeias(sectπιεικεας) ndash The basic meaning of this

II Corinthians 1012

1 ΑEgraveτUacuteς δcent sectγ ΠαEumlλος παρακαλlaquo

Iacutemicroᾶς διὰ τinfinς [alefsym2tm - πρᾳOgraveτητος alefsym1Bc -

πραpoundτητος] καlsaquo sectπιεικε [alefsym omits]ας τοEuml

ΧριστοEuml ˘ς κατὰ πρOgraveσωπον microcentν ταπε[alefsym

omits]ινUacuteς sectν Iacutemicrorsaquoν ἀπν δcent θαρρlaquo ες[B - δι᾿]

Egravemicroᾶς 2 δdegοmicroαι δdeg τUacute microOslash παρν θαρρinfinσαι

τordf πεποιθAEligσει radic λογζοmicroαι τολmicroinfinσαι sectπ

τινας τοAacuteς λογιζοmicrodegνους lemicroᾶς hellipς κατὰ

σάρκα περιπατοEumlντας

107

Second Corinthians

word carries with it the idea of fairness Thayer defines it ndash ldquomildness gentle-ness fairnesshellipsweet reasonablenesshelliprdquo (p 238) Aristotle uses a form ofthis word in defining the ldquoequitable manrdquo ndash ldquoHe is one who by deliberatechoice has taught himself the habit of doing equitable things who is not astickler for his rights to the disadvantage of others but refrains from pressinghis claims even when he has the law on his siderdquo (The Ethics of AritstotlePenguin Books J A K Thomson p 16768 ndash Bk V Ch 10)

+ ldquoWhat are some examples of Christ exercising the middle ground be-tween uncontrolled anger and indifferencerdquomdash Casting the money changers out of the temple (Mark 1115-18)mdash Remaining silent in the face of false accusations (Matthew 2659-63a)mdash Showing patience to his worldly minded disciples (Matthew 2020-28)mdash Delaying His coming to allow for the repentance of sinners (II Peter 39)

+ ldquoWhat are some examples of Christ choosing not to demand His rightseven when the law was on His siderdquomdash Dying for the sins of mankind though He Himself was innocent (I Peter221-25)mdash Paying the temple tax though He should have been exempt as a son of theKing (Matthew 1724-27)mdash Pleading to God for the forgiveness of His executioners (Luke 2334)

The Time for Boldness

In verse two Paul expresses his hope that when hecomes to them he will not have to be bold with themto the degree that he expects he will need to be Just

before this he appears to be referring to a criticism thatsome had offered of him that he was bold when awayfrom them but humble when face to face with them

+ ldquoWhen is it important for Christians to be lsquoboldrsquordquomdash When facing temptation (I Peter 589) (Note this is not the same aspride See I Corinthians 10 1213)mdash When facing falsehood (Galatians 21112)mdash When speaking the truth (Philippians 112-14) (Note This is not thesame as apprasiveness rather simply a confidence in Godrsquos word)mdash When dealing with the rebellious (I Corinthians 421)mdash When dealing with the divisive (Titus 31011)

108

Chapter Ten

109

Looking at the Flesh Alone

Verse two ends with a statement regarding those criti-cal of Paul It states that they viewed him ndash ldquohellipas ifwe walked according to the fleshrdquo His critics were

disregarding both his intent (to help them spiritually) andhis authority (as an apostle of Jesus Christ) Two otherwell known passages in Scripture teach this same thingThe first is John 721-24 where Jesus rebukes the people

for misjudging Him The second is I Samuel 166-12 where Samuel misjudgesthe sons of Jesse with regard to whom the Lord had chosen to be king

+ ldquoWhat are some ways that we can be guilty of looking at others as ifthey walked in the flesh alonerdquomdash Judging someone based upon their financial status (James 21-4)mdash Judging someone based upon their physical attractiveness (I Peter 33-4)mdash Judging someone based upon their race (Colossians 39-11)

Spiritual Warfare 103-6

The Wars that Godrsquos People Face

In verse four the Apostle speaks of ldquoour warfarerdquo Somemight not have considered the extent to which theChristian life is a battle Although the gospel is de-

scribed as ldquothe gospel of peacerdquo (Romans 1015 Ephesians615) Jesusplainly declaredthat following

Him would in some cases createconflict (See Matthew 1034-38)Consider a few ways in which theChristian life may be thought of asa battle

bull Christians battle the flesh(Romans 85-8)bull Christians battle with them-selves (Romans 721-24)bull Christians battle against theforces of Satan (I Peter 58)

II Corinthians 1034

3(the)- 1walking 2in 3(the)- 1for-flesh flesh (though)

walking not accord- (the)-ing-to flesh

(do)-we-war 2the 1for weap- of-ons the

[campaign army] of-us not=warfare

fleshly but able by- God to=mighty the

cast-down strongholds

σάρκα περιπατοEumlντας 3 sectν σαρκlsaquo γὰρ

περιπατοEumlντες οEgrave κατὰ σάρκα

στρατευOgravemicroεθα 4 τὰ γὰρ πλα τinfinς [p46Btcm

- στρατεας alefsym - στρατας] lemicrolaquoν οEgrave

σαρκικά ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τldquo Θεldquo πρUacuteς

καθα[alefsym - ε]ρεσιν Ugraveχυρωmicroάτων

accountings casting-down even every high-=reasonings thing

exalting- with- the knowledge of- Goditself reference-to the

and lead-captive every mind unto the=thought

obedience of- Christ and in 2readi-the ness

1having to-execute- all disobedience whenjustice=punish

may-be- 3of- 1the 2obed-filled-up you-all ience

Second Corinthians

The Power of the Christianrsquos Weapons

There are a number of things which the Apostle sug-gests that the Christianrsquos weapons can accomplishThe word translated ldquomightyrdquo in verse four could

communicate either the idea of power or ability Con-sider what is mentioned

They can pull downhellipldquoStrongholdsrdquo mdash ochuromaton(Ugraveχυρωmicroάτων) ndash ldquoOnly here in the NewTestament From echo ldquotoholdrdquohellipThe word is not common inclassical Greek but occurs fre-quently in the Apocrypha In its usehere there may lie a reminiscenceof the rock-forts on the coast ofPaulrsquos native Cilicia which werepulled down by the Romans in theirattacks on the Cilician piratesPompey (106 BC - 44 BC) inflictcda crushing defeat upon their navyoff the rocky stronghold ofCoracesium on the confines ofCilicia and Pisidia rdquo (Vincent VolIII pg 340)They can cast downhellipldquoArgumentsrdquo mdash logismous (λογισmicroοAacuteς) ndash ldquo It is reason in its concrete form inthe consciousness and as worked out in actionhellip In 2 Cor 104 hellip[it] reflectsan overestimation of reasonhellip The logismoi are the thoughts of arrogant rea-son which can be subdued not by reasonrsquos own weapons but only by Godrsquospower as this is set forth at the crossrdquo (Kittel ab pg 536)hellipAnd everyhellipldquoHigh Thingrdquo mdash hupsoma (Iumlψωmicroα) ndash ldquohigh thingndash So it ought to be trans-lated Romans 839 A dlstinct Greek word from that in Epheslans 318 ldquoheightrdquoand Revelatlon 2116 which belongs to God and heaven from whence we recelvenothing hurtful But ldquohigh thlngrdquo is not so much ldquoheightrdquo as something madehigh and belongs to those regions of air where the powers of darkness ldquoexaltthemselvesrdquo against Christ and us (Epheslans 22 612 II Thessalonians 24)rdquo(Jamieson Fausset amp Brown pg 314)

II Corinthians 1056

5 λογισmicroοAacuteς καθαιροEumlντες καlsaquo πᾶν Iumlψωmicroα

sectπαιρOgravemicroενον κατὰ τinfinς γνasympσεως τοEuml ΘεοEuml

καlsaquo αχmicroαλωτζοντες πᾶν νOgraveηmicroα ες τOslashν

IacuteπακοOslashν τοEuml ΧριστοEuml 6 καlsaquo sectν bullτοmicroƒ

paraχοντες sectκδικinfinσαι πᾶσαν παρακοAEligν ˜ταν

πληρωθordf Iacutemicroldquoν le IacuteπακοAElig

110

Chapter Ten

Captivity to Christ

The aim of spiritual warfare according to verse five isto bring ldquoevery thought into captivity to the obedi-ence to Christrdquo While coming to Christ does (in some

ways) set one atliberty (John830-32 James212) it alsoputs them into

captivity to Christ Consider whatthe Bible teaches in this regardmdash The one freed from sin becomesa slave to righteousness (Romans61718)mdash The Christian has been boughtwith a price (I Corinthians 61920)mdash The child of God has been re-deemed by Christrsquos blood (I Peter117-19)mdash Those in Christ have a duty toobey (Luke 175-10)

Criticism of Paul

107-11

Paulrsquos Speech and

Bodily Pressence

In verses ten Paul appears toquote from his critics with re-gard to himself declaring that

while his writing is ldquoweighty andpowerfulrdquo his actual presence isldquoweak and contemptiblerdquo The Biblegives us no descriptions of Paulrsquosphysical makeup with the possibleexception of the fact that he mayhave had a problem with his vision(see Galatians 413-15 Galatians611) One ancient historical source

7 τὰ κατὰ πρOgraveσωπον βλdegπετε εDagger τις [B -

δοκεrsaquo] πdegποιθεν[B - αι] bullαυτldquo Χρ[B - ε]ιστοEuml

εpermilναι τοEumlτο λογιζdegσθω πάλιν [tm - ἀφ᾿

p46alefsymB c - sectφ᾿] bullαυτοEuml ˜τι καθς αEgraveτUacuteς [p46 -

ı] ΧριστοEuml[p46 - ος] [tm - οIumlτω alefsymBc -

οIumlτως] καlsaquo lemicroε[alefsym omits]rsaquoς [tm - ΧριστοEuml

alefsymB c - omit] 8 sectάν [alefsymtcm - τε p46B omit] γὰρ

[alefsym2tm - καlsaquo alefsym1Bc - omit] περισσOgraveτερOgraveν τι

καυχAEligσω[alefsym - ο]microαι [p46 adds καυχAEligσοmicroαι] περlsaquo

τinfinς sectξουσας lemicrolaquoν prodς paraδωκεν ı ΚEcircριος [alefsym2tm

- lemicrorsaquoν p46alefsym1Bc - omit] ες οκοδοmicroAEligν καlsaquo οEgraveκ

ες καθαρεσιν Iacutemicrolaquoν οEgraveκ ασχυνθAEligσοmicroαι 9

gtνα microOslash δOgraveξω hellipς ἂν sectκφοβε[alefsym omits]rsaquoν Egravemicroᾶς

διὰ τlaquoν sectπιστολlaquoν 10 ˜τι ΑA [alefsym2tm - microcentν

sectπιστολα alefsym1Bc - sectπιστολα microcentν] [tm - φησ

alefsymc - φησν B - φασν] βαρεrsaquoαι καlsaquo σχυρα

le δcent παρουσα τοEuml σasympmicroατος ἀσθενAEligς καlsaquo ı

λOgraveγος sectξουθ[B - δ]ενηmicrodegνος 11 τοEumlτο

the- accord- (the)-face- you-all- If any-things ing-to =appearance see one

[thinks] has- [to-have- himself of-Christpersuaded persuaded]

to-be this account again [from

over] himself that just- he-(is)as

[the] of- [Christ] [thus]Christ

even we-(are) [of-Christ]

3if [2even] 1For

[and] over-and-above some-=more-abundantly what

I-should- [I-will- [I-will-boast] con-boast boast] cerning

the authority ofwhich 3gave 1the 2Lordus

[to-us] unto building- and notup=edification

unto the-casting- of- not I-will-be-down you-all ashamed

in- not I-should- as if to-terrify you-order-that think all

thr- the letters Be- 2the [1indeedough cause

3letters letters indeed] [he-says

they-say] (are)- and strongheavy

thebut pressence of- body (is)-without- and thethe strength

word (is)-contemptible This

111

being- in- work 3not 1For 2I- [we-present the =deed dare dare]

to-judge or compare-with

ourselves [with-some] of-the-ones

them- commending but those inselves

them- them- measuring andselves selves

comparing-with them- them-selves selves

not [they-understand

they-will- 2we 1Butunderstand]

παρOgraveντες τldquo paraργƒ 12 οEgrave γὰρ τολmicrolaquomicroεν[B

omits] sectγ[B1 - ν]κρ[B - ε]rsaquoναι ŭ συγ[B1 - ν]κρ[B

- ε]rsaquoναι bullαυτοEcircς [tm - τισι alefsymBc - τισιν] τlaquoν

bullαυτοAacuteς συνιστανOgraveντων ἀλλὰ αEgraveτοlsaquo sectν

bullαυτοrsaquoς bullαυτοAacuteς[alefsym1 omits] microετροEumlντες καlsaquo

συγ[B1 - ν]κρ[B - ε]νοντες bullαυτοAacuteς bullαυτοrsaquoς

οEgrave [tm - συνιοEumlσιν p46alefsymc - συνιᾶσιν B -

συνειασιν alefsym1 - συνισᾶσιν] 13 lemicroεrsaquoς δcent [tm

Second Corinthians

claims that Paul was ndash ldquohellipof a lowstature bald (or shaved) on thehead crooked thighs handsomelegs hollow-eyed had a crookednose full of gracehelliprdquo (Acts of Paulamp Thecla 17) The validity of thisclaim is uncertain

With regard to his speech Paulhimself confirms the charges of hiscritics in his first epistle to CorinthIn Chapter two verses two throughfive he claimshellipmdash He did not come to them with ldquoexcellence of speechrdquo (vs 1)mdash He was among them in ldquoweakness fear and in much tremblingrdquo (vs 3)mdash His preaching was not with ldquopersuasive words of human wisdomrdquo (vs 4)Yet in the same passage Paul explains the reason for thishellip1 He had determined to give them only Christ (vs 2)2 He sought to demonstrate the Spirit (vs 4)3 He wanted them to gain faith in God not man (vs 5)

The Scope of Paulrsquos Authority 1012-18

Spiritual Comparisons

The criticsof Paulappear to

have beenguilty (as Paulcharges them inverse twelve) of

ldquomeasuring themselves by them-selvesrdquo and ldquocomparing themselvesamong themselvesrdquo+ ldquoHow can we be guilty of thisrdquomdash By determining our standingbefore God based upon othersmdash By excusing our sin based uponthe sins of othersmdash By wanting to be more highlyesteemed than others

II Corinthians 1011

he-must- such-a-one that what we-are in-account the

word by letters being- such evenabsent

λογιζdegσθω ı τοιοEumlτος ˜τι οAcircο sectσmicroεν τldquo

λOgraveγƒ δι᾿ sectπιστολlaquoν ἀπOgraveντες τοιοEumlτοι καlsaquo

II Corinthians 1012

112

Chapter Ten

113

The Sphere of Paulrsquos Authority

In verse thirteen Paul claims that he would onlyboast ldquowithin the limits of the sphere which Godappointed usmdasha sphere which especially includes

yourdquo Theword trans-lated ldquosphererdquois the Greek

word metron (microdegτρον) meaning -ldquomeasure 1 an instrument formeasuring a a vessel for receiv-ing and determining the quantityof things whether dry or liquidb a graduated staff for measur-ing a measuring rod c) prover-bially the rule or standard ofjudgment 2 determined extentportion measured off measure orlimit a) the required measure thedue fit measurerdquo (Thayer p408) Paul is discussing the factthat he had a special responsi-bility to the brethren in Corinth

ldquoWhy did Paul have a specialresponsibility to the Corinth-iansrdquomdash As an Apostle of Jesus Christ hepossessed a special authority overthe church in general (Ephesians220)mdash Since the Corinthians were Gen-tiles he held particular authorityover them (Galatians 289)mdash He had established the churchin Corinth (Acts 18)

- οEgraveχι p 46alefsymBc - οEgraveκ] ες τὰ ἄmicroετρα

καυχησOgravemicroεθα ἀλλὰ κατὰ τUacute microdegτρον τοEuml

κανOgraveνος ο sectmicrodegρισεν lemicrorsaquoν ı ΘεOgraveς microdegτρου

sectφικdegσθαι ἄχρι καlsaquo Iacutemicrolaquoν 14 οEgrave[B omits] γὰρ

hellipς [B - hellipς γὰρ] microOslash sectφικνοEcircmicroενοι ες Iacutemicroᾶς

Iacuteπερεκτε[alefsym omits]νοmicroεν bullαυτοEcircς ἄχρι

γὰρ[alefsym1 omits] καlsaquo Iacutemicrolaquoν sectφθάσαmicroεν sectν τldquo

εEgraveαγγελƒ τοEuml ΧριστοEuml 15 οEgraveκ ες τὰ

ἄmicroετρα καυχasympmicroενοι sectν ἀλλοτροις κOgraveποις

sectλπδα δcent paraχοντες αEgraveξανοmicrodegνης τinfinς πστεως

Iacute[B - le]microlaquoν sectν Iacutemicrorsaquoν microεγαλυνθinfinναι κατὰ τUacuteν

κανOgraveνα le[alefsym - Iacute]microlaquoν ες περισσε[alefsym omits]αν

16 ες τὰ Iacuteπερdegκεινα Iacutemicrolaquoν εEgraveαγγελσασθαι

οEgraveκ sectν ἀλλοτρƒ κανOgraveνι ες τὰ szligτοιmicroα

καυχAEligσασθαι

[not] unto the- without-things measure

will-boast but accord- the measure of-ing-to the

canon which 3He- 4to-us1the2God of-(the)-=rule divided measure

to-reach until even you-all 2not 1For=as-far-as-you-all

3as [as for] not reaching unto you-all

(do)-we-over-strech ourselves 2until

1for even you- we-came in theall

good-news of- Christ not unto the-=gospel the things

with- boasting in 2belonging- 1troublesout-measure to-others

3hope 1but 2having being- of- faithincreased the

of- [of-us] in you- to-be- accord- theyou-all all magnified ing-to

canon of-us [of- unto abundance=rule you-all]

unto the- beyond you- to-preach-good-things all news-for-ourselves

not in 2belonging-to- 1canons unto the- readyothers =rules things

to-boast

Second Corinthians

114

to-boast 2the- 1But boasting in (the)-one Lord

let-him- 2not 1For the- [the- for] himselfboast one one

[commending]

that- [is approved

approved is] [but]

whom the Lord commends

καυχAEligσασθαι 17 ı δcent καυχasympmicroενος sectν Κυρƒ

καυχάσθω 18 οEgrave γὰρ ı [alefsym1 - ı γὰρ] bullαυτUacuteν

[tm - συνιστlaquoν p46alefsymBc - συνωιστάνων]

sectκεrsaquoνος [tm - sectστι δOgraveκιmicroος alefsym2Bc - sectστιν

δOgraveκιmicroος alefsym1 - δOgraveκιmicroος sectστιν] [alefsymtm - ἀλλ᾿

Bc - ἀλλὰ] ˘ν ı ΚEcircριος συνστησιν

Glory in the Lord

In verse seventeen Paul declares - ldquohe who glorieslet him glory in the LORDrdquo This is a reference toJeremiah 92324 which reads ndash ldquoThus says the

LORD lsquoLet not the wise man glory in his wisdom Letnot the mighty[man] glory inhis might Nor

let the rich [man] glory in hisriches But let him who gloriesglory in this That he under-stands and knows Me That I amthe LORD exercising loving-kindness judgment and righ-teousness in the earth For inthese I delightrsquo says the LORDrdquo(NKJV)

In verse eighteen Paul thengoes on to remind the brethrenthat what is ultimately importantis not human but Divine ldquocommendationrdquo The word translated ldquocom-mendsrdquo is the Greek word sunistemi (συνστηmicroι) meaning literally - ldquohelliptostand withhelliprdquo (Thayer p 605)

+ ldquoUnder what circumstances and under what conditions can a Chris-tian hope that the Lord will commend their behaviorrdquomdash If we serve and follow the Lord we will be able to be where the Lord isand receive honor form the Father (John 1226)mdash Those who have done the will of God will hear ldquowell donerdquo on the dayof judgement (Matthew 252123)mdash On the day of judgement praise will come from God (I Corinthians45)mdash It is commendable before God to wait patiently while suffering fordoing good (I Peter 220)mdash When our faith is tested by trial and found true it will result inldquopraise honor and glory at the revelation of Jesus Christrdquo (I Peter 17)

Chapter Ten

115

Chapter Ten Review

1 Explain how Aristotle defines the words trans-lated ldquomeeknessrdquo and ldquogentlenessrdquo in verse one

2 What are some ways that Jesus demonstratedboth of these tendencies during his life time

3 When is it appropriate for a Christian to be ldquoboldrdquo 4 Define the phrase ldquocarnal weaponsrdquo 5 Define the phrase ldquospiritual weaponsrdquo

6 Based on the definition of Jamieson Fausset and Brown does theword translated ldquohigh thingrdquo in verse five mean something naturallyhigh or something made high by men

7 In what ways must men be ldquocaptiverdquo to the obedience of Christ8 Does this conflict with the idea of ldquoliberty in Christrdquo9 What are some ways that we can be guilty of judging according to

appearance10 What three factors indicate to us that Paul is not promising the

Corinthians material prosperity11 Based on First Corinthians chapter two what are some of the reasons

Paul appears to have deliberately deemphasized the excellence ofhis speech while among them

12 What did Paul fear that he might have to do when he came to them13 Did Paul have the right to instruct and correct the Corinthians

Give Scriptures which demonstrate this14 What are some ways that people can be guilty of ldquomeasuring them-

selves by themselvesrdquo15 Define the word translated sphere in verses thirteen through fif-

teen16 Explain how Paulrsquos authority extended to the Corinthians Give

Scriptures17 From where is Paulrsquos reference in verse seventeen drawn18 What are some ways in which the Lord will ldquocommendrdquo the faithful19 What are some conditions of these commendations

Chapter Ten

116

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R E L E V E N E L E V E N E L E V E N E L E V E N E L E V E N

Outline

I Paulrsquos Zeal amp Fear for the Corinthians (111-4)II Rebuke of the False Apostles (115-15)III Foolish Boasting (1116-21)IV Paulrsquos Sufferings (1122-33)

Paulrsquos Zeal amp Fear for the Corinthians 111-4

What is Paulrsquos Folly

Paul begins chapter eleven by asking the brethren in Corinth to bear withhim in ldquoa little follyrdquo We often use the word folly in reference to an errorPaulrsquos meaning is much different The word translated folly is the Greek

word aphrosune (ἀφροσEcircν˙) defined as ndash ldquo1) foolishness folly senselessness2) thoughtlessness recklessnessrdquo(Thayer pg 90) The AmericanStandard Version and the NewAmerican Standard Version renderthis - ldquoFoolishnessrdquo Later in thechapter Paul rebukes the falseapostles (vss 5-15) and claims thatthe Corinthians had been puttingup with fools who had sought toturn them away from the truth (vss1920) Paul isnrsquot saying he is aboutto err rather he is about to play thefool They had received those who had foolishly exhibited self praise To showthe error of this he acts as a fool

1 Οφελον ἀνεχεσθdeg microου micro[B - ε]ικρUacuteν

[tm - τordf ἀφροσEcircν˙ p 46v idalefsymBc - τι

ἀφροσEcircνης] ἀλλὰ καlsaquo ἀνdegχε[alefsym - ασ]σθdeg

microου 2 ζηλlaquo γὰρ Iacutemicroᾶς ΘεοEuml ζAEligλƒ

O-That you-all-were 3me (a)-littlebearing-with

[1in-the 2thought-less- someness = foolishness

thought-less- but even you-all-are-[you-all-mustness=foolishness] bearing-with bear-with]

me

II Corinthians 111

117

leρmicroοσάmicroην γὰρ Iacutemicroᾶς bullνlsaquo ἀνδρlsaquo παρθdegνον

ἁγνOslashν παραστinfinσαι τldquo Χριστldquo

Second Corinthians

Godly Jealousy

As the one who first established the church in Cor-inth Paul claims that he felt jealousy towardsthem That is to say he did not want them to

betray the faith and direct their affections to anotherSavior Although we usually use the word jealousy in anegative light in this verse Paul claims that his is ldquogodlyjealousyrdquo

+ ldquoWhen is jealousy appropri-atersquordquomdash God is a jealous God (Deuter-onomy 57-10)mdash God has the right to demand thatour affection be directed only to-wards Him (Deuteronomy 61415)mdash Those in a marriage relationshiphave the right to be jealous regard-ing the affection of their mate(Numbers 511-31)+ ldquoWhen is jealousy inappropriatersquordquomdash When it is towards that to which we have no claim (ie other peoplersquosthings status or mates)mdash When it leads us to sin in having poor attitudes actions or languagemdash When it is irrational unfounded and based on constant suspicion andmistrust (See I Corinthians 137)

Betrothed to Christ

In verse two Paul claims that he has ldquobetrothedrdquo theCorinthians to Christ There are a number of Scrip-tures which use the metaphor of Godrsquos people as the

bride and either God (in general in the Old Testament) orChrist (in particular in the New Testament) as the bride-groom Consider a few such referencesmdash God promised the Israelites a relationship of betrothal

(Hosea 216-20)mdash The Christian is dead to the Old Law and married to Christ (Romans 74)mdash The church is the betrothed virgin awaiting the coming of the bridegroomand the marriage feast (Revelation 196-9 212 Ephesians 525-27]mdash Heaven is the marriage feast (Matthew 221-14)

II Corinthians 112

118

of- 2I-am- 1For you- 2of-God 1with-me zealous=jealous all (the)-zeal

2I-have- 1For you- to- husband 3virginbetrothed all one

2(a)-pure 1to-present to-the Christ

2I-fear 1Yet lest some- as the serpent [Evehow

he-deceived he-deceived Eve

he-deceived you- in the craft- of-himall] iness

[so] 4may-be- 1the2thoughtscorrupted

3of- from the singleness [and theyou-all =simplicity

purity] of-the-(things)

[in the Christ in Christ

Chapter Eleven

119

Simplicity in Christ

The message of Christ is simple Although thereare difficult things (II Peter 314-16) and thingswhich take maturity to discern (Hebrews 512-14)

the basic message of the gospel is simple In verse threethe Apostle expresses his fear that the Corinthians mightbe drawn away from the ldquoSimplicity that is in ChristrdquoToday many have done this very thing Men have

developed elaborate theologies and rituals which blind people to the simpletruths of the gospel Paul expresses concern (and we must share his concerntoday) that the brethren not be ledaway from this simplicity Considerjust a taste of this simplicity

bull God became flesh and offeredHimself to die on the cross in orderthan man could have the hope ofeternal life with Him (I Tim 316)bull To accept this gift of life one must

1 Hear the Gospel (Romans1017)2 Believe that Jesus Christ isthe Son of God (Romans10910)3 Turn from sin and turn toobedience to God (Acts 2620)4 Confess Jesus before others(Matthew 103233)5 Be immersed in water as asymbol of being buried with Christ in order that your sins might be forgiven(Acts 238 Galatians 32627)

bull Once in a relationship with Christ Christians work together in congregationsled by leaders appointed based on scriptural qualifications (Hebrews 102425Titus 15)

II Corinthians 113

3 φοβοEumlmicroαι δcent microAElig πως hellipς ı ˆφις [tm - ΕIumlαν

sectξηπάτησεν alefsym2Bc - sectξηπάτησεν ΕIumlαν alefsym1

- sectξηπάτησεν Iacutemicrorsaquoν] sectν τordf πανουργᾳ αEgraveτοEuml

[tm - οIumlτω p46alefsymBc omits] φθαρordf τὰ νοAEligmicroατα

Iacutemicrolaquoν ἀπUacute τinfinς ἁπλOgraveτητος [p46alefsym1Bc - καlsaquo τinfinς

ἁγνOgraveτητος alefsym2 brackets tm omits] τinfinς

[p46Btcm - ες τUacuteν ΧριστOgraveν alefsym - ες ΧριστOgraveν]

4 ε microcentν γὰρ ı sectρχOgravemicroενος ἄλλον ΧριστOgraveν

κηρEcircσσει ν οEgraveκ sectκηρEcircξαmicroεν ŭ πνεEumlmicroα szligτερον

λαmicroβάνετε ˘ οEgraveκ sectλάβετε ŭ εEgraveαγγdegλιον

szligτερον [alefsym adds szligτερον but marks out] ˘ οEgraveκ

sectδdegξασθε καλlaquoς [t - plusmnνεχεσθε alefsymm -

ἀνεχεσθε p46Bc - ἀνdegχεσθε]

Second Corinthians

bull Christians express their worship to God by1 Singing (Ephesians 519)2 Praying (Acts 242)3 The study of Scripture (Acts 207)4 Giving on the first day of the week to provide for the work of thecongregation (I Corinthians 1612)5 On the first day of the week observing a memorial meal of juice andunleavened bread in memory of Christrsquos body and blood (I Cor 1123-26)

Preaching Another Jesus

In verse four PauI expresses his fear that the Corinth-ians might heed those who would preach ldquoanotherJesusrdquo to them This is a danger today just as it was

in Paulrsquos time What are some ways that a person might ldquopreachanother Jesusrdquo

bull By teaching things about Jesuswhich conflict with Scripture ( egVirgin birth deity of Christ hatredof sin etc)bull By teaching things which conflictwith Jesusrsquo teaching (eg Baptismone church permanence of mar-riage etc)bull By teaching things without Bibli-cal authority (eg Social gospelevangelism schemes etc)

II Corinthians 114

2if mdash 1For thecoming another Jesusone

pre- whom not we-have- or 2spirit 1differentaches preached

you-all- which not you-all- or good-newsreceive have received =gospel

different which not

you-all- well [you-all-werehave-accepted bearing-with-it

you-all-bear-(it)]

120

2I-count

1For [but] nothing to-have- the most-come-behind eminent

apostles 3if 1But2even (an)-idiot in-=unskilled the

in- but not in- know- but in all-word the ledge things

[having-been-made- manifest

having-manifested in all- unto you-(ourselves) things all

[but in all- unto you- Or sinthingshellip all]

Chapter Eleven

Rebuke of the False Apostles 115-15

Unskilled in Word - But Not in Knowledge

In verse six Paul claims of himself that he is ldquountrainedrdquoin speech The word translated ldquountrainedrdquo is theGreek word idiotes (διasympτης) translated by Moulton as

mdash ldquoProperly one in private life one devoid of special learn-ing or gifts a plain personrdquo (Moulton pg 199) Our En-

glish word ldquoidiotrdquo is derived from this word and properly refers to ndash ldquoA Privateor non-professional person also and unlearned and ignorant personhelliprdquo (TheNew Century Dictionary Vol I pg789) Paul declares that he is justa ldquocommon manrdquo in matters ofspeech but not in matters of knowl-edge

We remember that in the previ-ous chapter he had repeated thecharge made against him that ldquohisspeech is contemptiblerdquo (1010)When we look to Scripture and seein Paul one so active in publicspeaking it may be hard for us tounderstand why he would say ofhimself that he is ldquoan idiot (ie aplain person)rdquo with respect tospeech In the ancient world(espcially among the Greeks) mucheffort had bee devoted to the mat-ter of how to speak Corax of Syra-cuse in 466 BC had developed rules and classifications of dividing a properspeech in into five well defined parts Aristotle in the 320rsquos BC had produceda detailed study of the art of speaking entitled Rhetoric After the time of Paula man named Hermogenes of Tarsus coming from Paulrsquos own hometown wouldproduce a complete digest of works on public speaking spanning a centuryand a half (Encyclopedea Britanica Vol 19 247) Paul from all we know hadno training in these areas

On the other hand Paul does seem to have had formal training in Scrip-ture In Acts 223 Paul claims to have ldquohellipbrought up in this city [ie Tarsus]at the feet of Gamalielhelliprdquo Tarsus was the third major university city of theancient world behind only Athens and Alexandria (Halleyrsquos Bible Handbookpg 568)

II Corinthians 1156

5 λογζοmicroαι

γὰρ [B - δcent] microηδcentν Iacuteστερηκdegναι τlaquoν Iacuteπcentρλ[B

- ε]αν ἀποστOgraveλων 6 ε δcent καlsaquo διasympτης τldquo

λOgraveγƒ ἀλλ᾿ οEgrave τordf γνasympσει ἀλλ᾿ sectν παντlsaquo

[alefsym2tm - φανερωθdegντες alefsym1Bc -

φανερasympσαντες] sectν πᾶσιν ες Iacutemicroᾶς [p46 omits

ἀλλ᾿ sectν παντlsaquo ες Iacutemicroᾶς] 7 ŭ ἁmicroαρταν

121

ἀλλ᾿ sectν παντlsaquoες Iacutemicroᾶς] 7 ŭ ἁmicroαρταν

sectποησα sectmicroαυτUacuteν ταπεινlaquoν να Iacutemicroεrsaquoς

Iacuteψωθinfinτε ˜τι δωρεὰν τUacute τοEuml ΘεοEuml

εEgraveαγγdegλιον εEgraveηγγελισάmicroην Iacutemicrorsaquoν 8 ἄλλας

sectκ[alefsym omits]κλησας sectσEcircλησα λαβν Ugraveψasympνιον

πρUacuteς τOslashν Iacutemicrolaquoν διακοναν 9 καlsaquo παρν

πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς καlsaquo Iacuteστερηθες οEgrave κατενάρκησα

[p46tm - οEgraveδενOgraveς alefsymBc - οEgraveθενOgraveς] τUacute γὰρ

Iacuteστdegρηmicroά microου προσανεπλAEligρωσαν οB

ἀδελφο sectλθOgraveντες ἀπUacute Μακε[alefsym - αι]δονας

καlsaquo sectν παντlsaquo ἀβαρinfin [alefsym2tm - Iacutemicrorsaquoν sectmicroαυτUacuteν

p46alefsym1Bc - sectmicroαυτUacuteν Iacutemicrorsaquoν] sectτAEligρησα καlsaquo τηρAEligσω

Second Corinthians

122

Preaching the Gospel Free of Charge

Paul asks the Corinthians in verse seven (somewhatmockingly) if the fact that he had preached the gos-pel to them free of charge had been a sin against

them This may seem a strange question to us today in anage when many religious leaders have been shamed fortheir greed andmaterialism Itmay help us to

understand Paulrsquos words if we con-sider the constant challenges to hisauthority as an Apostle From thevery beginning of the gospel theApostles of Christ had been autho-rized to receive support in theirpreaching of the gospel (Matthew105- 14) Paul himself had taughtthe Corinthians that it was fittingthat - ldquoThose who preach the gos-pel should live from the gospelrdquo (ICorinthians 914) To Paulrsquos criticsin Corinth one of the most visibleareas in which he differed fromother Apostles was the fact that inCorinth Paul had not accepted sup-port from them While he had re-ceived support from other churches(vss 89) and provided for himself(I Corinthians 412) in Corinth hehad not used this right Why Heexplains in this very chapter thathe had done so that they might beexalted (vs 11) that he might notbe burdensome (vs 9) and out oflove for them (vs 10)

I-have- 2myself 1humbling in- you-alldone order-that

might-be- because freely the 2of- 3Godlifted-up the

1good-news we-have-announced to-you- Other=gospel =we-have-preached all

congregations I-taxed having- provisions=churches received

to the 2of-you- 1service and being-all =ministry present

with you- and falling-short not I-have-been-=being-in-need dead-weight

[of-no-one] 2the 1for

shortcomings of-me 6they-have-been- 1the=needs filled-up

2brothers 3coming 4from 5Macedonia

even in all- (a)-burden [to-you- myself things all

myself to-you- we-have- and we-willall] guarded guard

10 paraστιν ἀλAEligθεια ΧριστοEuml sectν sectmicroο13 ˜τι le

καEcircχησις αIumlτη οEgrave σφραγAEligσεται ες sectmicrocent sectν

τοrsaquoς κλ13microασι[c adds ν] τinfinς ᾿Αχα˝ας 11 διατ13

˜τι[B omits] οEgraveκ ἀγαπlaquo Iacutemicroᾶς ı ΘεUacuteς οpermilδεν

12 ˘ δcent ποιlaquo καlsaquo ποιAEligσω να sectκκOgraveψω τOslashν

ἀφορmicroOslashν τlaquoν θελOgraveντων ἀφορmicroAEligν να sectν

καυχldquoνται [tm - εIacuteρεθlaquoσι alefsymBc -

εIacuteρεθlaquoσιν] καθς καlsaquo lemicroε[alefsym omits]rsaquoς 13 ο(

γὰρ τοιοEumlτοι ψευδαπOgraveστολοι sectργάται

δOgraveλιοι microετασχηmicroατιζOgravemicroενοι ες ἀποστOgraveλους

ΧριστοEuml 14 καlsaquo οEgrave [tm - θαυmicroαστOgraveν

3is 1(the)-truth 2of-Christ in me that the

2boasting 1this not it-will-be-fenced- unto me inin=it will be stopped

the slope of- Achaia Why=region the

because not I-love you-all The God he-knows

2what1But I-do even I-will- in- I-will-cut- thedo order-that off

starting- of-the ones-wish- (a)-starting- in-order inpoint=opportunity ing point=opportunity -that what

we-boast [they-may-be-found]

accord- even we-(are) 2the-ing-as ones

1for such-(are) false-apostles 2workers

1deceit- reforming-themselves into apostlesful =transforming-themselves

of-Christ And not [wonderously

Chapter Eleven

ldquoWhen I Was Present With Yourdquo

Paul declares a number of important points inverses eight and nine Notice a few keywords

ldquoI Robbedrdquo (vs 8) mdash esulesa (sectσυλησα) ndash ldquo1 To strip offthe arms of a slain enemy hellipor to strip him of armspassively to be robbed or deprived of a thinghellip 2 to stripdespoil pilage plunder 3 hellipto carry off as spoil gener-ally be taken awayrdquo (Liddell amp Scott ab pg 661) Al-

though the basic meaning of this word caries the idea of spoil or robberyMoulton implies that this carriessomewhat the right of seizing thegoods of a merchant in payment (pg381)ldquoI Was A Burdenrdquo (vs 9) mdashkatenarkesa (κατενάρκησα) ndash Moultontells us that this word is from theword ldquokatardquo meaning ldquodownrdquo andldquonarkao - to grow torpid (ie slug-gish)rdquo Thus the meanings is ndash ldquoTobe torpid to the disadvantage of anyone to be a dead weight upon byimplication to be troublesome bur-densome to in respect to mainte-nancerdquo (Moulton pg 218)

Satan Transformed into An

Angel of Light

In verse fourteen Paulc o m p a r e s

the actions ofthe falseapostles with thebehavior of Sa-

tan himself declaring that he ldquotransforms himself into an angel of lightrdquo Theword translated ldquotransformsrdquo here is the Greek word metaschematizo(microετασχηmicroατ13ζω) meaning ndash ldquoTo remodel transfigure middle to make animaginarytransferenceof circumstances from the parties really concerned in them to

123

(a)-wonder] 4himself 1for 2the 3Satan

reforms-himself into (a)-messenger of-=transforms-himself =angel light

not- great- there- if even the servants of-him(a) thing fore =ministers

reform-themselves as servants=transform-themselves =ministers

of-righteousness of- the end will- accord- thewhom be ing-to

works of-them

others to transfer an imaginationrdquo (Moulton pg 267) The question arisesas to exactly what instances in the recorded history of Satan with mankind towhich Paul may be referring Many commentators suggest that the mostobvious instance is the temptation and fall of Adam and Eve in the garden(Genesis 31-7) In this instance Satan presents himself as a messenger ofgood news that would benefit the man and woman In Genesis 345 he claimsthat if the woman ate of the fruit of the forbidden tree 1) she would not die2) her eyes would be opened and 3) she would know good and evil Eachof these things might be desireable apart from Godrsquos condemnation Satanthus presents himself as one offering good things We might note that whilethe phrase ldquoangel of lightrdquo is notused in Genesis sometimes theword angel can carry simply its pri-mary meaning of ldquomessengerrdquoRCH Lenski in his commentary onSecond Corinthians cites two earlyapocryphal works describing Satanin a similar way This may indicatethat this conception of Satanrsquos rolewas a farmiliar figure in ancienttimes (Vol VII pg 1257)

Another possible instance withwhich we might connect this de-scription of Satan is the temptationof Christ After Jesus had fastedand was in need Satan presentshimself as one who could offer goodthings First he offers an easy wayto satisfy the hunger Jesus obvi-ously felt (Matthew 434) Next heoffers Jesus an easy way to demonstrate His true Divinity (Matthew 45-7)Then finally he offers to Jesus an easy way to have dominion over all man-kind the ultimate goal of Christs coming (Matthew 48-11) In each in-stance Satan presented himself as offering what would be good for Jesuswhen in fact he was offering Him evil

p 46alefsymBc - θαEumlmicroα] αEgraveτUacuteς γὰρ ı Σατανᾶς

microετασχηmicroατ13ζεται ες ἄγγελον φωτOgraveς 15

οEgrave microdegγα οOcircν ε καlsaquo ο( διάκονοι αEgraveτοEuml

microετασχηmicroατ13ζονται hellipς διά[B1 omits]κονοι

δικαιοσEcircνης œν τUacute τdegλος paraσται κατὰ τὰ

paraργα αEgraveτlaquoν

124

Second Corinthians

Again I-say not any- 2me 1should- 2fool-one think ish

1to-be 2if 1but not mdash even- as foolish you-all-if must-receive

me in- [(a)-little mdash even-I even-Iorder-that

(a)-littlemdash] may-boast

What I- not [I-speak accord- (the)- speak ing-to Lord

accord- (the)- I-speak] but as ining-to Lord

foolishness in this in-the standing of-the=confidence

boasting Since may boast

accord- [the] fleshing-to

even I-will-boast

16 Πάλιν λdegγω microAElig τ13ς microε δOgraveξ˙ ἄφρονα

εpermilναι ε δcent microAElig γε κἂν hellipς ἄφρονα δdegξασθdeg

microε να [tm - microικρOgraveν τι κἀγ p46alefsymc - κἀγ

microικρOgraveν τι B - κἀγ microεικρOgraveν τι] καυχAEligσωmicroαι

17 ˘ λαλlaquo οEgrave [tm - λαλlaquo κατὰ ΚEcircριον

p46alefsymBc - κατὰ ΚEcircριον λαλlaquo] ἀλλ᾿ hellipς sectν

ἀφροσEcircν˙ sectν ταEcircτ˙ τordf Iacuteποστάσει τinfinς

καυχAEligσεως 18 sectπεlsaquo πολλοlsaquo καυχlaquoνται

κατὰ [alefsym2Btm - τOslashν p46alefsym1Bc omit] σάρκα

κἀγ καυχAEligσοmicroαι

125

Chapter Eleven

Foolish Boasting 1116-21

Paul claims in verse seventeen that what he is aboutto engage in is ldquothe confidence of boastingrdquo Thissame phrase is also used in chapter nine verse four

Consider two of the words used here

Confidence mdash The word translated confidence is theGreek word hupostasei (Iacuteποστάσει) Vincent claims the word

was ndash ldquoPrimarily something put under foundation ground so substance (substans standing) substantial qualitythence steadiness confidencerdquo (VolIII p 334) Roberston adds ndash ldquoThisword common from Aristotle oncome from huphistemi to placeunder It always has the notion ofsubstratum or foundationhellip Thepapyri give numerous examples hellipof the word for ldquopropertyrdquo in vari-ous aspects So in Hebrews 111ldquofaith is the title-deed of thingshoped forrdquo (Vol IV p 248)Boasting mdash The word translatedldquoboastingrdquo is the word kaucheseos(καυχAEligσεως) meaning - ldquothe act of glo-ryingrdquo (Thayer p 342) mdash ldquo1 boast-ing 2 object of boastingrdquo (BAG p426)

Why Does Paul Boast

It is sometimes puzzling to the student of Scripture tounderstand why Paul on occasion ldquoboastsrdquo aboutcertain aspects of his past life In this text as in other

instances of this it is clear that Paul is not trying to exalthimself but rather he uses boasting to respond to specificproblems Consider a few examples

Paulrsquos Boast to the Philippians ndash In Philippi there were some of the ldquocir-cumcisionrdquo (ie Jews) who were exalting themselves based upon their stand-

Second Corinthians

126

Judaism To show the foolishness of this he does the same thing offering a listof his own position within Judaism (Philippians 31-6) However after con-cluding this list unlike the others he claims ndash ldquoBut what things were gain tome these I have counted loss for Christrdquo (Philippians 37) He adds furtherthat he counts ldquoall thing lossrdquo considering them as ldquorubbishrdquo in contrast to theknowledge of Christ and the hope that is found in Him (Philippians 38-11)

Paulrsquos Boast to the Corinthians ndash In Second Corinthians Paul mentionsboasting in 24 passages The prominence of references to boasting in SecondCorinthians is undoubtedly in response to the same type of confidence in theflesh referred to in Philippians onthe part of the false apostles (see512) To counter this arrogancePaul claimshellipbull He did not come to them in fleshlywisdom (112)bull The establishment of the churchin Corinth was his boast (114)bull The Corinthiansrsquo faithfulness wasPaulrsquos boast (74 14 824)bull His charge to preach to the Gen-tiles was his boast (1081315)bull He sought to cut off any opportu-nity on the part of those who boast(1112)bull He boasted in the flesh to showthe foolishness of such (1118)bull His boast concerned his ownweaknesses ie the things whichhe suffered (1130 129)bull Using the third person (ldquosuch aonerdquo) he refers to the glorious rev-elations which he was allowed toexperience (125 see pg 131)

Paul shows with such things that boasting about onersquos authority or stand-ing is of no value Instead what matters is how God can be glorified throughonersquos life

even I-will-boast 2gladly 1For you-all-bear-with

the- foolish wise-ones you- you-all-ones all-being bear-with

For if any- you- enslaves if any- devoursone all one

if any- takes if any- elevates- if any-one one themselves one

you- into (the)-face into (the)-faceall

of-you- skins Accord- dishonorall] =scourges ing-to

I-say as because we

[were-(too)- are-(too)- 2in 3whatweak weak]

1but if any- should- in foolishness I-sayone be-bold

am- even-bold I

κἀγ καυχAEligσοmicroαι 19 leδdegως γὰρ ἀνdegχεσθε

τlaquoν ἀφρOgraveνων φρOgraveνιmicroοι ντες 20 ἀνdegχεσθε

γάρ εDagger τις Iacutemicroᾶς καταδουλοrsaquo εDagger τις κατεσθ13ει

εDagger τις λαmicroβάνει εDagger τις sectπα13ρεται εDagger τις [tm -

Iacutemicroᾶς ες πρOgraveσωπον p46alefsymBc - ες πρOgraveσωπον

Iacutemicroᾶς] δdegρε[alefsym omits]ι 21 κατὰ ἀτ[B - ε]ιmicro13αν

λdegγω hellipς ˜τι lemicroε[alefsym omits]rsaquoς [tm -

plusmnσθενAEligσαmicroεν p46alefsymBc - plusmnσθενAEligκαmicroεν] sectν

δ᾿ ἄν τις τολmicroᾷ sectν ἀφροσEcircν˙ λdegγω[alefsym1 omits]

τολmicrolaquo κἀγasymp

The New King James Version uses ldquoboastrdquo or ldquoboastingrdquo in the following passages 112114 512 74 714 824 92 93 94 108 1013 1015 1016 1110 1112 11161117 1118 1130 121 125 126 129 1211

Chapter Eleven

127

Pauls Suffering 1122-33

Paulrsquos ldquoLight Afflictionrdquo

This section of the chapter offers us one of the mostcomplete lists of Paulrsquos afflictions that we have inthe Bible Some of these incidents are referred to in

other passages of Scripture and some are mentioned herealone

39 Lashes - Five Times from

the Jews ndash There is no mentionin any other Scriptures of thesebeatings The number ldquoforty lessonerdquo was in accordance with theMosaic restrictions on excessivepunishment (Deuteronomy 2523)Beaten with Rods - Three

times ndash The only one of these beat-ings which is recorded in Scriptureoccurred in Philippi after Paul andSilas cast out the spirit of divina-tion from the servant girl Angeredby the loss of income from the girlrsquosfortune-telling her owners stirredup the officials and they werebeatenStoned - Once ndash While Paul wasat Lystra Jews from Antioch andIconium came to the city and incitedthem against Paul He was stoneddragged from the city and thoughtto be dead (Acts 1419)

τολmicrolaquo κἀγasymp 22 ῾Εβραrsaquo[alefsym - ε]ο13 [tm - εσι

alefsymBc - εσιν] κἀγasymp Ισ[alefsym - δ]ραηλ[B - ε]rsaquoτα13

[tm - εσι alefsymBc - εσιν] κἀγasymp σπdegρmicroα

᾿Αβραάmicro [tm - εσι alefsymBc - εσιν] κἀγasymp 23

διάκονοι ΧριστοEuml [tm - εσι alefsymBc - εσιν]

παραφρονlaquoν λαλlaquo Iacuteπcentρ sectγasymp sectν κOgraveποις

περισσοτdegρως [alefsym2tm - sectν πληγαrsaquoς

IacuteπερβαλλOgraveντως sectν φυλακαrsaquoς

περισσοτdegρως p 46Bc - sectν φυλακαrsaquoς

περισσοτdegρωςsectν πληγαrsaquoς IacuteπερβαλλOgraveντως

alefsym1 - sectν πληγαrsaquoς περισσοτdegρως sectν φυλακαrsaquoς

IacuteπερβαλλOgraveντως] sectν θανάτοις πολλάκις

am- even- Hebrews [are-they]bold I

I-also Israelites

[are-they] I- seed-(of)also

Abraham [are-they] I-also

servants of- [are-they]Christ

out-of-onersquos- I- on- myself in troublesmind speak behalf-of

above- [in stripesmeasure

above- in prisonsmeasure

more- in prisonsabundantly

more- in stripes above-abundantly measure

in stripes more- in prisonsabundantly

above-measure] in deaths often

Paulrsquos Concern for

All the Churches

Paul statesin verset w e n t y -

eight that therecame upon himdaily a ldquodeepconcern for allthe churchesrdquo

This concern is seen clearly in Paulrsquosreferences to his own prayers on be-half of brethren Consider his state-ments

bull Paul told the Roman brethren -ldquohellipwithout ceasing I make mentionof you always in my prayersrdquo (Ro-mans 19)bull Paul told the Ephesians that hedid - ldquohellipnot cease to give thanks foryou making mention of you in my prayersrdquo (Ephesians 11516)

24 IacuteπUacute ᾿Ιουδα13ων πεντάκις [B2tm -

τεσσαράκοντα p46alefsymB1c - τεσσαρdegκοντα]

παρὰ micro13αν paraλαβον 25 τρ[alefsym - ε]lsaquoς

sectρραβδ13σθην ἅπαξ sectλιθάσθην τρ[alefsym - ε]lsaquoς

sectναυάγησα νυχθAEligmicroερον sectν τldquo βυθldquo

πεπο13ηκα 26 ıδοιπορ13αις πολλάκις

κινδEcircνοις ποταmicrolaquoν κινδEcircνοις λ˙στlaquoν

κινδEcircνοις sectκ γdegνους κινδEcircνοις sectξ sectθνlaquoν

κινδEcircνοις sectν πOgraveλει κινδEcircνοις sectν sectρηmicro13ᾳ

κινδEcircνοις sectν θαλάσσ˙ κινδEcircνοις sectν

ψευδαδdegλφοις 27 [alefsym or 2tm - sectν p46alefsym1Bc

omit] κOgraveπƒ καlsaquo microOgraveχθƒ sectν ἀγρυπν13αις

πολλάκις sectν λιmicroldquo καlsaquo δ13ψει[p46B1 - η] sectν

νηστε[alefsym omits]13αις πολλάκις sectν ψEcircχε[alefsym omits]ι

καlsaquo γυmicroνOgraveτητι

under (the)-Jews five-times

[forty]

less one I-received three-times

I-have-been- once I-have-been- three-beaten-with-rods stoned times

I-have-been- a-night-and- in the (the)-shipwrecked a-day deep

I-have-made in-journeys often=I-have-spent

in-dangers of-rivers in-dangers from-robbers

in-dangers from [my]- in-dangers from the- people nations=(the)-gentiles

in-dangers in (the)- in-dangers in (the)-city desert

in-dangers in the-sea in-dangers in=among

false- [in]brothers

labor and hard- in sleeplessnesswork

often in hunger and thirst in

fastings often in cold

and in-nakedness

128

Second Corinthians

Shipwrecked - Three times ndash Only one shipwreck is recorded in ActsDuring his journey to Rome the stern of the ship on which he was being heldbroke up as they beached on the shores of Malta (Acts 2739-44) If Paulwrote this epistle while in Macedonia in 57 AD (see pg 1) that would meanthese shipwrecks took place before the shipwreck of Acts twenty-sevenIn the Sea - A Night amp Day ndash There is no mention of this in any otherScriptures

Such things make it espe-cially remarkable that Paul couldstate as he did earlier in this epistle- ldquoFor our light affliction which isbut for a moment is working for usa far more exceeding and eternalweight of gloryrdquo (II Corinthians41617)

Chapter Eleven

129

and in-nakedness Apart fromother- thethe matters

[tumult care]

my the accord- (the)-day the con-ing-to =daily cern

forof- congregations Who is-all the =churches weak

and not I-am- Who is-scandalizedweak =stumbles

and not I burn If

2to-boast 1it-is- the- of- weaknesses [of-me]necessary things the

I-will-boast The God and Father of-the

Lord [of-us] Jesus

[Christ] knows the- who- blessedone is

unto the ages that not I-am- In=forever lying

Damascus the Ethnarch of-Aretas the king=Governor

was-guarding the [2of-the-Damascenes

1(the)- (the)- of-the- 2to-city city Damascenes] seize

3me [1wishing] and thr- (a)-smallough window

in (a)-woven- I-was- through the wallsbasket lowered

and fled-out-of the hands

of-him

παρὰ micro13αν paraλαβον

καlsaquo γυmicroνOgraveτητι 28 χωρlsaquoς τlaquoν παρεκτOgraveς le

[tm - sectπισEcircστασ13ς p46alefsymBc - sectπ13στασ13ς] [alefsym2tm

- microου p46alefsym1Bc - microοι] le καθ᾿ lemicrodegραν le microdegριmicroνα

πασlaquoν τlaquoν sectκκλησιlaquoν 29 τ13ς ἀσθε[alefsym

omits]νεrsaquo καlsaquo οEgraveκ ἀσθενlaquo τ13ς σκανδαλ[alefsym -

ε] 13ζεται καlsaquo οEgraveκ sectγ πυροEumlmicroαι 30 ε

καυχᾶσθαι δεrsaquo τὰ τinfinς ἀσθενε13ας microου [p46vidB

omit] καυχAEligσοmicroαι 31 ı ΘεUacuteς καlsaquo πατOslashρ τοEuml

Κυρ13ου [t - lemicrolaquoν p46vidalefsymBc omit] ᾿ΙησοEuml [tm -

ΧριστοEuml alefsymBc omit] οpermilδεν ı Atildeν εEgraveλογητUacuteς

ες τοAacuteς αlaquoνας ˜τι οEgrave ψεEcircδοmicroαι 32 sectν

∆αmicroασκldquo ı sectθνάρχης Αρdegτα τοEuml βασιλdegως

sectφροEcircρε[alefsym omits]ι τOslashν [tm - ∆αmicroασκηνlaquoν

πOgraveλιν alefsymBc - πOgraveλιν ∆αmicroασκηνlaquoν] πιάσαι

microε [alefsymtm - θdegλων Bc omit] 33 καlsaquo διὰ θυρ13δος

bull Paul told the brethren in Colosse - ldquoWe give thanks to the God and Fatherof our Lord Jesus Christ praying always for yourdquo (Colossians 13)bull Paul told the church in Thessalonica - ldquoWe give thanks to God always foryou all making mention of you in our prayersrdquo (I Thessalonians 12)

This shows us that for Chris-tians the natural result of care forour brethren is continual prayer forthem We like Paul should be regu-lar specific and constant in ourprayers to God on behalf of breth-ren This is true not only as it mayconcern those we worship with in alocal congregation but brethren inother areas as well

Paulrsquos Escape

from Damascus

The refer-ence inv e r s e s

thirty-two andthirty-three tohis escape fromDamascus by

being let down in a basket througha window in the city wall is describedin Acts 923-25 He escapes afterlearning of a Jewish plot to kill himLarge woven baskets of this typemight normally have been used insuch a way to pass food or suppliesIn this instance Paulrsquos life was pre-served in such a basket

Second Corinthians

Chapter Eleven Review

1 Explain Pauls use of the word ldquofollyrdquo in verseone Is it used in the sense of a folly which is sin-ful

2 For what type of things is it appropriate for Godspeople to be ldquojealousrdquo

3 How does Biblical betrothal defer from a personsimply being engaged to be married in our dayand age

4 Verse three speaks of the ldquosimplicity which is in Christrdquo What aresome things about the gospel of Christ which possess ldquosimplicityrdquo

5 List some ways in which someone in our day could be guilty of preach-ing ldquoanother Jesusrdquo or a ldquodifferent gospelrdquo

6 Explain the phrase ldquomost eminent apostlesrdquo in verse five7 In what sense was Paul ldquountrained in speechrdquo8 Explain the phrase in verse eight ldquoI robbed other churchesrdquo9 List at least three reasons that Paul states he did not receive support

from the brethren in Corinth10 What does verse thirteen state that the false apostles had done11 To what accounts in Scripture might verse fourteen be referring in

speaking of Satans transformation of himself into an ldquoangel of lightrdquo12 Does Paulrsquos declaration in verse seventeen that he speaks not ac-

cording to the Lord indicate that this section of the epistle is unin-spired Why or why not

13 Explain what verse twenty means in speaking of the false apostles14 Aside from being inspired to do so from the context why does Paul

list his sufferings in verses twenty-two through thirty-three15 Define the word ldquostripesrdquo in verse twenty-three16 Explain the Old Testament significance of ldquoforty stripes minus onerdquo17 Is the shipwreck described in Acts twenty-seven believed to be be-

fore or after the shipwrecks referred to in verse twenty-five18 Where are the events described in verses thirty-two and thirty three

elsewhere described

130

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R T W E L V E T W E L V E T W E L V E T W E L V E T W E L V E

Outline

I The Vision of Paradise (121-6)II Paulrsquos Thorn in the Flesh (127-10)III Paulrsquos Love for the Corinthians (1211-20)

The Vision of Paradise 121-6

Who Is ldquoThe Man in Christrdquo

Paul begins chapter twelve with a somewhat unusual approach Afterdeclaring the unprofitability of boasting he refers to a man he knows inChrist about which he de-

clares two things1 This man was ldquocaught up to thethird heavenrdquo (vs 2) ndash ldquocaught upto paradiserdquo (vs 4) And2 This man heard ldquoinexpressiblewordsrdquo ndash ldquonot lawful for man to ut-terrdquo (vs 4)What is unusual about this is thatthe Apostle appears to be referringto himself and yet he speaks of him-self in the third person (ie ldquosuch aonerdquo - vs 2 ldquosuch a manrdquo - vs 3ldquohe was caught uprdquo - (vs 4)+ ldquoIs Paul Speaking of himselfrdquo

mdash Latter in this same chapter Paulwill speak of the ldquothorn in the fleshrdquothat was given to him (vs 7) As towhy he was given this ldquothorn in thefleshrdquo he states that is was ndash ldquoLestI should be exalted above measureby the abundance of the revela-

[alefsym adds εDagger] Καυχᾶσθαι [tm - δOslash p46Bc - δεrsaquo

alefsym - δcent] οEgrave [tm - συmicroφdegρει microοι p 46alefsymBc -

συmicroφdegρον microdegν] sectλεEcircσοmicroαι [tm - γὰρ p46alefsymc -

δcent B - δcent καlsaquo] ες Ugraveπτασας καlsaquo ἀποκαλEcircψεις

Κυριου 2 οpermilδα ἄνθρωπον sectν Χριστldquo πρUacute

sectτlaquoν δεκατεσσάρων εDaggerτε sectν σasympmicroατι οEgraveκ

οpermilδα εDaggerτε sectκτUacuteς τοEuml[B omits] σasympmicroατος οEgraveκ

οpermilδα ı ΘεUacuteς οpermilδεν ἁρπαγdegντα τUacuteν τοιοEumlτον

szligως [Btcm - τρτου alefsym1 - τουτου alefsym2 -

τρυτου] οEgraveρανοEuml 3 καlsaquo οpermilδα τUacuteν τοιοEumlτον

[If] To-boast [indeed is-proper

but] (it- [profitable for- is)-not me

profit- in- I-will- [for butable deed] come

but even] unto visions and revelations

of-the- I-know a-man in Christ be-Lord fore

2years 1fourteen whe- in body 2notther

1I- wheth- out- of-the body 2notknow er side

1I- the God knows was-taken- mdash this-oneknow away

unto [(the)-third mdash

mdash ] heaven And I- mdash this-one

II Corinthians 1212

131

Second Corinthians

tionshelliprdquo Given the context it seems clear that the ldquorevelationsrdquo of which hespeaks are those given to the ldquoman in Christrdquo he describes at the beginning ofthe chapter+ ldquoWhen did this take placerdquo mdash Paul states that the revelations wererevealed ldquofourteen years agordquo The Old King James Version renders this ldquoabovefourteen years agordquo The word translated ldquoaboverdquo is the Greek word pro (πρUacute)meaning - ldquoBeforerdquo (Thayer pg 536)We might take this to mean a littlebefore fourteen years ago Vincentclaims this was simply an idiom toexpress simply ldquofourteen years agordquo(Vincent Vol III pg 353)

Brother BW Johnson in hisPeoplersquos New Testament with Notesoffers the following comments re-garding the dating of this eventldquoThis letter was written AD 57 Thebeing caught up was then in AD43 This was about the time thatPaul was at Antioch with Barnabasor at Tarsus (Acts 92930) It couldnot have been at conversion for thatwas about twenty years earlier thanAD 57 nor could it be the trancein the temple (Acts 2217) for thatwas too laterdquo (Vol II pg 159)

The Third Heaven

ndash Paradise

T he place of which Paulspeaks he calls ldquoThe thirdheavenrdquo and ldquoParadiserdquo While

the former phrase is found no whereelse in Scripture the latter is used twoother times (Luke 2343 amp Revelation27) The word means - ldquoA park iespecifically an Eden (place of futurehappinesshellip (Strongrsquos pg 54 No 3857)Thayer gives four meanings namely 1 a park or hunting preserve 2 A garden orpleasure-grove 3 The part of Hades where the righteous await resurrection (see Luke1619-31) 4 An upper region in the heavens (pg 480)

ἄνθρωπον εDaggerτε sectν σasympmicroατι εDaggerτε [alefsymtm - sectκτUacuteς

p46Bc - χωρlsaquoς] τοEuml σasympmicroατος [p46alefsymtcm - οEgraveκ

οpermilδα B omits] ı ΘεUacuteς οpermilδεν 4 ˜τι leρπάγη

ες τUacuteν παράδε[alefsym omits]ισον καlsaquo geκουσεν

ἄρρητα ῥAEligmicroατα ἃ οEgraveκ sectξUacuteν ἀνθρasympπƒ

λαλinfinσαι 5 Iacuteπcentρ τοEuml τοιοEcircτου καυχAEligσοmicroαι

Iacuteπcentρ δcent sectmicroαυτοEuml οEgrave[p46 - οEgraveδcentν] καυχAEligσοmicroαι

ε microOslash sectν ταrsaquoς ἀσθενε[alefsym omits]αις [alefsymtm - microου

p46Bc omit] 6 sectὰν γὰρ [alefsymBtcm - θελAEligσω

καυχAEligσασθαι p46 - θdegλω καυχAEligσοmicroαι] οEgraveκ

paraσοmicroαι ἄφρων ἀλAEligθειαν γὰρ sectρlaquo φεδοmicroαι

δdeg microAElig τις ες sectmicrocent λογσηται Iacuteπcentρ βλdegπει microε

ŭ ἀκοEcircει [p46alefsym2tcm - τι alefsym1B omit] sectξ [A re-

sumes] sectmicroοEuml

mdash ] heaven And I- mdash this-oneknow

man whe- in body whether [outsidether

without] the body [2not

1I-know] the God knows that he-was-taken-away

unto the paradise and he-heard

unspeak- words which not it-is- for-manable permitted

to-speak On- mdash of-this I-will-boastbehalf

2on- 1but of-my- not [neither] I-will-boastbehalf self

if not in the weaknesses of-me=except

2if 1ior [I-will-wish

to-boast I-wish I-will- notboast]

I-will- unwise 3truth 1for 2I-will- I-sparebe =foolish speak

but lest any- un- me should- on-be- what he- (in)-one to account half sees me

or hears [anything] from

me

132

And 2the 3extra- 4of-theordinary-greatness

5revelations [1because-of] in-order-that

lest [I-should-be-lifted-up]

2has- 1to-me a- in-the fleshbeen-given thorn

angel [Satan =messenger

of-Satan] in- me it-should- [in-order-thatorder-that beat

not I-should-be-lifted-up]

[and] On- of-this threebehalf

sumes] sectmicroοEuml 7 καlsaquo τordf Iacuteπερβολordf τlaquoν

ἀποκαλEcircψεων [alefsymABc - διUacute p46tm omit] 1να

microOslash [alefsymB2t cm - Iacuteπεραρωmicroαι AB1 -

Iacuteπερdegρωmicroαι] sectδOgraveθη microοι σκOgraveλοψ τordf σαρκ

ἄγγελος [alefsym 2A2tm - Σατᾶν alefsym 1A1Bc -

Σατανᾶ] 1να microε κολαφζ˙ [p46alefsym2B2tcm - 1να

microOslash Iacuteπεραρωmicroαι B1 - 1να microOslash Iacuteπερdegρωmicroαι

alefsym1A omit] [A adds - καlsaquo] 8 Iacuteπcentρ τοEcircτου τρ[A

Chapter Twelve

133

II Corinthians 127

Paulrsquos Thorn in the Flesh 127-10

What Is Paulrsquos ldquoThorn in the Fleshrdquo

In the text Paul does not directly tell us the nature ofthis ldquothorn in the fleshrdquo As a result there have beena number of conjectures regarding this Henry Alford

in his Exegetical and Critical Commentary on the GreekNew Testament categorizes these conjectures as follows

1 Some Temptation Among theadvocates of this conclusion wereMartin Luther Thomas Aquinas andthe renowned church historianJohn Laurence Mosheim The prob-lem with this conclusion is that thetext claims that the thorn was ldquogiventordquo Paul (presumably by God)James 11314 indicate to us thatGod is never the source of tempta-tion2 Oppostition from AdversariesAmong the advocates of this posi-tion were Chysostom and the Re-formers John Calvin and TheodoreBeza While surely Paul faced greatopposition in the text he declaresthat this was ldquoin the fleshrdquo Oppo-sition from adversaries would cer-tainly be a source of mental an-guish but it would be strange tospeak of it as a ldquoin the fleshrdquo3 Some Physical Infirmity Among the adherents to this conclusion wereTertullian Jerome David Lipscomb and Alford himself From the text itselfthis seems to be the most plausable conclusion (Alford Vol II pg 712713)

If this is correct we are still left with a number of questions about the typeof physical infirmity of which Paul may be speaking It may be that Scripturehas not revealed this to us Yet if the Holy Spirit would have us to tie in otherreferences to infirmity to this passage we can make a calculated guess InPaulrsquos epistle to the Galatian churches he mentions trouble which he had withhis eyes (Galatians 412-15) In the same epistle he speaks of writing with

ldquolarge lettersrdquo with his own hand (Galatians 611) It seems reasonable toconclude that if Paul struggled with his sight referring to it as a ldquotrial whichwas in my fleshrdquo (Galatians 414) this may well we the ldquothorn in the fleshrdquo ofthe Second Corinthian epistle

When Prayers Are Answered ldquoNordquo

Regarding Paulrsquos prayers to God on behalf of thisaffliction after three appeals to God he was givena direct answer in the negative The Lord declared

to him ndash ldquoMygrace is suffi-cient for youfor My

strength is made perfect in weak-nessrdquo Paul was blessed in receiv-ing a direct answer to his requestIn this age we do not receive directverbal answers such as this Wemust observe from the outcome ofthe matters about which we praywhether God has answered ldquoyesrdquo orldquonordquo

Often times Christians grow verydiscouraged when a prayer of faithis offered to God repeatedly andGodrsquos answer is ldquonordquo

+ ldquoWhat can Paulrsquos situation

teach us about how to cope when

God says lsquonorsquordquo

1 We must understand that Goddoes not leave us in a condition ofinsufficiency (II Corinthians 129)2 Try to consider how Godrsquos an-swer of ldquonordquo might allow Christrsquospower to be perfected3 Understand that this world is aplace of hardship (John 1633)4 Take comfort in the knowledgethat the Lord never leaves us (He-brews 135b6)

Second Corinthians

- ε]lsaquoς τUacuteν ΚEcircριον παρεκάλεσα 1να ἀποστordf

ἀπ᾿ sectmicroοEuml 9 καlsaquo [tm - εDaggerρηκdeg alefsymABc - εDaggerρηκdegν]

microοι ᾿Αρκεrsaquo σοι le χάρις microου le γὰρ δEcircναmicroς

[alefsym2Atm - microου p46vidalefsym1Bc omit] sectν ἀσθενε[alefsymA

omit]ᾳ [alefsym2tm - τελειοEumlται alefsym1Bc - τελεrsaquoται

A - τελεrsaquoτει] yenδιστα οOcircν microᾶλλον

καυχAEligσοmicroαι sectν ταrsaquoς ἀσθενε[alefsymA omit]αις

microου[B omits] 1να sectπισκηνasympσ˙ sectπ᾿ sectmicrocent le

δEcircναmicro[A - ε]ις τοEuml ΧριστοEuml 10 διUacute εEgraveδοκlaquo

sectν ἀσθενε[alefsym omits]αις sectν Iumlβρεσιν [alefsym2ABtcm

- sectν p 46alefsym1 - καlsaquo] ἀ[alefsym1 - sect]νάγκαις sectν

διωγmicroοrsaquoς[A omits] [alefsym2Atm - sectν p46alefsym1Bc - καlsaquo]

στενοχωραις Iacuteπcentρ ΧριστοEuml ˜ταν γὰρ

ἀσθενlaquo τOgraveτε δυνατOgraveς εmicroι

[And] On- of-this threebehalf

(times) the Lord I-had-called- in-order- he-might-aside that put-(it)-away

from me And [he-spoke]

to- suffic- for- the favor of- 2the 1for powerme ient you =grace Me

[of-me] in weaknesses

[it-is-made-complete]

2most- 1there- the-moregladly fore

I-will-boast in the weaknesses

of-me in- it-may-abide over me theorder-that

power of- Christ Because- I-think-the of-which well

in weaknesses in insult

[in and] necessities in

persecutions [in and]

in-distresses on- of-Christ 2when 1forbehalf

I-may-be- then 2powerful 1I-amweak

134

Chapter Twelve

Paulrsquos Love For the Corinthians 1211-20

ldquoThe Parents for the Childrenrdquo

In verse fourteen Paul claims ldquohellipFor the children oughtnot to lay up for the parents but the parents for thechildrenrdquo With this statement Paul echoes the same

attitude he ex-pressed to-wards theCorinthians in

his first letter to them He wrote -ldquoFor though you might have tenthousand instructors in Christ yetyou do not have many fathers forin Christ Jesus I have begotten youthrough the gospelrdquo (1 Corinthians415) Given that Paul had first ledthe brethren to obey the gospel hefelt a special paternal relationshiptowards them

Paulrsquos reference to ldquolaying uprdquo forthem refers back to his defense inverse thirteen of himself for not hav-ing been ldquoburdensomerdquo to them intaking material support from themThis in no way suggests that he didnot have a right to accept support (ICorinthians 94-6) or that it wouldhave been wrong to accept theirsupport (I Corinthians 912-18)Paul simply chose while in Corinthnot to burden them He did so1 To avoid any abuse of his au-thority (I Corinthians 918)2 To cut off any opportunity forthe false apostles (II Corinthians117-12)3 Out of love for the brethren (IICor 1111 1215)

I-have- unwise [boasting]become =foolish

you 2me 1have- 2I 1forcompelled

ought by you [us]

to-be- 2(in)- 1forcommended no-thing

[thing] (there-is)a- than- most-preeminentshortcoming the

of-the-apostles if even 2noth- 1I-am 2the 1In-=even though ing deed

signs of- apostle have-been-workedthe

in us in all patience [in and]

in-signs

and [wonders]

and [powers]

2what 1For is-it which

[made-you-less] than the

rest-of churches if not be- the-same I not=other cause-of

burdened you [Be-gracious=Forgive]

to- ndash 2injustice 1thisme

11 Γdegγονα ἄφρων [tm - καυχasympmicroενος

alefsymABc omit] Iacutemicroεrsaquoς microε plusmnναγκάσατε sectγ γὰρ

φειλον Iacuteφ᾿[B1 omits] Iacute[A - le]microlaquoν

συνστασθαι οEgraveδcentν γὰρ [alefsymAtcm omit p46B -

τι] Iacuteστdegρησα τlaquoν Iacuteπcentρλ[B - ε]αν

ἀποστOgraveλων ε καlsaquo οEgraveδdegν εmicroι 12 τὰ microcentν

σηmicroεrsaquoα τοEuml ἀποστOgraveλου κατει[B1 - η]ργάσθη

sectν Iacutemicrorsaquoν sectν πάσ˙ Iacuteποmicroονordf [tm - sectν alefsym2 - τε

p46alefsym1ABc omit] σηmicroε[alefsymB1 omit]οις [p46alefsym1Bc -

τε alefsymAtm omit] καlsaquo [alefsymtm - τdegρασι ABc -

τdegρασιν] καlsaquo [tm - δυνάmicroεσι alefsymABc -

δυνάmicroεσιν] 13 τ γάρ sectστιν ˜ [alefsym2Atm -

leττAEligθητε p46alefsym1Bc - leσσasympθητε] Iacuteπcentρ τὰς

λοιπὰς sectκκλησας ε microOslash ˜τι αEgraveτUacuteς sectγ οEgrave

κατενάρκησα Iacutemicrolaquoν [alefsymB2tcm - χαρσασθdeg

AB1 - χαρσασθα] microοι τOslashν ἀδικαν ταEcircτην

135

Behold a-third- [this-(is)](time)

readiness I- to- to you andhave come

not I-will-be- [you-all] 3notdead-weight-upon

1for 2I-seek the- of-you- [but]things all

you- 2not 1for ought the children for-all the

[parents] to-store-up

[to-store-up for-the

parents] [but] the

parents for- children 2I 1butthe

most- will-spend and will-be-spent-outgladly

on- of- souls of-you if [even]behalf the -all

more- you-abundantly all

[loving I-love] [less]

I-am-loved 2let- 1but Iit-be

When Love is Not Returned

In verse fifteen Paul expresses his frustration that inspite of all of his efforts on behalf of the Corinthianshe was continually rejected by them (so to speak)

He declares - ldquohellipthe more abundantly I love you the lessI am lovedrdquo He undoubtedly felt this due to the fact thatin trying to exalt the Corinthians by providing for his ownsupport they had actually taken offense at him

Jesus demonstrates in His life the trying ordeal of loving those who donot return your love He came to this world out of love for man and yet he wasrejected The gospel of John speaks of it this way - ldquoHe came to His own andHis own did not receive Himrdquo (John111)

Often in Christ we may showlove towards brethren or towardsthe lost by showing concern for thesoul of someone else and ratherthan appreciating our love the per-son is offended

+ ldquoHow can we keep from los-

ing heart when those towards

whom we demonstrate the love

of Christ reject itrdquo

1 Make certain that you have dem-onstrated your love in a way that isgentle sensitive and sincere (IITimothy 22425 Galatians 61)2 Understand that sometimeswhen people reject a good deed donethey are not rejecting you but thegospel itself (Matthew 249-13)3 Make certain that your aim is tobe pleasing to God not attaining thelove of men (John 124243)

14 ᾿ΙδοEcirc τρτον [tm omit p 46alefsymABc -

τοEumlτο] bullτοmicroως paraχω sectλθεrsaquoν πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς καlsaquo

οEgrave καταναρκAEligσω [tm - Iacutemicrolaquoν alefsymABc -omit] οEgrave

γὰρ ζητlaquo τὰ Iacutemicrolaquoν [t - ἀλλ᾿ alefsymABcm - ἀλλὰ]

Iacutemicroᾶς οEgrave γὰρ Ugraveφε[alefsymA omit]λει τὰ τdegκνα τοrsaquoς

[alefsymtm - γονεEumlσι ABc - γονεEumlσιν] θησαυρζε[B1

omits]ιν [p 46 has instead - θησαυρζειν τοrsaquoς

γονεEumlσιν] [alefsymAtm - ἀλλ᾿ Bc - ἀλλὰ] ο(

γονε[alefsymomits]rsaquoς τοrsaquoς τdegκνοις 15 sectγ δcent

yenδιστα δαπανAEligσω καlsaquo sectκδαπανηθAEligσοmicroαι

Iacuteπcentρ τlaquoν ψυχlaquoν Iacutemicrolaquoν ε [alefsym2tm - καlsaquo

p46alefsym1ABc omit] περισσοτdegρως Iacutemicroᾶς [p46alefsym2Btcm

- ἀγαπlaquoν alefsym1A - ἀγαπlaquo] [alefsym2tm - prodττον

alefsym1ABc - prodσσον] ἀγαπlaquomicroαι 16 paraστω δcent sectγ

Second Corinthians

136

οEgrave[p46 adds - κ] κατ[p46 omits]εβ[alefsym - ν]άρ[alefsym adds

- ν]ησα Iacutemicroᾶς[alefsym - laquoν] [tm - ἀλλ᾿ alefsymABc -

ἀλλὰ] Iacuteπάρχων πανοEumlργος δOgraveλƒ Iacutemicroᾶς

paraλαβον 17 microAElig τινα œν ἀπdegσταλκα πρUacuteς

Iacutemicroᾶς δι᾿ αEgraveτοEuml sectπλεονdegκτησα Iacutemicroᾶς 18

παρεκάλεσα Ττον καlsaquo

συναπdegστε[alefsymomits]ιλα τUacuteν ἀδελφOgraveν microAElig τι

sectπλεονdegκτησεν Iacutemicroᾶς Ττος οEgrave τldquo αEgraveτldquo

πνεEcircmicroατι περιεπατAEligσαmicroεν οEgrave τοrsaquoς αEgraveτοrsaquoς

[tm - Daggerχνεσι alefsymABc - Daggerχνεσιν]

19 [alefsym2tm - Πάλιν alefsym1ABc - Πάλαι p46

- ΟEgrave πάλαι] δοκεrsaquoτε[A - αι] ˜τι Iacutemicrorsaquoν

ἀπολογοOgravemicroεθα [tm - κατενasympπιον alefsymABc -

κατενάντι] [alefsym2tm - τοEuml alefsym1ABc omit] ΘεοEuml sectν

Χριστldquo[p46 omits] λαλοEumlmicroεν τὰ δcent πάντα

ἀγαπητο Iacuteπcentρ τinfinς Iacutemicrolaquoν οκοδοmicroinfinς

not I-have-burdened

you-all [but]

being crafty with- 2you-guile all

1I-took Not any- whom I-sent toone

you- by him did-I-take- you-allall advantage-of

I-called-upon Titus and

sent-with-(him) the brother not any-thing

has-taken- you- Titus not in- sameadvantage-of all the

spirit we-have-walked not in-the same

[footsteps]

[Again Already

Not already] you-all- [it-is- that to-think thought] you-all

we-are-making- [in-the-presence a-defense

before] [of-the] God in

Christ we-speak ndash but all-things

loved-ones on- of-the 2of- 1building-upbehalf you-all

All Things For Edification

Regardless of how the Corinthians had perceivedPaulrsquos ef forts his aim had always been toldquobu i l d

uprdquo the breth-ren there Inverse twentyPaul declares

this fact in stating ndash ldquohellipWe speakbefore God in Christ But we do allthings beloved for your edifica-tionrdquo

Notice a few things whichScripture teaches may serve to edifyothers

mdash Love (I Corinthians 81)mdash The Word of Godrsquos Grace (Acts2032)mdash Prophecy (in Contrast with

Tongues) (I Corinthians 143 IIPeter 119-21)mdash Apostolic Authority (IICorinthians 108)mdash A Sharp Rebuke in Accor-

dance With Godrsquos Word (IICorinthians 1310)mdash The Hope of Salvation (IThessalonians 59-11)mdash Pure Speech (Ephesians 429)

We might observe that eachof these things may at times eitherbe rejected or cause someone to beoffended yet in truth they can buildanother person up spiritually if theyare allowed to

Chapter Twelve

137

Paulrsquos Fears for the Corinthians

In verse twenty Paul expresses his fears regardingwhat he is afraid he will find when he comes to theCorinthians Notice a few of these things he men-

tions

ldquoContentionsrdquomdash ereis (paraρεις) - ldquoCon-tention strife wranglingrdquo (Thayerpg 249) ldquohellipMetaphorically itmeans love of striferdquo (Zodiates pg654)ldquoOutbursts of Wrathrdquomdash thumoi(θυmicroο) - ldquohellipA strong passion or emo-tion of the mind anger wrath plu-ral swellings of angerrdquo (Moultonpg 197)ldquoSelfish Ambitionsrdquomdash eritheiai(sectριθεrsaquoαι) - ldquoTo serve for hire to servea party the service of a party partyspirit feud faction contentious dis-positionhelliprdquo (Moulton pg 166)ldquoBackbitingsrdquo mdash katalaliai (κατα-

λαλια) - ldquoDefamation evil-speakingrdquo(Thayer pg 332) - ldquoEvil-speakingslanderrdquo (Zodiates pg 834)ldquoWhisperingsrdquomdash psithurismoi(ψιθυρισmicroο) - ldquohellipThe sound [of theword] adapted to the sensehellip Secretslandersrdquo (Vincent Vol III pg 357)Some sources suggest that whileldquobackbitngrdquo is done openly ldquowhis-peringsrdquo is done in secretldquoConceitsrdquomdash phusioseis (φυσιasympσεις)- ldquoA puffing up of soul loftinesspriderdquo (Thayer pg 661) ldquoProp-erly inflation hellipinflation of themind priderdquo (Moulton pg 431)ldquoTumultsrdquo mdash akatastasiai (ἀκαταστασαι) - ldquoFrom the original meaning of un-settledness it developed through the complications of Greece and the Eastafter the death of Alexander into the sensehellippolitical instabilityrdquo (VincentVol III pg 323)

20 φοβοEumlmicroαι γάρ microAElig πως sectλθν οEgraveχ οBους

θdegλω εIumlρω Iacutemicroᾶς κἀγ εIacuteρεθlaquo Iacutemicrorsaquoν οAcircον οEgrave

θdegλετε microAElig πως [alefsymAtm - paraρεις p46Bc - paraρις]

[alefsymtm - ζinfinλοι p46ABc - ζinfinλος] θυmicroο sectρ[B -

ε]ιθε[alefsymAB1 omit]rsaquoαι καταλαλ[A - ε]ια

ψιθυρισmicroο φυσιasympσε[B1 omits]ις

ἀκαταστασ[A - ε]αι 21 microOslash πάλιν [alefsym2tm -

sectλθOgraveντα alefsym1ABc - sectλθOgraveντος] [alefsym2tm - microε

alefsym1ABc - microου] [Atc - ταπεινasympσ˙ alefsym - ταπινasympσ˙

p46Bm - ταπεινasympσει] [tm - omit alefsymABc - microε] ı

ΘεOgraveς microου πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς καlsaquo πενθAEligσω πολλοAacuteς

τlaquoν προηmicroαρτηκOgraveτων καlsaquo microOslash

microετανοησάντων sectπlsaquo τordf ἀκαθαρσᾳ καlsaquo

πορνε[alefsymomits]ᾳ καlsaquo ἀσελγεᾳ radic paraπραξαν

2I-fear 1For lest in- coming not whatany-way

I-wish I- you-all and-I may-be- to- what notshould-find found you-all

you- not in-any- [strifes strife]all-wish way

[jealousies jealousy] passions

factions evil-speakings

whisperings puffings-up [puffing-up]=pride

instabilities not again

[coming of-coming] [me

of-me] [4should-humble ndash

will-humble] [5me] 1the

2God 3of- with you- and I-will- manyme all mourn

of-the- having-previously- and notones sinned

having-repented over the uncleanness and

fornication and licenti- which they-ousness have-done

Second Corinthians

138

Chapter Twelve Review

1 What reason is there to believe that the ldquoman inChristrdquo of whom Paul speaks is himself

2 If the term ldquoparadiserdquo refers to the same place ofwhich Jesus spoke in His conversation with thetheif on the cross explain what the Bible teachesus about this part of Hades

3 What are the three ideas about the type of hardship Paul describes asthe ldquothorn in the fleshrdquo Is any one of these more plausible given thetestimony of Scripture

4 If the ldquothorn in the fleshrdquo is a physical infirmity does Scripture tell uselsewhere any infirmity with which Paul struggled If so where

5 What are some ways that the Lordrsquos strength is perfected by weak-ness

6 Explain the phrase ldquowhen I am weak then I am strongrdquo7 How had the Corinthians compelled Paul to act as a fool in boasting8 In the context what does Paul mean by the statement ldquothe children

ought not to lay up for the parents but the parents for the childrenrdquo9 What had Paul determined not to do when he came to them10 How did he compare himself with Titus11 What are some ways to avoid discouragement when love is not re-

turned12 What things had Paul done for the edification of the Corinthians that

they had not received as such13 What is a possible difference between ldquobackbitingsrdquo and ldquowhisper-

ingsrdquo14 What does the word translated ldquotumultsrdquo deal with How could this

relate to the situation in Corinth

Chapter Twelve

139

Second Corinthians

140

C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R C H A P T E R T H I R T E E N T H I R T E E N T H I R T E E N T H I R T E E N T H I R T E E N

Outline

I Warning amp Declaration (131-6)II Paulrsquos Hopes Upon His Coming (137-10)III Farewell amp Conclusion (1311-14)

Warning amp Declaration 131-6

ldquoBy the Mouth of Two or Three Witnessesrdquo

In verse one Paul relates his com-ing to them a third time to theMosaic law requiring two to

three witnesses to establish truetestimony According to the Law ofMosesbull One witness was insufficient toestablish the truth of a matter(Deuteronomy 195)bull The death penalty was not to beinflicted without the testimony of atleast two (or three) witnesses(Deuteronomy 176 Numbers3530 Matthew 2660)Under the New Law there are alsosome matters which require thissame confirmation of witnessesrsquo tes-timonybull Proof of an accusation against anelder (I Timothy 519)bull A second rebuke of one who hassinned prior to bringing a matterbefore the church (Matthew 1816)

1 [alefsym2A - δοEcirc p46alefsym1Btcm - omit] Τρτον τοEumlτο

[alefsymBtcm - paraρχοmicroαι A - bullτοmicroως paraχω sectλθεrsaquoν]

πρUacuteς Iacutemicroᾶς [alefsym1 adds να] sectπlsaquo στOgravemicroατος δEcircο

microαρτEcircρων [ABtcm - καlsaquo alefsym - ŭ] τριlaquoν

σταθAEligσεται πᾶν ῥinfinmicroα 2 προερηκα καlsaquo

προλdegγω hellipς παρν τUacute δεEcircτερον καlsaquo ἀπν

νEumlν [tm - γράφω alefsymABc - omits] τοrsaquoς [tm -

προηmicroαρτηκOgraveσι alefsymABc - προηmicroαρτηκOgraveσιν]

καlsaquo τοrsaquoς λοιποrsaquoς πᾶσιν ˜τι sectὰν paraλθω ες τUacute

πάλιν οEgrave φε[alefsym omits]σοmicroαι 3 sectπε[A omits]lsaquo

[Behold] 2(The)-third- 1this-(time) (is)

I-am-coming readiness I-have to-come]

to you- [in-order- by (the)-mouth- twoall that] of

witnesses [and or] of-three

3will-be- 1every 2word I-have-said- andestablished beforehand

I-say- as being- the second- and being-beforehand present (time) absent

now [I-write] to-the-(ones)

[having-previously sinned]

and 1to- 4rest 2all that if I-come mdash mdash3the

again not I-will-spare

141

Second Corinthians

In this text Paul uses this principle as a metaphor to illustrate his patiencewith the Corinthian brethren and the accuracy of his rebuke of them This isnot the first time we see such a metaphorical use of this teaching In John81718 Jesus refers to this law in claiming that the testimony of Himself andGod the Father establish the truth of His word Also in Hebrews 102829 acomparison is made between rejecting the law of Moses and rejecting the bloodof Christ and the Spirit of grace

ldquoWe Shall Live With Himrdquo

Just as Paul appeared to be weak at times yet intruth held apostolic authority in verse four Paulcompares this to Christ Though He died in weak-

ness He lives by the power of God The beautiful factabout this is that Christrsquos conquering of weakness allowsman the hope of doing the same At the end of verse fourPaul declares ndash ldquohellipFor we also are weak in Him but weshall live with Him by the power of God toward yourdquo

Paul on other occasions has re-ferred to Christian weakness Wehave frail bodies subject to decay(II Corinthians 51-4) We areviewed by the world as fools (I Cor-inthians 118) Yet even so God haspromised to work great things in thesouls of those who put their faithand obedience in Him He haspromisedhellip1) To raise our mortal bodies untoincorruptible bodies (John52829 I Corinthians 154243)2) To give us eternal life free fromweakness (Philippians 32021Revelation 2145)3) To live with us eternally (John1434 Ephesians 24-7 Revelation213)

142

δοκιmicroOslashν ζητεrsaquoτε τοEuml sectν sectmicroοlsaquo λαλοEumlντος

ΧριστοEuml ˘ς ες Iacutemicroᾶς οEgraveκ ἀσθενεrsaquo ἀλλὰ

δυνατεrsaquo sectν Egravemicrorsaquoν 4 καlsaquo γὰρ [alefsym2Atm - ε

alefsym1Bc - omits] sectσταυρasympθη sectξ ἀσθενεας ἀλλὰ

ζordf sectκ δυνάmicroεως ΘεοEuml καlsaquo γὰρ καlsaquo lemicroεrsaquoς

ἀσθενοEumlmicroεν [Btm - sectν alefsymAc - σAacuteν] αEgraveτldquo

ἀλλὰ [tm - ζησOgravemicroεθα alefsymABc - ζAEligσοmicroεν p46vid

- ζlaquomicroεν] [alefsymABtcm - σAacuteν p46 - sectν] αEgraveτldquo sectκ

δυνάmicroεως ΘεοEuml [alefsymAtcm - ες Iacutemicroᾶς B - omits]

II Corinthians 1334

since

a-proof you-all- of-the 3in 4me 1speakingseek

2of-Christ who un- you- not is-weak butto all

is- in you- 2even 1For [if]powerful all

He-was- out- weakness butcrucified of

He- by (the)- of-God 2in- 1For even welives power deed

are-weak [in with] Him

but [we-ourselves- we-shall- shall-live live

we-may- [with in] Him out-live] of

(the)-power of-God [in you-all]

2yourselves 1You-all-prove if you- in theall-are

faith [2yourselves 1you-all-try]

[or] not

you-all-know yourselves that [Jesus

Christ Christ Jesus] in you-all

[is] if not any- ones-fail-one ing-the-test

you- I-hope yet that you-all-will- that weall-are know-for-yourselves

2not 1are ones-fail-ing-the-test

ldquoExamine Yourselvesrdquo

In verse five Paul urges the Corinthian brethren to ldquoex-aminerdquo their spiritual condition with regard towhether or no they were truly faithful or not The

word translated ldquoexaminerdquo is the Greek word peirazete(πειράζετε) meaning - ldquoto make proof or trial of put to theproof whether with good or mischievous intent absolutely

to essay in the New Testament to tempt to try subject to trialrdquo (Moulton pg314) The idea is proof to oneself rather than to God or someone else

Self examination is a crucial part of faithful service to the Lord It is part ofwhat leads one to repentance andobedience to the gospel initiallyAfter one is a Christian it shouldassist the child of God in staying infaithful fellowship with God Con-sider some teaching to this regardin both the Old and New Testa-mentsmdash Self examination can lead us tofollow Godrsquos word (Psalm1195960)mdash Self examination can lead us torepentance (Lamentations34041)mdash Self examination can lead us toa spiritual life (Ezekiel 182728)mdash Self examination is essential foracceptable worship (I Corinthians1128-31)mdash Self examination can allow usto have a proper estimation of our-selves (Galatians 634)

In spite of the importance of self examination we must not interpret selfapproval as Divine approval In other words even when we may feel withinourselves that we are faithful and acceptable to the Lord we may mistaken ifwe are not following Godrsquos word Paul illustrates this in his own life When hepersecuted the church he did so ldquoin all good consciencerdquo (Acts 231) Yet hewas lost in such sin As a result even as a Christian Paul would acknowledgethat the Lord was his judge (I Corinthians 42-5)

Chapter Thirteen

143

II Corinthians 1356

5 bullαυτοAacuteς πε[alefsym omits]ιράζετε ε sectστcent sectν τordf

πστε[alefsym omits]ι [alefsymAtcm - bullαυτοAacuteς δοκιmicroάζετε

B omits] [alefsym2ABtm - ŭ alefsym1 omits] οEgraveκ sectπιγι[B

adds - ε]νasympσκετε bullαυτοEcircς ˜τι [Btcm -᾿ΙησοEumlς

ΧριστUacuteς alefsymA - ΧριστUacuteς ᾿ΙησοEumlς] sectν Iacutemicrorsaquoν

[alefsymAtm - sectστν p46Bc omit] ε microAElig τι ἀδOgraveκιmicroο

sectστε 6 sectλπζω δcent ˜τι γνasympσεσθε ˜τι lemicroε[alefsym

omits]rsaquoς[alefsym1 adds - ε alefsym2 omits] οEgraveκ sectσmicrocentν ἀδOgraveκιmicroοι

Second Corinthians

Paulrsquos Hopes Upon His Coming 137-10

ldquoNothing Against The Truthrdquo

Paul expresses his own conviction in verseeight that he ldquohellipcan do nothing against the truthbut for the truthrdquo Paulrsquos entire life reflects this

commitment Whether he is faced with a situation inwhich he must defend the truth against falsehood or heis working

sincerely and persuasively to bringsomeone to the truth Paul holdsfast to his objective

+ ldquoWhat are some ways that we

can work for the truthrdquo

1 Try to teach people who are inerror and bring them to the truth2 Stand up for what the Lord hastaught us whether it is popular ornot3 Study diligently and test our ownbeliefs to make certain that we prac-tice the truth

could be working against the

truthrdquo

1 By disgracing the Lord and Hischurch through our disobedience2 Having an unwillingness to studyand worship faithfully3 Holding on to traditions ratherthat testing all things by Godrsquos word4 By discouraging those who aretrying to teach others and live rightthemselves

7 [tm - εIcircχοmicroαι alefsymABc - εEgraveχOgravemicroεθα] δcent πρUacuteς

τUacuteν ΘεOgraveν microOslash ποιinfinσαι Iacutemicroᾶς κακUacuteν microηδdegν οEgraveχ

να lemicroεrsaquoς δOgraveκιmicroοι φανlaquomicroεν ἀλλ᾿ να

[alefsymoralefsym2Atcm - Iacutemicroεrsaquoς alefsym1 - lemicroεrsaquoς] τUacute καλUacuteν

ποιinfin[alefsym - ει]τε lemicroεrsaquoς δcent hellipς ἀδOgraveκιmicroοι Œmicroεν 8

οEgrave γὰρ δυνάmicroεθά τι κατὰ τinfinς ἀληθε[alefsym

omits]ας [ABtm - ἀλλ᾿ alefsymc - ἀλλὰ] Iacuteπcentρ τinfinς

ἀληθε[alefsym omits]ας 9 χαροmicroεν γὰρ ˜ταν

lemicroεrsaquoς ἀσθενlaquomicroεν Iacutemicroεrsaquoς δcent δυνατοlsaquo 0τε τοEumlτο

[alefsym2tm - δcent alefsym1c omits] καlsaquo εEgraveχOgravemicroεθα τOslashν Iacutemicrolaquoν

κατάρτισιν 10 διὰ τοEumlτο ταEumlτα ἀπν

γράφω να παρν microOslash ἀποτOgravemicroως

χρAEligσωmicroαι κατὰ τOslashν sectξουσαν partν [tm - paraδωκε

microοι ı ΚEcircριος alefsymABc - ı ΚEcircριος paraδωκεν microοι]

ες οκοδοmicroAEligν καlsaquo οEgraveκ ες καθαρεσιν

[I-pray we-pray] but to

the God not 2to-do 1you- evil none notall

in- we ones-pass- might- but in-order-that ing-the-test appear order-that

[you- we] the goodall

may- [you-all- 2we 1but 4as 5ones-fail- 3may-do must-do] ing-the-test be

2not 1For we-are- any- against the truthpowerful thing

[but] on- of-behalf the

truth 2we- 1For whenrejoice

we are-weak 2you- 1but power- you-all- thisall ful-ones may-be

[but] even we-pray (for)- of-the you-all

completeness There- these things 2being-fore absent

I-write in- being- not sharpnessorder-that present

I-may- accord- the auth- which [3gaveuse ing-to ority

4to- 1the 2Lord the Lord gave to-me]me

unto build- and not unto tearing-ing-up down

144

Chapter Thirteen

145

11 ΛοιπOgraveν ἀδελφο χαρετε

καταρτζεσ[A - τ]θε[alefsymA - αι] παρακαλεrsaquoσθε

τUacute αEgraveτUacute φρονεrsaquoτε [A omits] ε[alefsym

omits]ρηνεEcircετε καlsaquo ı ΘεUacuteς τinfinς ἀγάπης καlsaquo

ε[alefsym omits]ρAEligνης paraσται microεθ᾿ Iacutemicrolaquoν 12

ἀσπάσασθε ἀλλAEligλους sectν [alefsymBtcm - ἁγƒ

φιλAEligmicroατι p46A - φιλAEligmicroατι ἁγƒ ]

13 ᾿Ασπαζονται Iacutemicroᾶς οB ἅγιοι πάντες

Farewell amp Conclusion 1311-14

The Nature of the Godhead

Iin verse fourteen as Paul concludes his epistle to theCorinthians he offers a concluding statementwhich indicates some significant points to us about

the nature of the Godhead We see that three virtues aresaid to flow from three sources He prays for them to have

ldquogracerdquo ndash from Jesus ldquoloverdquo ndash from God and ldquocommunionrdquo ndash with the HolySpirit

Many in the religious worldteach a number of false ideas aboutthe nature of the Godhead Somesuggesthellipmdash There is only one person ofthe God head Therefore Jesus wasnot Divine and the Holy Spirit is onlya manifestation of Godmdash There is only one person ofthe Godhead who appears in dif-ferent forms Sometimes God ap-pears as Jesus sometimes as Godthe Father and sometimes as theHoly Spiritmdash There are two persons of theGodhead the Father and the SonTherefore the Holy Spirit is not athird person but only a manifesta-tion of the Father or the Son

From Scripture it is clear that each of these ideas fall short of the teachingof Godrsquos word Although it may be difficult for us to comprehend the God ofthe Bible is said to be one God composed of three separate persons Considerthe following Scriptures in this regardmdash At the baptism of Christ the Son was upon the earth the Father spokefrom heaven and the Spirit descended upon Christ (Matthew 313-17)mdash The Son and the Holy Spirit are each said to have their own will and yet areone with God (Matthew 2639 John 1613 Colossians 115 29)mdash There are certain things only the Father knows (Matthew 2436)mdash The Father will have authority over the Son (I Corinthians 1524-28)

(To-the)- brothers rejoicerest

complete- encourage-yourselves yourselves

2the 3same- 1think(thing)

be-at-peace and the God oflove andthe

peace will-be with you-all

you-all-greet one-another in [holy

kiss kiss holy]

2greet 1You- 2the 3holy- 1allall ones (=saints)

Second Corinthians

146

Chapter Thirteen Review

1 Including the trip Paul is planning how many timeswill he have come to the Corinthians upon thewriting of this epistle

2 Explain the Old Testament teaching Paul refersto at the end of verse one regarding witnesses

3 What are some New Testament teachings whichrequire two to three witnesses

4 In verse two what does Paul warn he will not do to those who havesinned previously and yet not repented

5 What are some other passageswhich like verse three teachthat the Apostles and New Tes-tament prophets were directlyinspired

6 List two promises regardingthe nature of Christians livingwith God in the age to come

7 Does the self examination ofwhich Paul speaks in verse fivenecessarily imply Divine ap-proval Why or why not

8 Explain the phrase in versesfive six and seven ldquodisquali-fiedrdquo

9 What did Paul hope that thebrethren would do even if theyjudged him to be ldquodisquali-fiedrdquo

10 What did Paul fear he mighthave to use when he came tothem

11 Explain the phrase ldquobe of onemindrdquo in verse eleven

12 What does verse fourteenteach us about the nature ofthe Godhead

14 ῾Η χάρις τοEuml Κυρου ᾿ΙησοEuml ΧριστοEuml

[B omits] καlsaquo le ἀγάπη τοEuml ΘεοEuml καlsaquo le

κοινωνα τοEuml ῾Αγου[p46 omits] ΠνεEcircmicroατος

microετὰ πάντων Iacutemicrolaquoν [alefsym2tm - ἀmicroAEligν alefsym1ABc

omit]

[t (Stephens Scrivener) - [ΠρUacuteς Κορινθους

δευτdegρα sectγράφη ἀπUacute Φιλππων τinfinς

Μακεδονας διὰ Ττου καlsaquo Λουκᾶ] B2 -

ΠρUacuteς Κορινθους β´ sectγράφη ἀπUacute Φιλππων

p46alefsym1AB1 - ΠρUacuteς Κορινθους β´ (alefsym2 adds -

στιχων χιβ) cm omit]

The favor of- Lord Jesus Christ=grace the

and the love of- God and theThe

fellowship of- Holy SpiritThe

(be)- all of-you- [amen]with all

Postscript in Some Manuscripts

[To (the)-Corinthians

(the)- epistle from Philippi of-second the

Macedonia by Titus and Luke

To (the)- 2 epistle from PhilippiCorinthians

To (the)- 2Corinthians

(lines 612)]

Ancient Road Publicationstrade PO Box 20399 bull Amarillo TX 79114 bull httpancientroadpublicationscom

Cover
Table of Contents
Prefacepi
Chapter Onep1
Chapter Twop13
Chapter Threep23
Chapter Fourp35
Chapter Fivep47
Chapter Sixp63
Chapter Sevenp73
Chapter Eightp87
Chapter Ninep97
Chapter Tenp107
Chapter Elevenp117
Chapter Twelvep131
Chapter Thirteenp141

Page 2: The Second Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the Church in Corinth

The Second Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the Church in Corinth - Study Guidewith Comparative Greek Interlinear Text

By Kyle Pope

First Edition copy 1995 Kyle PopeSecond Edition copy 2001 Kyle PopeAncient Road PublicationstradePO Box 20399Amarillo TX 79114httpwwwancientroadpublicationscom

Preface i

Chapter One 1

Chapter Two 13

Chapter Three 23

Chapter Four 35

Chapter Five 47

Chapter Six 63

Chapter Seven 73

Chapter Eight 87

Chapter Nine 97

Chapter Ten 107

Chapter Eleven 117

Chapter Twelve 131

Format

i

The Greek Text

Second Corinthians

ii

Using The Text

Preface

iii

Second Corinthians

iv

Introduction

Outline

(vss 15-24)

II Corinthians 112

1

II Corinthians 13-5

Second Corinthians

2

Chapter One

I Corinthians 167

sufferings thus

3

Second Corinthians

Chronology of the

Events in Acts 19

II Corinthians 18-9

4

Chapter One

Iacutemicrolaquoν]

you-all]

5

Second Corinthians

6

holiness] and [in]

[of-us] Jesus

Chapter One

7

Second Corinthians

᾿Ιουδααν

Judea

Making Plans

8

HELLESPONT

ASIA MINOR

S e a

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIA

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

Chapter One

9

Second Corinthians

The Promises of God

10

Chapter One

11

Second Corinthians

Chapter One Review

12

to-come to you] 2if

1For I [the] grieve

Outline

II Corinthians 212

13

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 234

14

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 25

15

majority

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 26

16

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 27-9

17

[1if anything what]

Second Corinthians

- Matthew 1619 amp 1818-20

18

Chapter Two

ASIA MINOR

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIATROAS

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

CORINTH

HELLESPONT

19

PHILIPPI

Second Corinthians

The City of Troas

ldquoLeading In

Triumphrdquo

20

Kyle P

ope

Chapter Two

21

clarity but

in Christ we-speak

II Corinthians 217

Second Corinthians

22

Chapter Two Review

verse fifteen

Outline

[to-commend]

[Or if] not we-need

II Corinthians 31

23

Second Corinthians

in the hearts

[of-us of-you-all]

having-been-written

II Corinthians 323

24

Chapter Three

I Corinthians 345

25

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 36

letter [kills kills

26

Chapter Three

δOgraveξ˙

II Corinthians 378

glory

27

Second Corinthians

[in] glory

re- in glorymaining

28

Chapter Three

29

Second Corinthians

[1Moses]

2when [1But if]

30

Chapter Three

sectλευθερα

freedom

II Corinthians 317

31

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 318

32

Chapter Three

33

Second Corinthians

34

Outline

II Corinthians 412

[we-faint]

truth

35

Second Corinthians

The God of This Age

II Corinthians 434

36

Chapter Four

37

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 456

ΧριστοEuml

of-Christ]

38

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 47-9

39

Second Corinthians

40

Chapter Four

41

Second Corinthians

ΘεοEuml

we-spoke and we

God

42

Chapter Four

43

Second Corinthians

44

αasympνια

(are)-eternal

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 418

45

Chapter Four Review

of man is eternal

Second Corinthians

46

Outline

in the Heavens 51-5

II Corinthians 51

47

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 523

48

Chapter Five

49

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 545

50

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 56-8

the Lord

51

Second Corinthians

Walking By Faith

52

[evil foul]

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 5910

53

Second Corinthians

54

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 511

Judgment Seats

Fearing The Lord

Kyle P

ope

55

Second Corinthians

56

The Love of Christ

Chapter Five

57

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 515

58

Chapter Five

59

Second Corinthians

60

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 521

of- in HimGod

61

Second Corinthians

62

Chapter Five Review

Outline

63

II Corinthians 61

II Corinthians 62

Second Corinthians

64

II Corinthians 63

Chapter Six

65

The Armor of

Righteousness

II Corinthians 64-7

ourselves as

and of-(the)left

Second Corinthians

66

67

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

68

Chapter Six

II Corinthians 614

69

Second Corinthians

70

The Christianrsquos

Belial

71

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

72

Chapter Six Review

Outline

Verse Sixteen

II Corinthians 71

[(the)- of-Godlove]

73

Second Corinthians

Cleansing Ourselves

74

to receive them

Chapter Seven

75

II Corinthians 72-4

Second Corinthians

76

Chapter Seven

Godly Sorrow

II Corinthians 75-8

77

[works]

Second Corinthians

78

Chapter Seven

79

and their meaning

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 711

80

Chapter Seven

Towards God mdash

Towards Paul mdash

81

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 712

82

The Joy of Titus

Chapter Seven

83

you-all

Iacutemicrorsaquoν

Second Corinthians

84

Chapter Seven

85

this statement

Second Corinthians

86

Outline

II Corinthians 812

87

Second Corinthians

HELLESPONT

Aegean

Sea

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

THESSALONICA

BEREA

88

Chapter Eight

89

II Corinthians 83-6

Second Corinthians

90

Chapter Eight

91

ldquoReadinessrdquo

II Corinthians 811

omits]ιν

Second Corinthians

92

Chapter Eight

93

Who Was Titus

Second Corinthians

94

Chapter Eight

95

96

Second Corinthians

Outline

97

II Corinthians 912

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 93-5

2I-have-sent

[may-prepare]

98

Gift 93-5

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 96

99

Each just-as

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 97

100

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 989

[2having-power

ages

101

Second Corinthians

102

Chapter Nine

God [of-God]

103

filling-up the

104

Second Corinthians

105

Chapter Nine

Chapter Nine Review

Second Corinthians

106

Outline

II Corinthians 1012

107

Second Corinthians

108

Chapter Ten

109

II Corinthians 1034

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 1056

110

Chapter Ten

Captivity to Christ

Criticism of Paul

107-11

Bodily Pressence

3if [2even] 1For

111

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 1011

II Corinthians 1012

112

Chapter Ten

113

to-boast

Second Corinthians

114

[commending]

that- [is approved

approved is] [but]

Glory in the Lord

Chapter Ten

115

Chapter Ten Review

Chapter Ten

116

Outline

me

II Corinthians 111

117

Second Corinthians

Godly Jealousy

Betrothed to Christ

II Corinthians 112

118

Chapter Eleven

119

II Corinthians 113

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 114

different which not

you-all-bear-(it)]

120

2I-count

Chapter Eleven

II Corinthians 1156

121

Second Corinthians

122

Chapter Eleven

Angel of Light

123

works of-them

124

Second Corinthians

even I-will-boast

125

Chapter Eleven

Why Does Paul Boast

Second Corinthians

126

I-say as because we

am- even-bold I

Chapter Eleven

127

I-also Israelites

All the Churches

[forty]

false- [in]brothers

and in-nakedness

128

Second Corinthians

Chapter Eleven

129

[tumult care]

and not I burn If

Lord [of-us] Jesus

of-him

Paulrsquos Escape

from Damascus

Second Corinthians

elsewhere described

130

Outline

II Corinthians 1212

131

Second Corinthians

The Third Heaven

ndash Paradise

me

132

Chapter Twelve

133

II Corinthians 127

Second Corinthians

134

Chapter Twelve

ought by you [us]

in-signs

and [wonders]

and [powers]

135

parents] [but] the

Second Corinthians

136

not I-have-burdened

you-all [but]

[footsteps]

[Again Already

Chapter Twelve

137

tions

Second Corinthians

138

Chapter Twelve

139

Second Corinthians

140

Outline

141

Second Corinthians

142

II Corinthians 1334

since

[or] not

Chapter Thirteen

143

II Corinthians 1356

Second Corinthians

truthrdquo

144

Chapter Thirteen

145

kiss kiss holy]

Second Corinthians

146

omit]

(lines 612)]

Cover
Table of Contents
Prefacepi
Chapter Onep1
Chapter Twop13
Chapter Threep23
Chapter Fourp35
Chapter Fivep47
Chapter Sixp63
Chapter Sevenp73
Chapter Eightp87
Chapter Ninep97
Chapter Tenp107
Chapter Elevenp117
Chapter Twelvep131

Page 3: The Second Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the Church in Corinth

Preface i

Chapter One 1

Chapter Two 13

Chapter Three 23

Chapter Four 35

Chapter Five 47

Chapter Six 63

Chapter Seven 73

Chapter Eight 87

Chapter Nine 97

Chapter Ten 107

Chapter Eleven 117

Chapter Twelve 131

Format

i

The Greek Text

Second Corinthians

ii

Using The Text

Preface

iii

Second Corinthians

iv

Introduction

Outline

(vss 15-24)

II Corinthians 112

1

II Corinthians 13-5

Second Corinthians

2

Chapter One

I Corinthians 167

sufferings thus

3

Second Corinthians

Chronology of the

Events in Acts 19

II Corinthians 18-9

4

Chapter One

Iacutemicrolaquoν]

you-all]

5

Second Corinthians

6

holiness] and [in]

[of-us] Jesus

Chapter One

7

Second Corinthians

᾿Ιουδααν

Judea

Making Plans

8

HELLESPONT

ASIA MINOR

S e a

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIA

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

Chapter One

9

Second Corinthians

The Promises of God

10

Chapter One

11

Second Corinthians

Chapter One Review

12

to-come to you] 2if

1For I [the] grieve

Outline

II Corinthians 212

13

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 234

14

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 25

15

majority

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 26

16

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 27-9

17

[1if anything what]

Second Corinthians

- Matthew 1619 amp 1818-20

18

Chapter Two

ASIA MINOR

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIATROAS

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

CORINTH

HELLESPONT

19

PHILIPPI

Second Corinthians

The City of Troas

ldquoLeading In

Triumphrdquo

20

Kyle P

ope

Chapter Two

21

clarity but

in Christ we-speak

II Corinthians 217

Second Corinthians

22

Chapter Two Review

verse fifteen

Outline

[to-commend]

[Or if] not we-need

II Corinthians 31

23

Second Corinthians

in the hearts

[of-us of-you-all]

having-been-written

II Corinthians 323

24

Chapter Three

I Corinthians 345

25

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 36

letter [kills kills

26

Chapter Three

δOgraveξ˙

II Corinthians 378

glory

27

Second Corinthians

[in] glory

re- in glorymaining

28

Chapter Three

29

Second Corinthians

[1Moses]

2when [1But if]

30

Chapter Three

sectλευθερα

freedom

II Corinthians 317

31

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 318

32

Chapter Three

33

Second Corinthians

34

Outline

II Corinthians 412

[we-faint]

truth

35

Second Corinthians

The God of This Age

II Corinthians 434

36

Chapter Four

37

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 456

ΧριστοEuml

of-Christ]

38

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 47-9

39

Second Corinthians

40

Chapter Four

41

Second Corinthians

ΘεοEuml

we-spoke and we

God

42

Chapter Four

43

Second Corinthians

44

αasympνια

(are)-eternal

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 418

45

Chapter Four Review

of man is eternal

Second Corinthians

46

Outline

in the Heavens 51-5

II Corinthians 51

47

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 523

48

Chapter Five

49

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 545

50

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 56-8

the Lord

51

Second Corinthians

Walking By Faith

52

[evil foul]

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 5910

53

Second Corinthians

54

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 511

Judgment Seats

Fearing The Lord

Kyle P

ope

55

Second Corinthians

56

The Love of Christ

Chapter Five

57

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 515

58

Chapter Five

59

Second Corinthians

60

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 521

of- in HimGod

61

Second Corinthians

62

Chapter Five Review

Outline

63

II Corinthians 61

II Corinthians 62

Second Corinthians

64

II Corinthians 63

Chapter Six

65

The Armor of

Righteousness

II Corinthians 64-7

ourselves as

and of-(the)left

Second Corinthians

66

67

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

68

Chapter Six

II Corinthians 614

69

Second Corinthians

70

The Christianrsquos

Belial

71

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

72

Chapter Six Review

Outline

Verse Sixteen

II Corinthians 71

[(the)- of-Godlove]

73

Second Corinthians

Cleansing Ourselves

74

to receive them

Chapter Seven

75

II Corinthians 72-4

Second Corinthians

76

Chapter Seven

Godly Sorrow

II Corinthians 75-8

77

[works]

Second Corinthians

78

Chapter Seven

79

and their meaning

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 711

80

Chapter Seven

Towards God mdash

Towards Paul mdash

81

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 712

82

The Joy of Titus

Chapter Seven

83

you-all

Iacutemicrorsaquoν

Second Corinthians

84

Chapter Seven

85

this statement

Second Corinthians

86

Outline

II Corinthians 812

87

Second Corinthians

HELLESPONT

Aegean

Sea

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

THESSALONICA

BEREA

88

Chapter Eight

89

II Corinthians 83-6

Second Corinthians

90

Chapter Eight

91

ldquoReadinessrdquo

II Corinthians 811

omits]ιν

Second Corinthians

92

Chapter Eight

93

Who Was Titus

Second Corinthians

94

Chapter Eight

95

96

Second Corinthians

Outline

97

II Corinthians 912

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 93-5

2I-have-sent

[may-prepare]

98

Gift 93-5

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 96

99

Each just-as

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 97

100

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 989

[2having-power

ages

101

Second Corinthians

102

Chapter Nine

God [of-God]

103

filling-up the

104

Second Corinthians

105

Chapter Nine

Chapter Nine Review

Second Corinthians

106

Outline

II Corinthians 1012

107

Second Corinthians

108

Chapter Ten

109

II Corinthians 1034

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 1056

110

Chapter Ten

Captivity to Christ

Criticism of Paul

107-11

Bodily Pressence

3if [2even] 1For

111

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 1011

II Corinthians 1012

112

Chapter Ten

113

to-boast

Second Corinthians

114

[commending]

that- [is approved

approved is] [but]

Glory in the Lord

Chapter Ten

115

Chapter Ten Review

Chapter Ten

116

Outline

me

II Corinthians 111

117

Second Corinthians

Godly Jealousy

Betrothed to Christ

II Corinthians 112

118

Chapter Eleven

119

II Corinthians 113

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 114

different which not

you-all-bear-(it)]

120

2I-count

Chapter Eleven

II Corinthians 1156

121

Second Corinthians

122

Chapter Eleven

Angel of Light

123

works of-them

124

Second Corinthians

even I-will-boast

125

Chapter Eleven

Why Does Paul Boast

Second Corinthians

126

I-say as because we

am- even-bold I

Chapter Eleven

127

I-also Israelites

All the Churches

[forty]

false- [in]brothers

and in-nakedness

128

Second Corinthians

Chapter Eleven

129

[tumult care]

and not I burn If

Lord [of-us] Jesus

of-him

Paulrsquos Escape

from Damascus

Second Corinthians

elsewhere described

130

Outline

II Corinthians 1212

131

Second Corinthians

The Third Heaven

ndash Paradise

me

132

Chapter Twelve

133

II Corinthians 127

Second Corinthians

134

Chapter Twelve

ought by you [us]

in-signs

and [wonders]

and [powers]

135

parents] [but] the

Second Corinthians

136

not I-have-burdened

you-all [but]

[footsteps]

[Again Already

Chapter Twelve

137

tions

Second Corinthians

138

Chapter Twelve

139

Second Corinthians

140

Outline

141

Second Corinthians

142

II Corinthians 1334

since

[or] not

Chapter Thirteen

143

II Corinthians 1356

Second Corinthians

truthrdquo

144

Chapter Thirteen

145

kiss kiss holy]

Second Corinthians

146

omit]

(lines 612)]

Cover
Table of Contents
Prefacepi
Chapter Onep1
Chapter Twop13
Chapter Threep23
Chapter Fourp35
Chapter Fivep47
Chapter Sixp63
Chapter Sevenp73
Chapter Eightp87
Chapter Ninep97
Chapter Tenp107
Chapter Elevenp117
Chapter Twelvep131

Page 4: The Second Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the Church in Corinth

Format

i

The Greek Text

Second Corinthians

ii

Using The Text

Preface

iii

Second Corinthians

iv

Introduction

Outline

(vss 15-24)

II Corinthians 112

1

II Corinthians 13-5

Second Corinthians

2

Chapter One

I Corinthians 167

sufferings thus

3

Second Corinthians

Chronology of the

Events in Acts 19

II Corinthians 18-9

4

Chapter One

Iacutemicrolaquoν]

you-all]

5

Second Corinthians

6

holiness] and [in]

[of-us] Jesus

Chapter One

7

Second Corinthians

᾿Ιουδααν

Judea

Making Plans

8

HELLESPONT

ASIA MINOR

S e a

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIA

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

Chapter One

9

Second Corinthians

The Promises of God

10

Chapter One

11

Second Corinthians

Chapter One Review

12

to-come to you] 2if

1For I [the] grieve

Outline

II Corinthians 212

13

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 234

14

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 25

15

majority

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 26

16

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 27-9

17

[1if anything what]

Second Corinthians

- Matthew 1619 amp 1818-20

18

Chapter Two

ASIA MINOR

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIATROAS

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

CORINTH

HELLESPONT

19

PHILIPPI

Second Corinthians

The City of Troas

ldquoLeading In

Triumphrdquo

20

Kyle P

ope

Chapter Two

21

clarity but

in Christ we-speak

II Corinthians 217

Second Corinthians

22

Chapter Two Review

verse fifteen

Outline

[to-commend]

[Or if] not we-need

II Corinthians 31

23

Second Corinthians

in the hearts

[of-us of-you-all]

having-been-written

II Corinthians 323

24

Chapter Three

I Corinthians 345

25

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 36

letter [kills kills

26

Chapter Three

δOgraveξ˙

II Corinthians 378

glory

27

Second Corinthians

[in] glory

re- in glorymaining

28

Chapter Three

29

Second Corinthians

[1Moses]

2when [1But if]

30

Chapter Three

sectλευθερα

freedom

II Corinthians 317

31

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 318

32

Chapter Three

33

Second Corinthians

34

Outline

II Corinthians 412

[we-faint]

truth

35

Second Corinthians

The God of This Age

II Corinthians 434

36

Chapter Four

37

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 456

ΧριστοEuml

of-Christ]

38

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 47-9

39

Second Corinthians

40

Chapter Four

41

Second Corinthians

ΘεοEuml

we-spoke and we

God

42

Chapter Four

43

Second Corinthians

44

αasympνια

(are)-eternal

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 418

45

Chapter Four Review

of man is eternal

Second Corinthians

46

Outline

in the Heavens 51-5

II Corinthians 51

47

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 523

48

Chapter Five

49

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 545

50

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 56-8

the Lord

51

Second Corinthians

Walking By Faith

52

[evil foul]

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 5910

53

Second Corinthians

54

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 511

Judgment Seats

Fearing The Lord

Kyle P

ope

55

Second Corinthians

56

The Love of Christ

Chapter Five

57

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 515

58

Chapter Five

59

Second Corinthians

60

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 521

of- in HimGod

61

Second Corinthians

62

Chapter Five Review

Outline

63

II Corinthians 61

II Corinthians 62

Second Corinthians

64

II Corinthians 63

Chapter Six

65

The Armor of

Righteousness

II Corinthians 64-7

ourselves as

and of-(the)left

Second Corinthians

66

67

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

68

Chapter Six

II Corinthians 614

69

Second Corinthians

70

The Christianrsquos

Belial

71

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

72

Chapter Six Review

Outline

Verse Sixteen

II Corinthians 71

[(the)- of-Godlove]

73

Second Corinthians

Cleansing Ourselves

74

to receive them

Chapter Seven

75

II Corinthians 72-4

Second Corinthians

76

Chapter Seven

Godly Sorrow

II Corinthians 75-8

77

[works]

Second Corinthians

78

Chapter Seven

79

and their meaning

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 711

80

Chapter Seven

Towards God mdash

Towards Paul mdash

81

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 712

82

The Joy of Titus

Chapter Seven

83

you-all

Iacutemicrorsaquoν

Second Corinthians

84

Chapter Seven

85

this statement

Second Corinthians

86

Outline

II Corinthians 812

87

Second Corinthians

HELLESPONT

Aegean

Sea

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

THESSALONICA

BEREA

88

Chapter Eight

89

II Corinthians 83-6

Second Corinthians

90

Chapter Eight

91

ldquoReadinessrdquo

II Corinthians 811

omits]ιν

Second Corinthians

92

Chapter Eight

93

Who Was Titus

Second Corinthians

94

Chapter Eight

95

96

Second Corinthians

Outline

97

II Corinthians 912

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 93-5

2I-have-sent

[may-prepare]

98

Gift 93-5

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 96

99

Each just-as

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 97

100

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 989

[2having-power

ages

101

Second Corinthians

102

Chapter Nine

God [of-God]

103

filling-up the

104

Second Corinthians

105

Chapter Nine

Chapter Nine Review

Second Corinthians

106

Outline

II Corinthians 1012

107

Second Corinthians

108

Chapter Ten

109

II Corinthians 1034

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 1056

110

Chapter Ten

Captivity to Christ

Criticism of Paul

107-11

Bodily Pressence

3if [2even] 1For

111

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 1011

II Corinthians 1012

112

Chapter Ten

113

to-boast

Second Corinthians

114

[commending]

that- [is approved

approved is] [but]

Glory in the Lord

Chapter Ten

115

Chapter Ten Review

Chapter Ten

116

Outline

me

II Corinthians 111

117

Second Corinthians

Godly Jealousy

Betrothed to Christ

II Corinthians 112

118

Chapter Eleven

119

II Corinthians 113

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 114

different which not

you-all-bear-(it)]

120

2I-count

Chapter Eleven

II Corinthians 1156

121

Second Corinthians

122

Chapter Eleven

Angel of Light

123

works of-them

124

Second Corinthians

even I-will-boast

125

Chapter Eleven

Why Does Paul Boast

Second Corinthians

126

I-say as because we

am- even-bold I

Chapter Eleven

127

I-also Israelites

All the Churches

[forty]

false- [in]brothers

and in-nakedness

128

Second Corinthians

Chapter Eleven

129

[tumult care]

and not I burn If

Lord [of-us] Jesus

of-him

Paulrsquos Escape

from Damascus

Second Corinthians

elsewhere described

130

Outline

II Corinthians 1212

131

Second Corinthians

The Third Heaven

ndash Paradise

me

132

Chapter Twelve

133

II Corinthians 127

Second Corinthians

134

Chapter Twelve

ought by you [us]

in-signs

and [wonders]

and [powers]

135

parents] [but] the

Second Corinthians

136

not I-have-burdened

you-all [but]

[footsteps]

[Again Already

Chapter Twelve

137

tions

Second Corinthians

138

Chapter Twelve

139

Second Corinthians

140

Outline

141

Second Corinthians

142

II Corinthians 1334

since

[or] not

Chapter Thirteen

143

II Corinthians 1356

Second Corinthians

truthrdquo

144

Chapter Thirteen

145

kiss kiss holy]

Second Corinthians

146

omit]

(lines 612)]

Cover
Table of Contents
Prefacepi
Chapter Onep1
Chapter Twop13
Chapter Threep23
Chapter Fourp35
Chapter Fivep47
Chapter Sixp63
Chapter Sevenp73
Chapter Eightp87
Chapter Ninep97
Chapter Tenp107
Chapter Elevenp117
Chapter Twelvep131

Page 5: The Second Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the Church in Corinth

The Greek Text

Second Corinthians

ii

Using The Text

Preface

iii

Second Corinthians

iv

Introduction

Outline

(vss 15-24)

II Corinthians 112

1

II Corinthians 13-5

Second Corinthians

2

Chapter One

I Corinthians 167

sufferings thus

3

Second Corinthians

Chronology of the

Events in Acts 19

II Corinthians 18-9

4

Chapter One

Iacutemicrolaquoν]

you-all]

5

Second Corinthians

6

holiness] and [in]

[of-us] Jesus

Chapter One

7

Second Corinthians

᾿Ιουδααν

Judea

Making Plans

8

HELLESPONT

ASIA MINOR

S e a

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIA

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

Chapter One

9

Second Corinthians

The Promises of God

10

Chapter One

11

Second Corinthians

Chapter One Review

12

to-come to you] 2if

1For I [the] grieve

Outline

II Corinthians 212

13

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 234

14

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 25

15

majority

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 26

16

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 27-9

17

[1if anything what]

Second Corinthians

- Matthew 1619 amp 1818-20

18

Chapter Two

ASIA MINOR

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIATROAS

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

CORINTH

HELLESPONT

19

PHILIPPI

Second Corinthians

The City of Troas

ldquoLeading In

Triumphrdquo

20

Kyle P

ope

Chapter Two

21

clarity but

in Christ we-speak

II Corinthians 217

Second Corinthians

22

Chapter Two Review

verse fifteen

Outline

[to-commend]

[Or if] not we-need

II Corinthians 31

23

Second Corinthians

in the hearts

[of-us of-you-all]

having-been-written

II Corinthians 323

24

Chapter Three

I Corinthians 345

25

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 36

letter [kills kills

26

Chapter Three

δOgraveξ˙

II Corinthians 378

glory

27

Second Corinthians

[in] glory

re- in glorymaining

28

Chapter Three

29

Second Corinthians

[1Moses]

2when [1But if]

30

Chapter Three

sectλευθερα

freedom

II Corinthians 317

31

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 318

32

Chapter Three

33

Second Corinthians

34

Outline

II Corinthians 412

[we-faint]

truth

35

Second Corinthians

The God of This Age

II Corinthians 434

36

Chapter Four

37

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 456

ΧριστοEuml

of-Christ]

38

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 47-9

39

Second Corinthians

40

Chapter Four

41

Second Corinthians

ΘεοEuml

we-spoke and we

God

42

Chapter Four

43

Second Corinthians

44

αasympνια

(are)-eternal

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 418

45

Chapter Four Review

of man is eternal

Second Corinthians

46

Outline

in the Heavens 51-5

II Corinthians 51

47

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 523

48

Chapter Five

49

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 545

50

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 56-8

the Lord

51

Second Corinthians

Walking By Faith

52

[evil foul]

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 5910

53

Second Corinthians

54

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 511

Judgment Seats

Fearing The Lord

Kyle P

ope

55

Second Corinthians

56

The Love of Christ

Chapter Five

57

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 515

58

Chapter Five

59

Second Corinthians

60

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 521

of- in HimGod

61

Second Corinthians

62

Chapter Five Review

Outline

63

II Corinthians 61

II Corinthians 62

Second Corinthians

64

II Corinthians 63

Chapter Six

65

The Armor of

Righteousness

II Corinthians 64-7

ourselves as

and of-(the)left

Second Corinthians

66

67

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

68

Chapter Six

II Corinthians 614

69

Second Corinthians

70

The Christianrsquos

Belial

71

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

72

Chapter Six Review

Outline

Verse Sixteen

II Corinthians 71

[(the)- of-Godlove]

73

Second Corinthians

Cleansing Ourselves

74

to receive them

Chapter Seven

75

II Corinthians 72-4

Second Corinthians

76

Chapter Seven

Godly Sorrow

II Corinthians 75-8

77

[works]

Second Corinthians

78

Chapter Seven

79

and their meaning

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 711

80

Chapter Seven

Towards God mdash

Towards Paul mdash

81

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 712

82

The Joy of Titus

Chapter Seven

83

you-all

Iacutemicrorsaquoν

Second Corinthians

84

Chapter Seven

85

this statement

Second Corinthians

86

Outline

II Corinthians 812

87

Second Corinthians

HELLESPONT

Aegean

Sea

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

THESSALONICA

BEREA

88

Chapter Eight

89

II Corinthians 83-6

Second Corinthians

90

Chapter Eight

91

ldquoReadinessrdquo

II Corinthians 811

omits]ιν

Second Corinthians

92

Chapter Eight

93

Who Was Titus

Second Corinthians

94

Chapter Eight

95

96

Second Corinthians

Outline

97

II Corinthians 912

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 93-5

2I-have-sent

[may-prepare]

98

Gift 93-5

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 96

99

Each just-as

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 97

100

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 989

[2having-power

ages

101

Second Corinthians

102

Chapter Nine

God [of-God]

103

filling-up the

104

Second Corinthians

105

Chapter Nine

Chapter Nine Review

Second Corinthians

106

Outline

II Corinthians 1012

107

Second Corinthians

108

Chapter Ten

109

II Corinthians 1034

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 1056

110

Chapter Ten

Captivity to Christ

Criticism of Paul

107-11

Bodily Pressence

3if [2even] 1For

111

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 1011

II Corinthians 1012

112

Chapter Ten

113

to-boast

Second Corinthians

114

[commending]

that- [is approved

approved is] [but]

Glory in the Lord

Chapter Ten

115

Chapter Ten Review

Chapter Ten

116

Outline

me

II Corinthians 111

117

Second Corinthians

Godly Jealousy

Betrothed to Christ

II Corinthians 112

118

Chapter Eleven

119

II Corinthians 113

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 114

different which not

you-all-bear-(it)]

120

2I-count

Chapter Eleven

II Corinthians 1156

121

Second Corinthians

122

Chapter Eleven

Angel of Light

123

works of-them

124

Second Corinthians

even I-will-boast

125

Chapter Eleven

Why Does Paul Boast

Second Corinthians

126

I-say as because we

am- even-bold I

Chapter Eleven

127

I-also Israelites

All the Churches

[forty]

false- [in]brothers

and in-nakedness

128

Second Corinthians

Chapter Eleven

129

[tumult care]

and not I burn If

Lord [of-us] Jesus

of-him

Paulrsquos Escape

from Damascus

Second Corinthians

elsewhere described

130

Outline

II Corinthians 1212

131

Second Corinthians

The Third Heaven

ndash Paradise

me

132

Chapter Twelve

133

II Corinthians 127

Second Corinthians

134

Chapter Twelve

ought by you [us]

in-signs

and [wonders]

and [powers]

135

parents] [but] the

Second Corinthians

136

not I-have-burdened

you-all [but]

[footsteps]

[Again Already

Chapter Twelve

137

tions

Second Corinthians

138

Chapter Twelve

139

Second Corinthians

140

Outline

141

Second Corinthians

142

II Corinthians 1334

since

[or] not

Chapter Thirteen

143

II Corinthians 1356

Second Corinthians

truthrdquo

144

Chapter Thirteen

145

kiss kiss holy]

Second Corinthians

146

omit]

(lines 612)]

Cover
Table of Contents
Prefacepi
Chapter Onep1
Chapter Twop13
Chapter Threep23
Chapter Fourp35
Chapter Fivep47
Chapter Sixp63
Chapter Sevenp73
Chapter Eightp87
Chapter Ninep97
Chapter Tenp107
Chapter Elevenp117
Chapter Twelvep131

Page 6: The Second Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the Church in Corinth

Using The Text

Preface

iii

Second Corinthians

iv

Introduction

Outline

(vss 15-24)

II Corinthians 112

1

II Corinthians 13-5

Second Corinthians

2

Chapter One

I Corinthians 167

sufferings thus

3

Second Corinthians

Chronology of the

Events in Acts 19

II Corinthians 18-9

4

Chapter One

Iacutemicrolaquoν]

you-all]

5

Second Corinthians

6

holiness] and [in]

[of-us] Jesus

Chapter One

7

Second Corinthians

᾿Ιουδααν

Judea

Making Plans

8

HELLESPONT

ASIA MINOR

S e a

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIA

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

Chapter One

9

Second Corinthians

The Promises of God

10

Chapter One

11

Second Corinthians

Chapter One Review

12

to-come to you] 2if

1For I [the] grieve

Outline

II Corinthians 212

13

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 234

14

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 25

15

majority

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 26

16

Chapter Two

II Corinthians 27-9

17

[1if anything what]

Second Corinthians

- Matthew 1619 amp 1818-20

18

Chapter Two

ASIA MINOR

Aegean

Sea

EPHESUS

THRACE

MYSIATROAS

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

CORINTH

HELLESPONT

19

PHILIPPI

Second Corinthians

The City of Troas

ldquoLeading In

Triumphrdquo

20

Kyle P

ope

Chapter Two

21

clarity but

in Christ we-speak

II Corinthians 217

Second Corinthians

22

Chapter Two Review

verse fifteen

Outline

[to-commend]

[Or if] not we-need

II Corinthians 31

23

Second Corinthians

in the hearts

[of-us of-you-all]

having-been-written

II Corinthians 323

24

Chapter Three

I Corinthians 345

25

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 36

letter [kills kills

26

Chapter Three

δOgraveξ˙

II Corinthians 378

glory

27

Second Corinthians

[in] glory

re- in glorymaining

28

Chapter Three

29

Second Corinthians

[1Moses]

2when [1But if]

30

Chapter Three

sectλευθερα

freedom

II Corinthians 317

31

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 318

32

Chapter Three

33

Second Corinthians

34

Outline

II Corinthians 412

[we-faint]

truth

35

Second Corinthians

The God of This Age

II Corinthians 434

36

Chapter Four

37

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 456

ΧριστοEuml

of-Christ]

38

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 47-9

39

Second Corinthians

40

Chapter Four

41

Second Corinthians

ΘεοEuml

we-spoke and we

God

42

Chapter Four

43

Second Corinthians

44

αasympνια

(are)-eternal

Chapter Four

II Corinthians 418

45

Chapter Four Review

of man is eternal

Second Corinthians

46

Outline

in the Heavens 51-5

II Corinthians 51

47

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 523

48

Chapter Five

49

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 545

50

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 56-8

the Lord

51

Second Corinthians

Walking By Faith

52

[evil foul]

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 5910

53

Second Corinthians

54

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 511

Judgment Seats

Fearing The Lord

Kyle P

ope

55

Second Corinthians

56

The Love of Christ

Chapter Five

57

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 515

58

Chapter Five

59

Second Corinthians

60

Chapter Five

II Corinthians 521

of- in HimGod

61

Second Corinthians

62

Chapter Five Review

Outline

63

II Corinthians 61

II Corinthians 62

Second Corinthians

64

II Corinthians 63

Chapter Six

65

The Armor of

Righteousness

II Corinthians 64-7

ourselves as

and of-(the)left

Second Corinthians

66

67

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

68

Chapter Six

II Corinthians 614

69

Second Corinthians

70

The Christianrsquos

Belial

71

Chapter Six

Second Corinthians

72

Chapter Six Review

Outline

Verse Sixteen

II Corinthians 71

[(the)- of-Godlove]

73

Second Corinthians

Cleansing Ourselves

74

to receive them

Chapter Seven

75

II Corinthians 72-4

Second Corinthians

76

Chapter Seven

Godly Sorrow

II Corinthians 75-8

77

[works]

Second Corinthians

78

Chapter Seven

79

and their meaning

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 711

80

Chapter Seven

Towards God mdash

Towards Paul mdash

81

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 712

82

The Joy of Titus

Chapter Seven

83

you-all

Iacutemicrorsaquoν

Second Corinthians

84

Chapter Seven

85

this statement

Second Corinthians

86

Outline

II Corinthians 812

87

Second Corinthians

HELLESPONT

Aegean

Sea

CORINTH

PHIIPPI

ACHAIA

MACEDONIA

THESSALONICA

BEREA

88

Chapter Eight

89

II Corinthians 83-6

Second Corinthians

90

Chapter Eight

91

ldquoReadinessrdquo

II Corinthians 811

omits]ιν

Second Corinthians

92

Chapter Eight

93

Who Was Titus

Second Corinthians

94

Chapter Eight

95

96

Second Corinthians

Outline

97

II Corinthians 912

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 93-5

2I-have-sent

[may-prepare]

98

Gift 93-5

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 96

99

Each just-as

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 97

100

Chapter Nine

II Corinthians 989

[2having-power

ages

101

Second Corinthians

102

Chapter Nine

God [of-God]

103

filling-up the

104

Second Corinthians

105

Chapter Nine

Chapter Nine Review

Second Corinthians

106

Outline

II Corinthians 1012

107

Second Corinthians

108

Chapter Ten

109

II Corinthians 1034

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 1056

110

Chapter Ten

Captivity to Christ

Criticism of Paul

107-11

Bodily Pressence

3if [2even] 1For

111

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 1011

II Corinthians 1012

112

Chapter Ten

113

to-boast

Second Corinthians

114

[commending]

that- [is approved

approved is] [but]

Glory in the Lord

Chapter Ten

115

Chapter Ten Review

Chapter Ten

116

Outline

me

II Corinthians 111

117

Second Corinthians

Godly Jealousy

Betrothed to Christ

II Corinthians 112

118

Chapter Eleven

119

II Corinthians 113

Second Corinthians

II Corinthians 114

different which not

you-all-bear-(it)]

120

2I-count

Chapter Eleven

II Corinthians 1156

121

Second Corinthians

122

Chapter Eleven

Angel of Light

123

works of-them

124

Second Corinthians

even I-will-boast

125

Chapter Eleven

Why Does Paul Boast

Second Corinthians

126

I-say as because we

am- even-bold I

Chapter Eleven

127

I-also Israelites

All the Churches

[forty]

false- [in]brothers

and in-nakedness

128

Second Corinthians

Chapter Eleven

129

[tumult care]

and not I burn If

Lord [of-us] Jesus

of-him

Paulrsquos Escape

from Damascus

Second Corinthians

elsewhere described

130

Outline

II Corinthians 1212

131

Second Corinthians

The Third Heaven

ndash Paradise

me

132

Chapter Twelve

133

II Corinthians 127

Second Corinthians

134

Chapter Twelve

ought by you [us]

in-signs

and [wonders]

and [powers]

135

parents] [but] the

Second Corinthians

136

not I-have-burdened

you-all [but]

[footsteps]

[Again Already

Chapter Twelve

137

tions

Second Corinthians

138

Chapter Twelve

139

Second Corinthians

140

Outline

141

Second Corinthians

142

II Corinthians 1334

since

[or] not

Chapter Thirteen

143

II Corinthians 1356

Second Corinthians

truthrdquo

144

Chapter Thirteen

145

kiss kiss holy]

Second Corinthians

146

omit]

(lines 612)]

Cover
Table of Contents
Prefacepi
Chapter Onep1
Chapter Twop13
Chapter Threep23
Chapter Fourp35
Chapter Fivep47
Chapter Sixp63
Chapter Sevenp73
Chapter Eightp87
Chapter Ninep97
Chapter Tenp107
Chapter Elevenp117
Chapter Twelvep131

Date post:	04-Feb-2022
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	4 times
Download:	0 times

The Second Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the Church in Corinth

Documents